Eia Decpcl Vol-1 Final

Environmental Impact Assessment
VOLUME I: MAIN REPORT

PREPARED BY:
EQMS CONSULTING LIMITED

SUIT# C1, HOUSE# 76, ROAD# 05, BLOCK# F, BANANI, DHAKA-1213, BANGLADESH
Website: www.eqms.com.bd
Final EIA Report
Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Limited (DECPCL)
Environmental Impact Assessment(EIA) for the 200 MW HFO-

Fired Power Plant at Gunrajdi, Chandpur, Bangladesh
Reference #0017820197
No:
March 2018
Reviewed & Approved by:
Kazi Farhed Iqubal

Executive Director
This report has been prepared and reviewed by EQMS company, with all responsible
skill, care and diligence within the terms of the Contact with the client, incorporating
our General Terms and Conditions of Business and taking account of the resources
devoted to it by agreement with the client.
We disclaim any responsibility to the client and others in respect of any matters outside
the scope of the above.
This report is confidential to the client and we accept no responsibility of whatsoever
nature to third parties to whom this report, or any part thereof, is made known. Any
such party relies on the report at their own risk.
EIA Report Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd.

www.eqms.com.bd i March 2018
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS....................................................................................................................................ii
LIST OF TABLES...............................................................................................................................................ix
LIST OF FIGURES.............................................................................................................................................xi
LIST OF ACRONYMS....................................................................................................................................xiv
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY...............................................................................................................................xix
1.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................xix
1.2 EIA Study Methodology.................................................................................................................xx
1.3 Project Description...........................................................................................................................xx
1.4 Baseline Environment Survey.......................................................................................................xxi
1.5 Environmental and Social Impact Evaluation and Mitigation................................................xxii
1.6 Environmental Management Plan...............................................................................................xxii
1.7 Implementation of EMP...............................................................................................................xxiii
1.8 Occupational Health and Safety.................................................................................................xxiii
1.9 Power Plant Risk Management...................................................................................................xxiv
1.10 Grievance Redress Mechanism...................................................................................................xxiv
1.11 Stakeholder Consultation............................................................................................................xxiv
1.12 Conclusion.....................................................................................................................................xxiv
1.13 Project Justification to Get EIA Approval..................................................................................xxv
1 INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Background.........................................................................................................................................1
1.2 Present Scenario of Bangladesh Power Sector...............................................................................2
1.2.1 Present Installed Generation Capacity....................................................................................2
1.2.2 Present Power Sector Scenario of Bangladesh.......................................................................4
1.2.3 The Power System Master Plan 2016 Forecast.......................................................................4
1.2.4 Review of Power Development Plan.......................................................................................6
1.3 Justification of the HFO Based Power Plant by DECPCL............................................................6
1.4 Objectives of EIA................................................................................................................................7
1.5 EIA Methodology...............................................................................................................................7
1.5.1 Impact Assessment Process......................................................................................................7
1.6 Study Area Boundary......................................................................................................................14
1.7 Scoping..............................................................................................................................................17
1.8 Baseline Data Generation................................................................................................................17
1.9 EIA Team...........................................................................................................................................17

www.eqms.com.bd ii March 2018
1.10 Report Structure...............................................................................................................................18
2 POLICY, LEGAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE FRAMEWORK............................................................20
2.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................20
2.2 Environment Related Policies in Bangladesh..............................................................................20
2.2.1 National Environmental Policy, 1992....................................................................................20
2.2.2 National Environmental Management Action Plan, 1995..................................................21
2.2.3 National Conservation Strategy, 1992...................................................................................21
2.3 Environment and Social Related Legislation in Bangladesh.....................................................23
2.3.1 Bangladesh Environmental Conservation Act, 1995 subsequent amendments in 2000
and 2002)...................................................................................................................................................23
2.3.2 Environment Conservation Rules (ECR), 1997 (subsequent amendments in 2002 and
2003) 23
2.4 National Policies and Laws Related to Power Generation........................................................28
2.5 Administrative Setup related to Environment in Bangladesh..................................................31
2.5.1 Department of Environment (DOE)......................................................................................31
2.6 Relevant International Treaties and Conventions.......................................................................33
2.7 Development Agency’s Guidelines...............................................................................................35
2.7.1 ADB’s Safeguard Policy Statement, 2009..............................................................................35
2.7.2 International Finance Corporation (IFC) Performance Standards....................................39
2.7.3 IFC Project Categorization......................................................................................................43
2.8 World Bank's Environmental Safeguard Policies........................................................................45
2.8.1 Environmental Assessment (OP 4.01)...................................................................................45
2.8.2 Natural Habitats (OP 4.04)......................................................................................................46
2.8.3 Pest Management (OP 4.09)....................................................................................................46
2.8.4 Indigenous Peoples (OP 4.10).................................................................................................47
2.8.5 Physical Cultural Resources (OP 4.11)..................................................................................47
2.8.6 Involuntary Resettlement (OP 4.12)......................................................................................48
2.8.7 Forests (OP 4.36).......................................................................................................................48
2.8.8 International Waterways (OP 7.50)........................................................................................49
2.9 Equator Principle..............................................................................................................................49
2.10 Environmental Standards...............................................................................................................50
3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................................................51
3.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................51
3.2 The Project Site.................................................................................................................................52
3.2.1 Site Location..............................................................................................................................52

www.eqms.com.bd ii March 2018
3.3 The power plant...............................................................................................................................53
3.3.1 Power Plant Layout..................................................................................................................53
3.3.2 Power Generation Equipment................................................................................................56
3.3.3 Power Generation Flow Diagram..........................................................................................58
3.3.4 HFO Supply Facility.................................................................................................................62
3.3.5 Power evacuation process.......................................................................................................63
3.3.6 Storage Tank.............................................................................................................................64
3.3.7 Fuel Treatment Plant...............................................................................................................64
3.3.8 Utility Demand.........................................................................................................................65
3.4 Civil Construction............................................................................................................................65
3.4.1 Site Preparation........................................................................................................................65
3.4.2 Piling 66
3.4.3 Foundations..............................................................................................................................66
3.4.4 Roads 66
3.4.5 Drainage System.......................................................................................................................66
3.4.6 Power Station Buildings..........................................................................................................67
3.4.7 Sub-station.................................................................................................................................67
3.4.8 Site Fencing...............................................................................................................................67
3.4.9 Fuel Loading Terminal............................................................................................................67
3.4.10 Project Schedule........................................................................................................................67
3.5 Generation of Pollutants.................................................................................................................69
3.6 Pollution Control Mechanism.........................................................................................................69
3.6.1 Waste Water Treatment Plant................................................................................................69
3.6.2 Air Pollution Control...............................................................................................................69
3.6.3 Solid Waste control..................................................................................................................69
3.6.4 Noise control.............................................................................................................................69
4 BASELINE ENVIRONMENT.................................................................................................................71
4.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................71
4.2 Objective and Methodology...........................................................................................................72
4.3 Area of Influence (AoI)....................................................................................................................72
4.3.1 Key Feature of the Site and Surroundings............................................................................74
4.4 Physical Environment......................................................................................................................79

4.4.1 Climate.......................................................................................................................................79
4.4.2 Geology......................................................................................................................................84

4.4.3 Topography...............................................................................................................................86
4.4.4 Physiography............................................................................................................................87
4.4.5 Hydrology and Drainage........................................................................................................90
4.4.6 Soil Type....................................................................................................................................91
4.4.7 Land Use....................................................................................................................................93
4.5 Natural Hazards...............................................................................................................................94
4.5.1 Cyclone and Storm Surges......................................................................................................94
4.5.2 Tornado......................................................................................................................................96
4.5.3 Earthquake and seismic activity............................................................................................96
4.5.4 Floods 98
4.6 Road and River Traffic..................................................................................................................100
4.7 Environmental Quality..................................................................................................................103
4.7.1 Ambient Air Quality..............................................................................................................103
4.7.2 Ambient Noise Quality..........................................................................................................107
4.7.3 Water Quality..........................................................................................................................110
4.7.4 Soil and Sediment Quality....................................................................................................116
4.8 Biological Environment.................................................................................................................118
4.8.1 Biodiversity of the Study Area.............................................................................................118
4.8.2 Bio-Ecological Zone................................................................................................................119
4.8.3 Biodiversity of Flora...............................................................................................................120
4.8.4 Biodiversity of fauna..............................................................................................................126
4.8.5 Phytoplankton & Zooplankton Composition....................................................................133
4.9 Social baseline.................................................................................................................................135
4.9.1 Socio-Economic Baseline Conditions..................................................................................135
4.9.2 Administrative area and location........................................................................................135
4.9.3 Population and Demography...............................................................................................136
4.9.4 Education.................................................................................................................................137
4.9.5 Settlement and Housing........................................................................................................137
4.9.6 Public Utilities.........................................................................................................................138
4.9.7 Economy and Employment...................................................................................................139
5 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT AND MITIGATION MEASURES

141
5.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................141
5.2 Identification of Potential Impacts...............................................................................................141

www.eqms.com.bd v March 2018
5.3 Impact in Pre-construction phase................................................................................................144
5.4 Impact in Construction Phase......................................................................................................144
5.4.1 Impact on soil quality............................................................................................................144
5.4.2 Impact on water Resources...................................................................................................147
5.4.3 Impact on Air Quality...........................................................................................................149
5.4.4 Impact on Noise Quality.......................................................................................................151
5.4.5 Impact on Ecosystem.............................................................................................................154
5.4.6 Impact on Traffic....................................................................................................................157
5.4.7 Impacts on Community Health and Safety........................................................................158
5.4.8 Occupational Health and Safety..........................................................................................159
5.4.9 Impacts on Socio-economy...................................................................................................161
5.4.10 Impact society due to Labor Influx......................................................................................162
5.5 Impact in Operational Phase........................................................................................................164
5.5.1 Impact on soil Quality...........................................................................................................164
5.5.2 Impact on Water Resource....................................................................................................166
5.5.3 Impact on Air Quality...........................................................................................................167
5.5.4 Impact on climate due to Green House Gas Emissions....................................................170
5.5.5 Impact on Ambient Noise.....................................................................................................172
5.5.6 Impact on Ecosystem.............................................................................................................178
5.5.7 Impacts on Community Health and Safety........................................................................179
5.5.8 Impact on Occupational health and safety.........................................................................180
5.5.9 Impact on Road Traffic..........................................................................................................181
5.5.10 Impacts on Socio-Economy...................................................................................................182
5.6 Environmental Impact due to power transmission line...........................................................183
5.7 Impact due to Approach Road.....................................................................................................184
6 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES........................................................................................................186
6.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................186
6.2 The No Build Scenario...................................................................................................................186
6.3 Consideration of Alternatives......................................................................................................186
7 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (ESMP).........................................187
7.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................187
7.2 Mitigation Measures......................................................................................................................187
7.3 River Bank Protection Plan...........................................................................................................207
7.4 Environmental Monitoring...........................................................................................................207

7.4.1 Performance Indicators and Monitoring Schedule...........................................................208
7.4.2 Reporting Mechanism for Environmental and Social Monitoring Program.................208
7.5 Institutional Setting and Implementation Arrangements........................................................215
7.6 Training...........................................................................................................................................217
7.6.1 Construction Phase................................................................................................................217
7.6.2 Operation Phase......................................................................................................................217
7.7 Plans for Construction and Operation Phase of the Project.....................................................218
7.7.1 Construction Phase................................................................................................................218
7.7.2 Operation Phase......................................................................................................................219
7.8 Budget..............................................................................................................................................219
8 HAZARDS AND RISK ASSESSMENT...............................................................................................220
8.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................220
8.2 RA Study Objective........................................................................................................................220
8.3 Risk assessment process................................................................................................................220
8.4 Potential Hazard and Risk during different stages...................................................................221
8.5 Flammable Chemicals...................................................................................................................225
8.6 Frequency Analysis........................................................................................................................225
8.6.1 Frequency Analysis- Diesel and HFO Storage...................................................................225
8.7 Consequence Analysis-Tankages.................................................................................................226
8.7.1 Risk Modeling Scenarios.......................................................................................................227
8.7.2 Diesel Storage Tank...............................................................................................................227
8.7.3 HFO Storage Tank..................................................................................................................230
8.7.4 HFO Buffer Tank....................................................................................................................232
8.7.5 HFO Service (Day) Tank.......................................................................................................234
8.8 Emergency Response and Disaster Management Plan............................................................236
8.8.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................236
8.8.2 What is Emergency................................................................................................................236
8.8.3 Potential causes of an Power plant Accident.....................................................................236
8.8.4 Objectives of Emergency Planning......................................................................................237
8.8.5 Emergency Management Plan..............................................................................................237

8.9 Emergency Procedure....................................................................................................................241
8.10 Emergency facilities.......................................................................................................................242
8.10.1 Alarm System..........................................................................................................................242
8.10.2 Communication System........................................................................................................243

8.10.3 Siren for Emergency...............................................................................................................243
8.10.4 Escape Route...........................................................................................................................243
8.10.5 Evacuation...............................................................................................................................243
8.10.6 Counting of Personnel...........................................................................................................243
8.10.7 All Clear Signal.......................................................................................................................243
8.10.8 Mutual Aid System................................................................................................................244
8.11 Activities Due to Emergency........................................................................................................244
8.11.1 Record Keeping......................................................................................................................245
8.11.2 Responsibility..........................................................................................................................245
8.12 Emergency Response for Natural Hazards................................................................................245
8.13 Emergency Response Plan for Other Hazards...........................................................................247
8.13.1 Fire 247
8.13.2 Fatal Accidents........................................................................................................................247
8.13.3 Utilities Failure.......................................................................................................................248
8.14 Emergency Plan should contain...................................................................................................248
9 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY......................................................................................249
9.1 Health and safety aspects..............................................................................................................249
9.2 Personnel Safety.............................................................................................................................249
9.3 Medical Surveillance......................................................................................................................249
9.4 Fire Safety........................................................................................................................................250
10 GRIEVANCE REDRESS MECHANISM (GRM)............................................................................251
10.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................251
10.2 Objectives of Grievance Redress Mechanism.............................................................................251
10.3 Composition of GRC......................................................................................................................251
10.4 Functional Premises of GRC for Grievance Redress.................................................................252
10.5 Disclosure of the Grievance Redress Mechanism......................................................................252
10.6 Grievance Reporting Procedure under GRM.............................................................................253
10.7 Grievance Redress Process of GRC..............................................................................................253
10.8 Monitoring and Evaluation...........................................................................................................255

10.9 Budgeting........................................................................................................................................255
11 PUBLIC CONSULTATION...............................................................................................................256
11.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................256
11.2 Objective of the consultation and public participation.............................................................256
11.3 Public involvement and disclosure..............................................................................................256

11.4 Approach and Methodology for Consultation..........................................................................256
11.5 Stakeholder Assessment................................................................................................................257
11.6 Information Disclosure and Consultation..................................................................................262
11.7 Public Consultation Meeting........................................................................................................264
11.8 Focus Group Discussion................................................................................................................265
12 CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATION...............................................................................267
12.1 Conclusion.......................................................................................................................................267
12.2 Recommendation............................................................................................................................267
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1: Segregation of Installed Generation Capacity of Bangladesh...................................................3
Table 1-2: Power Generation Units (fuel type wise) of Bangladesh...........................................................3
Table 1-3: Maximum Power Demand form 2015 to 2041..............................................................................6
Table 1-4: Impact Assessment Process............................................................................................................9
Table 1-5: Nature of the Impact......................................................................................................................10
Table 1-6: Impact Extent from the project location......................................................................................10
Table 1-7: Duration of Impact.........................................................................................................................10
Table 1-8: Intensity of Impact.........................................................................................................................11
Table 1-9: Potential for irreplaceable loss of resources...............................................................................11
Table 1-10: Probability of Impact...................................................................................................................11
Table 1-11: Significance..................................................................................................................................12
Table 1-12: Significance of issues (based on Environmental Parameters)...............................................12
Table 1-13: Potential Social Impact Significance..........................................................................................13
Table 1-14: Potential Public Health Impact Significance............................................................................14
Table 1-15: EIA study team.............................................................................................................................18
Table 1-16: Layout of the EIA Report............................................................................................................18
Table 2-1: Policies relevant to Environment.................................................................................................22
Table 2-2: National Legal Instruments relevant to the Project...................................................................24
Table 2-3: Project Relevant International Treaties and Conventions........................................................34
Table 2-4: Project Categorization as per ADB Safeguards.........................................................................38
Table 2-5: IFC Performance Standards..........................................................................................................39
Table 3-1: Key Information of Proposed HFO based power plant at Chandpur...................................51

Table 3-2: Main dimensions of W18V50 generating set..............................................................................56
Table 3-3: Engine Main Data...........................................................................................................................57
Table 3-4: Generator Main Data....................................................................................................................57
Table 3-5: Dimension of storage tank...........................................................................................................64
Table 3-6: Utility Consumption during Construction and Operational Phases.......................................65
Table 3-7: Type of pollutants..........................................................................................................................69
Table 4-1: Important features around the power plant...............................................................................75
Table 4-2: Existing Land Use Composition Around 10 km of the Project Study Area...........................93
Table 4-3: List of Tornadoes had hit the project site and surroundings...................................................96
Table 4-4: Road and River Traffic monitoring location............................................................................101
Table 4-5: Methodology for Analysis of Ambient Air Quality................................................................104
Table 4-6: Ambient Air Quality Sampling Locations................................................................................104
Table 4-7: Ambient Air Quality in the Study Area....................................................................................106
Table 4-8: Details of Ambient Noise Monitoring Locations.....................................................................107
Table 4-9: Noise Level Parameter in and around the Proposed Site.......................................................109
Table 4-10: Methods of Water Analysis.......................................................................................................110
Table 4-11: Surface water sampling locations in Dakatia River near project site..................................111
Table 4-12: Surface Water Quality of Dakatia River................................................................................112
Table 4-13: Standard values for inland surface water...............................................................................113
Table 4-14: Ground Water Collection point...............................................................................................114
Table 4-15: Ground water analysis result...................................................................................................115
Table 4-16: Details of Soil and Sediment sampling locations..................................................................116
Table 4-17: Soil and Sediment Quality Analysis Result............................................................................118
Table 4-18: Heavy Metal Contents of the Natural Soil.............................................................................118
Table 4-19: Information on Project site Bio-ecological Zone....................................................................119
Table 4-20: Quadrates location.....................................................................................................................121
Table 4-21: Weed Species in the study area................................................................................................122
Table 4-22: Available homestead floral species within the study area...................................................123
Table 4-23: Biodiversity index of floral species at study area..................................................................126
Table 4-24: Birds species counted in the study area..................................................................................127
Table 4-25: Herpetofauna counted in the study area................................................................................129
Table 4-26: Mammals counted in the study area.......................................................................................130
Table 4-27: List of fish species found in the study area............................................................................130
Table 4-28: Phytoplankton Community Composition at the Monitored Locations.............................134
Table 4-29: Zooplankton Community Composition at the Monitored Locations................................135
Table 4-30: Study Area...................................................................................................................................135
Table 4-31: Demography of the Study Area...............................................................................................136
Table 4-32: Electricity connection in the Study Area.................................................................................139
Table 4-33: Employment status of the Study Area.....................................................................................140
Table 5-1: Impact identification matrix for the proposed power plant..................................................142
Table 5-2: Receptor Location with Respect to the Project.........................................................................168
Table 5-3: Predicted NOx concentration in the receptor point................................................................169
Table 5-4: Predicted SO2 concentration in the receptor point..................................................................169
Table 5-5: Maximum NOx and SO2 concentration in various distances from the power plant..........169

www.eqms.com.bd x March 2018
Table 5-6: Estimated GHG Emissions from the Plant...............................................................................171
Table 5-7: Noise standard for Bangladesh..................................................................................................173
Table 5-8: IFC noise level guidelines...........................................................................................................173
Table 5-9: Noise generated from major sources at DECPCL power plant.............................................173
Table 5-10: Predicted Noise Levels at Receptors during operation of DECPCL power plant............174
Table 7-1: Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP) for Construction Phase of the Project
...................................................................................................................................................................188
Table 7-2: Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP) for Operational and Maintenance
Phase of the Project........................................................................................................................................201
Table 7-3: Environmental and social Monitoring Plan (Construction and Operation Phase)............209
Table 7-4: Roles and Responsibilities of Project Developer and EPC Contractor.................................215
Table 8-1: Potential hazard and risk during pre-construction and construction phase.......................222
Table 8-2 : Potential hazard and risk during operation phase.................................................................223
Table 8-3: List of fuel tank in the power plant...........................................................................................225
Table 8-4: Frequency Categories and Criteria............................................................................................225
Table 8-5: Tank Failure Frequency...............................................................................................................226
Table 8-6: Effect of thermal radiation on equipment and people...........................................................227
Table 11-1: Stakeholder Mapping for the Project......................................................................................259
Table 11-2: Brief overview of the Public Consultation Meeting..............................................................264
Table 11-3: Details of Focus Group Discussion..........................................................................................265
Table 11-4: Summary of Focus Group Meeting.........................................................................................265
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1: Bangladesh Power Sector Overview (Source: PSMP-2016)......................................................4
Figure 1-2: Estimated Composite Daily Load Curve in the summer..........................................................5
Figure 1-3: Peak Demand Projection using GDP Elasticity Method (case comparison)..........................5
Figure 1-4: EIA study Process...........................................................................................................................8
Figure 1-5: 10 Km Study Area Map...............................................................................................................15
Figure 1-6: Location Map Of the proposed Project......................................................................................16
Figure 2-1: DoE Environmental Clearance Applicability and Procedure................................................33
Figure 3-1: Location Map of proposed power plant...................................................................................53
Figure 3-2: Proposed power plant layout.....................................................................................................55
Figure 3-3: Typical Wärtsilä 18V generating set arrangement...................................................................56
Figure 3-4: The combustion process in W18V50 Engine............................................................................57
Figure 3-5: Simplified process flow diagram of DECPCL power plant...................................................60
Figure 3-6: HFO Transportation Model.......................................................................................................62
Figure 3-7: Power evacuation route of DECPCL.........................................................................................63
Figure 3-8: Tentative project construction schedule of the proposed power plant at Gunrajdi,
Chandpur..........................................................................................................................................................68
Figure 3-9: Plant layout along with green belt.............................................................................................70
Figure 4-1: Baseline Map of the Proposed Power Plant.............................................................................73
Figure 4-2: Location of key feature around the proposed project site......................................................74
Figure 4-3: Key features in and around the project site..............................................................................79

www.eqms.com.bd xi March 2018
Figure 4-4: Climatic zones in Bangladesh.....................................................................................................80
Figure 4-5: Temperature variation at Chandpur Station (1986 to 2016)...................................................81
Figure 4-6: Average monthly relative humidity in % (1986-2016) at Chandpur Station........................81
Figure 4-7: Average of total monthly rainfall in mm (1986-2016) at Chandpur Station.........................82
Figure 4-8: Monthly Wind Rose Diagram, 2016...........................................................................................83
Figure 4-9: Seasonal Wind Rose Diagram, 2016...........................................................................................84
Figure 4-10: Annual Wind Rose diagram at Chandpur, 2016....................................................................84
Figure 4-11: Geology of Bangladesh showing the project area..................................................................85
Figure 4-12: Digital Elevation Model of the project area............................................................................87
Figure 4-13: Physiography map of Bangladesh showing the project area...............................................88
Figure 4-14: Drainage map around the project area...................................................................................90
Figure 4-15: Soil map of Bangladesh showing the project area.................................................................92
Figure 4-16: Land use/Land cover map shows the land use pattern within 10 Km of the study area
.....................................................................................................................................................................94
Figure 4-17: Map showing cyclonic storm tracks of Bangladesh with project area................................95
Figure 4-18: Earthquake Zone with Fault Line Map...................................................................................97
Figure 4-19: Map showing Earthquake Zones of Bangladesh with project area.....................................98
Figure 4-20: Flood Map of Bangladesh with project area...........................................................................99
Figure 4-21: Location Map of Road and River Traffic Survey.................................................................100
Figure 4-22: Distribution of various types of vehicles on Chandpur-Faridganj Road..........................101
Figure 4-23: Hourly vehicular movement on Chandpur-Faridganj Road..............................................102
Figure 4-24: Types of water vessels on Dakatia River..............................................................................102
Figure 4-25: Hourly vessels movement on Dakatia River, Chandpur....................................................103
Figure 4-26: Ambient Air and Noise Level Monitoring Location...........................................................105
Figure 4-27: Photographs of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring...............................................................106
Figure 4-28: Pictures taken during noise monitoring in and around project site.................................109
Figure 4-29: Surface and Ground Water sampling location......................................................................111
Figure 4-30: Photographs taken during surface water sampling and on-site test................................112
Figure 4-31: Photographs taken during ground water sampling and on-site test................................115
Figure 4-32: Sampling Location Map for Soil and Sediment....................................................................117
Figure 4-33: Soil Sampling in and around project site..............................................................................117
Figure 4-34: Bio-Ecological Zone of Bangladesh and Project Location..................................................120
Figure 4-35: Types of homestead tree species............................................................................................122
Figure 4-36: Pictures taken during block study.........................................................................................124
Figure 4-37: Types of plant species in the study block.............................................................................125
Figure 4-38: Different family’s number of Birds.........................................................................................127
Figure 4-39: Birds species found in the study area....................................................................................129
Figure 4-40: Number of fish family at the study area...............................................................................131
Figure 4-41: IUCN Fishes status (2015) in the study area.........................................................................132
Figure 4-42: Photographs of in field fish survey........................................................................................133
Figure 4-43: Sampling of Phytoplankton & Zooplankton........................................................................133
Figure 4-44: Distribution of Religion in the Study Area...........................................................................136
Figure 4-45: Ethnic Composition of Study Area........................................................................................137
Figure 4-46: Type of Housing structure in the study area........................................................................137

www.eqms.com.bd xii March 2018
Figure 4-47: Housing Tenancy Status in the Study Area..........................................................................138
Figure 4-48: Sources of Drinking Water in the study area........................................................................138
Figure 4-49: Sanitation Facility in the study area.......................................................................................139
Figure 5-1: Noise contour map for DECPCL power plant operation during day time (Leq day).....175
Figure 5-2: Noise contour map for DECPCL power plant operation during night time (Leq Night)
...................................................................................................................................................................176
Figure 5-3: Approach road and surrounding features..............................................................................184
Figure 7-1: Dakatia river showing depth in various at points.................................................................207
Figure 7-2: Organization Chart for Environmental and Social Management........................................216
Figure 8-1 Risk Assessment Methodology..................................................................................................221
Figure 8-2: Pool Fire Thermal Radiation Threat Zone for HFO Diesel Tank Leakage.........................229
Figure 8-3: Pool Fire Thermal Radiation Threat Zone for HFO Storage Tank Leakage.......................231
Figure 8-4: Pool Fire Thermal Radiation Threat Zone for HFO Buffer Tank Leakage.........................233
Figure 8-5: Pool Fire Thermal Radiation Threat Zone for HFO Day Tank Leakage.............................235
Figure 10-1: Grievance Redress Process for the Project............................................................................254
Figure 11-1: Power/Interest Grid for Stakeholder Prioritization............................................................258
Figure 11-2: Photographs taken during consultation with Stakeholders...............................................264

www.eqms.com.bd xiii March 2018
AOI : Area of Influence
LIST OF ACRONYMS
BBS : Bangladesh Bureau of Statistics
BFDC : Bangladesh Forest Department Corporation
BFRI : Bangladesh Forest Research Institute
BOD : Biological Oxygen Demand
BPC : Bangladesh Petroleum Corporation
CMS : Continuous Monitoring System
CNG : Compressed Natural Gas
CO : Carbon Mono-oxide
COD : Chemical Oxygen Demand
DECPCL : Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd.
dB : Decibel
DOE : Department of Environment
DEPC : Department of Environmental Pollution Control
DFIs : Development Finance Institutions
DO : Dissolve Oxygen
DPHE : Directorate of Public Health Engineering
EC : Environmental Clearance
ECA : Environmental Conservation Act
ECC : Environmental Clearance Certificate
ECR : Environmental Conservation Rules
EHS : Environmental Health and safety
EIA : Environmental Impact Assessment
EIF : Electrical Interconnection Facility
EMP : Environment Management Plan
EPC : Energy Performance Certificate

www.eqms.com.bd xiv March 2018
ERP : Emergency Response Plan
ESIA : Environmental Social Impact Assessment
ESMP : Environmental and social management plan
FD : Forest Department
FGD : Focus Group Discussion
GOB : Government of Bangladesh
GRC Grievance Redress Cell
GRM Grievance Redress Mechanism
HFO : Heavy Fuel Oil
HR : Human Resource
HSE : Health safety and emergency
HVOHL High Voltage Overhead Transmission Line
IEE : Initial Environmental Examination
IUCN : International Union for Conservation of Nature
LC : Least Concern
LHV : Lower Heating Value
MoEF : Ministry of Environment and Forest
NAAQS : National Ambient Air Quality Standards
NEMAP : National Environmental Management Action Plan
NEPA : National Fire Protection Association
NLDC : National Load Dispatch Centre
NOx : Oxide of Nitrogen
PGCB : Power Grid Company of Bangladesh
SOX : Oxide of Sulphur
TDS : Total Dissolved Solids
ToR : Terms of Reference
TSS : Total Suspended Solids

www.eqms.com.bd xv March 2018
WHRB : Waste Heat Recovery Boiler
WHO : World Health Organization
ADB : Asian Development Bank
AOI : Area of Influence
BBS : Bangladesh Bureau of Statistics
BFDC : Bangladesh Forest Department Corporation
BFRI : Bangladesh Forest Research Institute
BOD : Biological Oxygen Demand
BPC : Bangladesh Petroleum Corporation
CMS : Continuous Monitoring System
CNG : Compressed Natural Gas
CO : Carbon Mono-oxide
COD : Chemical Oxygen Demand
DECPCL : Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd.
dB : Decibel
DOE : Department of Environment
DEPC : Department of Environmental Pollution Control
DFIs : Development Finance Institutions
DO : Dissolve Oxygen
DPHE : Directorate of Public Health Engineering
EC : Environmental Clearance
ECA : Environmental Conservation Act
ECC : Environmental Clearance Certificate
ECR : Environmental Conservation Rules
EHS : Environmental Health and safety
EIF : Electrical Interconnection Facility

www.eqms.com.bd xvi March 2018
EMP : Environment Management Plan
EPC : Engineering Procurement Contactor
ERP : Emergency Response Plan
EQS : Environmental Quality Standards
ESIA : Environmental Social Impact Assessment
ESMP : Environmental and social management plan
ESMU : Environmental and Social Monitoring Unit
FD : Forest Department
FGD : Focus Group Discussion
GoB : Government of Bangladesh
HFO : Heavy Fuel Oil
HR : Human Resource
HSE : Health safety and emergency
IEE : Initial Environmental Examination
IUCN : International Union for Conservation of Nature
LC : Least Concern
MoEF : Ministry of Environment and Forest
NAAQS : National Ambient Air Quality Standards
NEMAP : National Environmental Management Action Plan
NEP National Environment Policy
NEPA : National Fire Protection Association
NLDC : National Load Dispatch Centre
NOx : Oxide of Nitrogen
OHS : Occupational Health and Safety
PAP : Project Affected People
PGCB : Power Grid Company of Bangladesh

PPE : Personnel Protective Equipment
SEI : Significant Environmental Impacts
SOX : Oxide of Sulpher
TDS : Total Dissolved Solids
ToR : Terms of Reference
TSS : Total Suspended Solids
WHRB : Waste Heat Recovery Boiler
WHO : World Health Organization

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Introduction
Electricity has a direct positive impact on the national economy of any country. Bangladesh needs to
produce more electricity to excel the sustainable development of the country. Total installed
electricity generation capacity (including captive power) is 16,046 MW as of December 2017 in
Bangladesh of which 20.87% power is generating from HFO based power plant [BPDB]. The
Government to Bangladesh has given highest priority to the power sector development in the
country and has committed to ensure electricity available to all citizens by 2021. Several programs
have already been taken up to implement short, medium and long term plans for the balanced
development of power sector to scale up electricity generation.
Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd. (DECPCL) has been awarded by BPDB to develop
and operate an independent power plant. Power Division under the Ministry of Power, Energy and
Mineral Resources (MPEMR) selected the contractor to build the power plant under the 'Speedy
Supply of Power and Energy (Special Provision) Act 2010' bypassing the tendering process. The
power plant will be a HFO based with net Capacity 200 MW. The proposed power plant will be
setup at Gunrajdi in Chandpur Sadar Upazila under Chandpur district. Total Land area for the
proposed power plant will be 32 acres, of which 19 acres will be used to set up the power plant and
rest will be used for tree plantation and other facilities. The Dakatia River flows besides the
proposed power plant project. BPDB has 150 MW combined cycle power plant at opposite side of
the river and west side of the proposed power plant. The land type of the proposed project site is
agricultural low land and the land is inundated during rainy season. The proposed plant site need
land filling to avoid river over flow during rainy season. The average land filling will be 3.5 meters
according to the topographic survey to get protection against river overflow. Proper embankment
will be built up round the plant site to impede soil erosion due to river water flow. There is no
settlement in the proposed plant site area. There is no structure e.g settlement, mosque, graveyard
or other social and religious structure within the proposed power plant boundary.
Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd. intends to install 12 units of ultra-efficient Wartsila
18V50 HFO Generator sets with combined capacity of 200 MW at the grid at Chandpur. DECPCL
has signed Project Agreements, comprising of Implementation Agreement (IA) and Power Purchase
Agreement (PPA) for setting up the 200 MW Heavy Fuel Oil Power Project on a Build operate and
Own (BOO) basis. The PPA term of the engine based fuel oil fired power plants is 15 years. When it
comes into generation in 2018, it falls within the Short Term (FY 2016-2020) and Mid-Long Term (FY
2021~2025/26-2035) in the Road Map for PSMP 2016.The proposed power plant falls under “red
category” and require carrying out EIA in accordance with the Environment Conservation Act 1995
and the Environment Conservation Rules 1997 (ECR, 1997). DECPCL has submitted Initial
Environmental Examination report to the Department of Environment (DoE) and has obtained the
Environmental Site Clearance Certificate from Department of Environment (DoE) vide letter
No.22.02.1300.221.72.045.17.36 .The IEE report indicates that there are no particularly sensitive
ecological, cultural and archeological targets. The plant installation would not relocate any human
settlement, as the project is situated on purchased land. However, since this is a "red category
project, a full-scale Environmental Impact Assessment is necessary to obtain the final environmental
clearance certificate from the DoE. DECPCL has appointed EQMS Consulting Limited to prepare

www.eqms.com.bd xix March 2018
this EIA report following the guidelines of Department of Environment (DOE), Government of
Bangladesh (GOB).
EIA Study Methodology

This EIA report has been prepared by following the methodology prescribed in the ElA guidelines
for industries of DOE, ECA95 and ECR97, that are the main legislative documents relating to
environment protection in Bangladesh. To carry out environmental and social assessment of the
proposed project, firstly a review of relevant literature on policy, legal and administrative
framework focusing on environmental quality and discharge standards, health and safety issues,
protection of sensitive areas and endangered species, land use controls, etc. were carried out. This
EIA report is prepared as per approved ToR by DoE.
Project Description
Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd. has purchased about 32 acre land at Gunrajdi Mouza,
Chandpur Sadar Upazila, Chandpur District. The land is fallen type and inundated most of time of
a year. Geographical location of the DECPCL project site is between 23°13'23.83"N to 23°13'35.95"N
latitude and 90°40'16.01"E to 90°40'28.72"E longitude. The project is located beside Dakatia River.
Chandpur-Faridganj Road is about 400 meter away from the project site. Proponent need to
construct about 60 meter approach road to touch nearest road which run to the main road. The
nearest road from the power plant is narrow and non-metaled. The road needs to be widened and
repaired to allow large vehicle to reach plant site via road network. The basic information of the
project is given below:
Company Name : Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Limited

200 MW HFO Based Power Plant at Chandpur Sadar, Chandpur
Project Name : District, Bangladesh
Entrepreneur Name : Navidul Huq
Chandpur Sadar(on the Southern bank of river Dakatia), Word No.-
Project Location : 12, Gunrajdi, Chandpur
GPS Location 23°13'30.22"N, 90°40'25.22"E
Type of Business : Power Generation
Net Plant Capacity : 200 MW
Project Cost : BDT. 1391.151 Crore
Total Area of Land : 32 Acre
Total Area Developed : 32 Acre
Employment : 140 persons
Fuel Name Heavy Fuel Oil (HFO)
Fuel Requirement : 795 MT/Day [ at 80% plant factor]
Construction: Deep Tube well
Source of Water : Operation phase: River
Construction phase: 40 m3/day
Water Requirement : Operation Phase: 100 m3/hr
HFO fuel will be collected from global market. The proposed power plant has 15 day HFO storage
capacity. Fuel will be imported via oil vessel at Chittagong. The mother vessel has 35000 MT
capacity. Fuel is then transfer to lighterage having capacity 800 MT and carry to plant site jetty. Fuel

www.eqms.com.bd xx March 2018
is then pumped to fill plant site fuel storage tank. HFO will be treated first in fuel treatment unit
prior to feed in the Engine. Sludge from the fuel will be deposited in a storage tank. DOE approved
vendors will buy this sludge from the power plant. Simplified process flow diagram of the power
plant is presented below.
Reciprocating Generator
HFO 11/132 KV
Engine
transformer
and substation
Steam Generator
Boiler
Exhaust gas to atmosphere
200 MW
National Grid
Exhaust gas will be discharged via 50 meter stack. Air dispersion modeling has been performed
using AERMOD USEPA model to see SO2 and NOX concentration in the ambient air at ground level
due to emission from the proposed power plant. Predicted SO2 and NOX level in the receptor point
are within Bangladesh standard limit. To predict noise level in important receptors point around
the power plant during operation phase, Sound Plan 7.4 noise model has been used. From the
model output it is found that noise control mechanism in the power plant is adequate enough to
keep existing noise level within standard value set by DoE. Details of the air dispersion and
modeling results are presented in Chapter 5.
Baseline Environment Survey

Baseline condition of environment states the present status of different components of environment
in absence of the project. The baseline condition of environmental quality in and around the project
site is the basis for identification, prediction and evaluation of impacts. The baseline environmental
quality is assessed through field survey within 5 km radius impact zone in and around project site
for various environmental components. EQMS Team has conducted baseline survey and collected
baseline environment data during October 2017. The team has collected 2 surface water samples
from the river Dakatia. One ground water sample has been collected from tube well in plant site
and one ground water sample has been collected from tube well near residential place close to the
project site. The team also measure noise level in 8 locations in and around the project site. Four air
sampling has been done in and around project site. EQMS team has collected 2 soil and 2 sediment
samples in and around the project site. Ecological and social survey has been also conducted. The
surface water, ground water, soil, sediment and ambient air quality and noise level have been
analyzed to evaluate the primary baseline environment of the area. There is no resettlement issue as

www.eqms.com.bd xxi March 2018
the project site has been purchased and the land is vacant. Air and Ground water quality
parameters are found within the standard of DoE. Noise levels in most of the places are within the
permissible limit of DoE. According to the field survey along with the FGD and secondary
information no critically endangered flora and fauna found within the study area.
Environmental and Social Impact Evaluation and Mitigation

As a part of the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA), environmental impacts of the power plant
project activities on different ecological, physical, chemical and socio-economic related parameters,
both during the construction phase and the operation phase, have been identified and assessed.
Ecological impact
Based on assessment of the baseline environment at different project locations (during field visits)
and the nature and scale of the proposed project, it appears that ecological impacts are not likely to
be significant.
Socio-economic impacts
Possible socio-economic impacts from the project activities to be carried out may include the
following: (a) traffic safety (b) public health and (c) generation of employment and commercial
activities.
Physical and chemical impacts
Possible physical and chemical impacts from the power plant project activities to be carried out may
include the following: (a) Noise pollution, (b) Air pollution (d) Water pollution (e) Environmental
pollution from solid/ construction waste.
It can be seen that the proposed 200 MW HFO-fired power plant will not have any lasting adverse
environmental impacts on the project area during the construction phase. Implementation of the
proposed project would have a limited amount of short-term, local impacts on flora and fauna,
noise level, water resources, air quality and traffic movement. It is not expected, however, that any
of the above effects would persist over an extended period beyond the installation phase of this
project. During the operation phase, a number of adverse environmental impacts will be there on
the air and noise environment as well as worker health and safety, some of them may be long-term
if appropriate mitigation measures are not taken. Positive impacts include public access to
additional electricity, which may trigger direct and indirect positive effect on national economy,
industrial development and productivity etc. Road and river traffic might also increase as an
indirect effect of the power plant due to the increase of commercial activities in the area and fuel
transportation. A mitigation and abatement plan has been proposed to minimize these short-term
and long-term impacts during construction and operation of the power plant. Detail of the impact
assessment and mitigation measure is given in chapter 5.
Environmental Management Plan

An environment management plan (EMP), including a monitoring program covering issues like air
pollution, noise pollution, traffic congestion, drainage congestion, water resources, social has also
been presented. In the circumstances of the power plant project, Environmental Management Plan
(EMP) is concerned with the implementation of the measures necessary to minimize and offset the

adverse impacts and to enhance beneficial impacts. Unless the mitigation and benefit enhancement
measures are identified in EIA and fully implemented, the prime function of the EIA cannot be
achieved. Thus, the objectives of EMP for the present project are: (i) Identification of Monitoring
requirements and Monitoring indicators; (ii) Mitigation measures to reduce or eliminate negative
impacts; and (iii) Enhancement measures to maximize positive impacts. Environmental
management plan has to be considered as part of the plant’s overall management and it would be
part of the plant operational manual. Monitoring of the performance of a plant is very important
and sometimes vital. Industrial units in Bangladesh generally do not monitor the environmental
parameters related to plant operation, thereby neglecting the environment. For surveillance of the
environmental performance of an industry, and monitoring of the quality of the local environment,
environment in the work-zone and the general impact zone have to be performed on a regular basis.
A management set up has to be created for the environmental monitoring program which can
ensure compliance with national environmental standards. An environmental monitoring plan has
been suggested for both construction and operation phase of the project which delineates the
parameters to be monitored, frequency of monitoring along with the assignment of responsibility.
Monitoring during construction is mainly the responsibility of the Contractor with oversight from
DECPCL. Monitoring during the plant operation is mainly the responsibility of DECPCL.
Implementation of EMP
It is recommended that a qualified plant employee should be designated as the focal point who will
have overall responsibility for plant’s environmental management and monitoring. The focal point
should be supported with required manpower and expertise (i.e., a committee with designated
members) to ensure proper environmental monitoring to take appropriate measures to mitigate any
adverse impact and to enhance beneficial impacts, resulting from the project activities. This person
through his team will make sure that the Contractor undertake and implement appropriate
measures as stipulated in the contract document, or as directed by him to ensure proper
environmental management of the project activities. The plant management will hire environmental
and social specialists as necessary to him in overseeing these activities. The activities will include
preparation of quarterly reports on Environmental Management activities in the plant.
The Plant Management should set up a procedure to address complaints and grievances (e.g.,
receiving formal complaints/ grievances, arrange hearing involving all stakeholders and keeping
records of such hearings, device and implement mitigation measures).The plant management
authority (DECPCL) should be responsible for overall environmental management during
operation phase of the project. An implementation schedule for environmental management and
monitoring during the construction phase will be prepared by the Contractor as part of construction
contract following recommended mitigation measures of potentially significant impacts.
Occupational Health and Safety

Working in this power plant involves a certain amount of occupational hazard both during
construction and operation. These hazards have been identified and an occupational safety plan has
been suggested. It is also emphasized that the Contractor adopts these measures by explicitly stating
the plan in his Contract documents.

Power Plant Risk Management
Apart from risks associated with emissions, noise generation, solid waste, hazardous waste and
wastewater disposal as a result of construction and operation, the HFO-fired power plants put
human beings and the environment inside and outside of the plant to a certain degree of risk of
accident and sometime loss of life. It is therefore essential that a site-specific risk management plan
be devised.
Grievance Redress Mechanism

A grievance redress mechanism has been proposed to mitigate any complaints from project affected
people. DECPCL will be the first line recipient of any grievance. If any complaints cannot be
resolved through direct communication with DECPCL, a grievance redress committee will be
formed to resolve the issue within one month of receiving the complaint.
Stakeholder Consultation
A range of stakeholder engagement and consultation methods have been used to identify concerns,
issues and suggestions for the Project. This included any suggested management and mitigation
measures. This involved Government consultation, face-to face interviews, small group meetings,
focus group discussions and a household level survey.
Outcomes from this consultation showed that the community was generally supportive of the
proposed Project and that the community believed that Project would bring some benefits to them
and the local area. Such perceived benefits included the potential for local employment relating to
the Project and the potential that infrastructure investment in the local area may occur as a result of
the Project.
Key concerns that government stakeholders and local people were found to have about the Project
included safety aspects of the Project, the potential for pollution to occur and that there might be
some damage caused to local roads or other infrastructure during construction. This EIA has
addressed each stakeholder concern with the development of specific mitigation and management
measures.
Conclusion
The present EIA report finds that though there are certain adverse environmental impacts
associated with the industrial unit under consideration, these are manageable.
The project is indispensable in view of the current energy shortage scenario in Bangladesh. The
project has positive impact on the socio-economy. It will facilitate jobs and business opportunity for
local people. The project will help in the industrialization, accelerating socioeconomic growth, and
improving quality of life. One of the most critical issues for the project is safety. This has been
adequately addressed through compliance with national building code (BNBC) in the construction
to ensure safety during natural disasters like earthquake and cyclone and a full-containment for the
HFO storage tank.

Project Justification to Get EIA Approval
EQMS believes that the DECPCL HFO fired power plant should get EIA approval, considering the
following:
 This EIA has fulfilled the requirements of the ECA’95, ECR’97 and other associated rules of
DoE;
 The project is designed to meet up electricity demand of Bangladesh as per PSMP 2016
 Potential negative impacts arising from the Project can be effectively managed and
mitigated;
 Potential cumulative impacts from existing operations are not significant; and
 The Project will also have potential positive (beneficial) impacts.
 The proponent is committed to take necessary measures to mitigate adverse impact from the
proposed power plant during construction stage and also during operation phase as well.
EQMS would recommend to approve this EIA report as a guide book to manage environmental
impact due to the power plant’s construction and operation activities.

www.eqms.com.bd xx March 2018
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Background
Bangladesh Government is trying to accelerate electricity production rapidly in order to reach
electricity to every house hold by 2021 and enhance industrial growth. Lack of availability of
sufficient electric power has impeded the growth of industry in Bangladesh. Bangladesh has a
limited generation capacity, which is lesser than the ever growing demand, resulting in load
shedding. There is only 47% electrification in Bangladesh, most of the supply being limited to city
needs. About 30%-40% of the existing plants may have to be replaced by Bangladesh, due to aging.
The country has a plant load factor of around 51%, which shows ineffective utilization.
Electricity is the major source of power for most of the country's economic activities. Bangladesh's
total installed electricity generation capacity (including captive power) was 16046 MW as of
December 2017. In 2015 92% urban population and 67% rural population have the access to the
electricity for their source of light. Average 77.9% population has the access to the electricity in
Bangladesh. Problems in the Bangladesh's electric power sector include, high system losses, delays
in completion of new plants, low plant efficiency, erratic power supply, electricity theft, blackouts,
and shortages of funds for power plant maintenance. Overall, the country's generation plants have
been unable to meet system demand over the past decade. Noncommercial energy sources, such as
wood fuel, and crop residues, are estimated to account for over half of the country's energy
consumption.
Acceleration in industrial growth is expected due to the ongoing liberalization of the country's
economic policy. Most of the investment required for this increased capacity addition is expected to
be provided by private sector. Several new power projects have been identified to bridge the gap
between demand and availability. The problems of extensive load shedding; poor electrification
ratio can be reduced by setting up new power plants which add to the generation capacity which
also caters to the increasing load demand of the country.
Desh Energy Limited was formed in 2005. The company is a sister concern of Mohammadi Group, a
renowned conglomerate of the country. They have two power plants at present. One is a 100 MW
diesel fired plant at Siddhirgaj, Narayanganj having 96 numbers Caterpillar Generator sets of 1.2
MW capacity each. The other one is belonging to Desh Cambridge Kumargaon Power Company
Limited (DCDECPCL), a subsidiary of Desh Energy Limited. It is a gas fired 10 MW power plant at
Kumargaon, Sylhet. The company produces and supply power to Bangladesh Power Development
Board (BPDB). To meet up power demand and considering the proposal of Desh Energy Limited ,
BPDB has issued a LOI in favor of the company to set up 200 MW HFO based power generation
facility at Chandpur on Build-Own-Operate (BOO) basis under Private Sector Power Generation
Policy 1996 of Bangladesh. Power Division under the Ministry of Power, Energy and Mineral
Resources (MPEMR) selected the contractor to build the power plant under the 'Speedy Supply of
Power and Energy (Special Provision) Act 2010' bypassing the tendering process. The levelized
tariff is tk. 8.3772/ kWh.
At present environmental conservation is being given highest priority worldwide. Bangladesh is not
exceptional. It is mandatory to obtain environmental clearance from the Department of

www.eqms.com.bd 1 March 2018
Environment (DoE) prior to start up any new project plant. According to Bangladesh Environment
Conservation Rules 1997 (ECR), power plants come under the Red category, so far as environmental
impact is concerned. Initial Environment Examination (IEE) followed by Environmental Impact
Assessment (EIA), including Environmental Management Plan (EMP) are required for these types
of installations for getting environmental clearance from DoE.
Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd. is formed to set up 200 MW HFO fired power plant at
Chandpur Sadar in Gunrajdi Mouza, Chandpur. BPDB has signed Power Purchase Agreement
(PPA) with DECPCL on January 04, 2018. The basic information of the project is given below:

Chandpur Sadar(on the southern bank of river Dakatia), Word No.-12,
Project Location : Gunrajdi, Chandpur
GPS Location 23°13'30.22"N, 90°40'25.22"E
Type of Business : Power Generation
Fuel Requirement : 795 MT/Day [ at 80% plant factor]
Source of Water :
Operation phase: Dakatia River
DECPCL has appointed EQMS Consulting Ltd. to conduct IEE and EIA study of the proposed
power plant. The company has already obtained site clearance from DoE after getting approval of
IEE report.
1.2 Present Scenario of Bangladesh Power Sector

1.2.1 Present Installed Generation Capacity
Bangladesh Power Development Board (BPDB) is a statutory body created in May 1, 1972, by
presidential Order No. 59 after bifurcation of erstwhile Bangladesh Water and Power Development
Authority. BPDB started its operation with Installed Generation capacity of only 200 MW. Installed
Generation capacity including Captive Power (as on December, 2017) has increased to
(13,846+2,200) = 16,046 MW. Segregation of installed generation capacity (13, 846 MW as on
Decmber, 2017) between public and private sector is provided below. Due to gradual change in

government policy, share of private parties in energy sector is considerably increased and further
encouragement from government will further aid power sector growth of the country.
Table 1-1: Segregation of Installed Generation Capacity of Bangladesh
Public Sector Installed Generation Capacity (MW)
BPDB 4627
APSCL 1508
EGCB 622
NWPGCL 718
RPCL 77
BPDB-RPCL JV 149
Subtotal 7,701(56%)
Private Sector Installed Generation Capacity (MW)
IPPs 3245
SIPPs (BPDB) 99
SIPPs (REB) 251
15 YR. Rental 169
3/5 YR. Rental 1721
Power Import 660
Subtotal 6,145 (44%)
Total Generation Capacity (MW) 13, 846
Power Generation Units (fuel type wise) of Bangladesh as on December 2017 are presented below
focusing the Installed and Derated Capacity.
Table 1-2: Power Generation Units (fuel type wise) of Bangladesh
Installed Capacity of BPDB Power Plants as on December 2017
Fuel Type Capacity (Unit) Total (%)
Coal 250.00 MW 1.81%
F.Oil 0.00 MW 0%
Gas 8754.00 MW 63.22%
HFO 2794.00 MW 20.18%
HSD 1158.00 MW 8.36%
Hydro 230.00 MW 1.66%
Imported 660.00 MW 4.77%
Total 13846.00 MW 100 %
Derated Capacity of BPDB Power Plants as on October 2017
Fuel Type Capacity (Unit) Total (%)
Coal 170.00 MW 1.29%
F.Oil 0.00 MW 0%
Gas 8161.00 MW 62.07%
HFO 2792.00 MW 21.24%
HSD 1134.00 MW 8.63%
Hydro 230.00 MW 1.75%
Imported 660.00 MW 5.02%
Total 13147.00 MW 100%

1.2.2 Present Power Sector Scenario of Bangladesh
General growth in the economy, rapid industrialization, rural area development and domestic use
of electricity are the main reasons for increase in power consumption in Bangladesh. Government of
Bangladesh has formulated Private Sector Power Generation Policy (PSPGP) in 2006. The record
shows a substantial increase in new generation from private sources during the Sixth Plan after
introduction of PSPGP.
Power Division under MPEMR (Ministry of Power, Energy and Mineral Resources) manages the
electricity business. Under its control, the power is generated by the BPDB and its generation
subsidiaries, IPPs, and Power is supplied through PGCB's power transmission facilities to the
distribution utilities. In the capital city of Dhaka, DPDC and DESCO are responsible for electricity
supply to retail consumers. BPDB and WZPDCL supply electricity to urban areas and REB supply
electricity to rural areas.
Figure 1-1: Bangladesh Power Sector Overview (Source: PSMP-2016)
1.2.3 The Power System Master Plan 2016 Forecast

The PPA term of the engine based fuel oil fired power plants is 15 years. When it comes into
generation in 2018, it falls within the Short Term (FY 2016-2020) and Mid-Long Term (FY
2021~2025/26-2035) in the Road Map for PSMP 2016.
A composite daily load curve representing the peak power demand was created from the daily load
curve in the summer with part of the peak hours replaced by the same part of the daily load curve
in the winter as shown in the figure below. The peak power demand in FY 2014, which was used as
the baseline for the peak demand forecast, was set at 8,039 MW by adding the base and
intermediate load in the summer (5,487 MW and 1,043 MW, respectively) and the peak load in the
winter (1,811 MW) recorded in FY 2015. The peak power demand in FY 2016 was estimated at 8,921

MW in the same way and this value was used as the reference value in the peak power demand
forecast.
Figure 1-2: Estimated Composite Daily Load Curve in the summer

The PSMP 2016 adopted the GDP elasticity method for peak demand projection with high, base and
low case. This attempted an estimation of peak demand by projecting the total sum of power
consumption in each sector. To serve for this a simulation program was used to forecasts the energy
demand for each sector using autocorrelation analysis on the energy intensity of GDP for each
sector (and energy consumption per capita for the residential sector) while setting upper and lower
limitations, and then formulates the future projection for peak demand.
Figure 1-3: Peak Demand Projection using GDP Elasticity Method (case comparison)
The results of peak demand projection in "High-growth Scenario", "Base Scenario" and "Low-
growth Scenario" are shown in Figure 1-3. While the average GDP growth rates from 2015 to 2041
are 6.4% in the "High-growth", 6.1% in the "Base" and 5.9% in the "Low-growth" scenarios, the peak
demand in each scenario in 7.0% p.a. in "High-growth", 6.7% p.a. in "Base" and 6.3% p.a. in "Low-
growth".

1.2.4 Review of Power Development Plan
Estimating the long-term power demand considering with future change of daily load curve to
estimate the long-term power demand considering with future change of daily load curve, the daily
load curve up to 2041 estimated is superimposed on the maximum power demand with
consideration given to the potential demand up to 2041.
Table 1-3: Maximum Power Demand form 2015 to 2041
Power Demand 2015 2020 2025 2030 2035 2040
MW 8,921 12,949 19,191 27,434 36,634 49,034
Source: PSMP 2016
The increase in the power demand, including potential demand driven by the rapid economic
development in recent years, is expected to continue. The shortage of supply is considered to be the
main cause of the continuation of this imbalance between the supply and demand. The actual
outputs of the gas and coal thermal power generation were only at 40% and 60% of the outputs
described in PSMP 2010, respectively. In the case of the coal thermal power generation, a very
important base load power source in the energy mix, while the output in 2015 was forecast at 1,850
MW in PSMP 2010, even the construction of coal power plants has not been commenced five years
after the formulation of the plan. The lack of integrated planning and implementation for the
construction of large-scale port facilities, indispensable for the stable import of fuel, and the
construction of the power plants and the increased difficulty in fundraising for such a large-scale
infrastructure development are considered to be major factors in the failure to develop power
generating facilities as planned.
Therefore, it is considered necessary for the Energy Division and the Power Division to develop an
organizational structure and operating system more integrated than before. They must also make
concerted efforts to formulate a joint infrastructure development plan, to raise funds in the public-
private partnership and to develop infrastructure systematically in order to achieve a stable energy
supply, a source of future economic development.
1.3 Justification of the HFO Based Power Plant by DECPCL

The power sector is facing some challenges for example: Declining reserve of main primary fuel,
Irregular and insufficient gas supply to the gas based plants, Lack of adequate coordination for
implementation of power project, Lack of appropriate cost and asset accounting system, Inadequate
maintenance of power plants, Delay in implementation of power projects, Organizing funds for
project implementation, Lots of projects are in pipeline and Lack of prioritization schedule /proper
planning, Load Shedding , Lack of maintenance budget, Failure in routine maintenance and Force
shut down of Power Plants, Blackout. In addition to present challenges, the sector is going to face
some challenges in future mainly due to expansion of the sector. The future challenges include
Primary Fuel Supply, Lack of cooling water due to the changing situation, Project Financing,
Transportation of Fuel, Safe operation of nuclear power plants and Human Resource Development
for the rather newer technologies.
Due to continuously depleting natural gas resource and unavailability of sufficient nuclear / hydro
power generation in the country, Government of Bangladesh is presently exploring new power

generation sources mainly through coal based thermal power and heavy fuel oil. Further
Government is also looking forward for more investment in power sector in form of IPP developers.
1.4 Objectives of EIA

The specific objectives of this EIA are to:
 Present a brief discussion on the EIA process and its role in the planning and
implementation of development projects;
 Present a general description of the project and the process;
 Present a description of the pre-project environment;
 Delineate the significant environmental issues found and believed to be involved;
 Assess the existing environmental conditions in the project area, including the identification
of environmentally sensitive issues;
 Assess the proposed activities to identify their potential impacts, evaluate the impacts, and
determine their significance;
 Suggest the plan for management of the environment, during the implementation and
operation of the plant.
1.5 EIA Methodology

This EIA report has been prepared by following the methodology prescribed in the ElA guidelines
for industries of DOE, ECA95 and ECR97, that are the main legislative documents relating to
environment protection in Bangladesh. To carry out environmental and social assessment of the
proposed project, firstly a review of relevant literature on policy, legal and administrative
framework focusing on environmental quality and discharge standards, health and safety issues,
protection of sensitive areas and endangered species, land use controls, etc. were carried out. This
EIA report is prepared as per approved ToR by DoE.
1.5.1 Impact Assessment Process

EIA process involves identification of the key impacts on the natural and social environment and
evaluation of the significant impacts along with the recommendation of measures as well as a listing
of unresolved environmental issues. The ESIA includes a collection of baseline information, an
indication of important environmental and social components through scoping session, setting up
of spatial and temporal boundaries for assessing impacts, impact assessment and evaluation, the
suggestion of mitigation measures and providing an environmental management plan. The EIA
methodology follows the overall impact assessment approach illustrated in Figure 1-4.

Source: EQMS
Figure 1-4: EIA study Process

The proposed project falls under “RED” category as per Schedule-1 of The Bangladesh Environment
Conservation Rules, 1997 and Category “B” as per IFC performance standard. Therefore for getting
Site and Environment Clearance from DoE the proponent need to carry out IEE and EIA study of
the project. The proponent has appointed EQMS consulting Ltd to execute the required studies.
The methodology for the impact assessment will follow the international Guidelines including the
General EHS Guidelines and those for Development Project. It will involve the prediction,
evaluation and mitigation of impacts, and will report on impacts including residual impacts
(impacts remaining after all possible mitigation has been incorporated) and cumulative impacts.
The impacts will be identified and quantified for the intensity using modeling and/ or matrix
techniques and evaluated as Very Low, Low, Medium-Low, Medium-High and High impacts on
the environment and communities in the study area as per the prescribed Format of the ECR, 1997.

The anticipated changes enhancing the baseline conditions, with respect to air, noise, water,
ecosystem and land environments or potential deterioration of human health, ecosystem and
cultural baseline conditions of the study area will be assessed and predicted using prediction tools
as per the following description:
 Impact prediction: to determine what could potentially happen to resources/ receptors as a

consequence of the Project and its associated activities;
 Impact evaluation: to evaluate the significance of the predicted impacts by considering their
magnitude and likelihood of occurrence, and the sensitivity, value and/or importance of the
affected resource/receptor;
 Mitigation and enhancement: to identify appropriate and justified measures to mitigate
negative impacts and enhance positive impacts;
 Residual impact evaluation: to evaluate the significance of impacts assuming effective
implementation of mitigation and enhancement.
Table 1-4: Impact Assessment Process
Mitigation/
Predict Evaluate
Enhance Residual
Impacts
What could Is it Important? What can be done Is there still a

happen as a (Significance) about it? significant
consequence of impact?
doing what is
proposed
The key issues that will be identified during the scoping phase will be analyzed upon the baseline
information. Each issue consists of components that on their own or in combination with each other
give rise to potential impacts, either positive or negative, from the project onto the environment or
from the environment onto the project. In the ESIA study the significance of the potential impacts
will be considered before and after identified mitigation is implemented, for direct, indirect and
cumulative impacts, in the short and long term.
The following criteria will be used to evaluate Significance:
A) Nature: This is an assessment of the type of effect the activity is likely to have on the
surrounding affected environment. The description includes what is being affected and
its magnitude. The nature of the impact will be classified as positive or negative, and
direct or indirect.

Table 1-5: Nature of the Impact
Direct Potential/ possible Impacts will be generated directly from the project activities
and its associated facilities which is directly linked with the project. ( e.g. loss of
land due to project development or air emission from a power plant)
Indirect Potential/ possible Impacts will be generated from secondary sources which
are induced by the project activities. (e.g. loss of any species habitat due to the
project activities)
Induced Potential/ possible Impacts will be generated (which are not part of the Project)
due to effect /consequence/ outcome of the Project (e.g., influx of camp
followers resulting from the importation of a large Project workforce).
B) Extent and location: This indicates the spatial area that may be affected by the project
activities or its associated facilities.
Table 1-6: Impact Extent from the project location
Extent Description
Potential/ possible Impacts’ area only at or within the project site/ project boundary
Project Site
Potential/ possible Impacts’ area is not only limited to the site but also its immediate surrounding
Local
areas/ receptors.
Potential/ possible Impacts’ area extends to the immediate surrounding areas along with adjacent
Regional
areas
National Potential/ possible Impacts’ area considered of national level.
 Impact considered of not only within national level but also neighboring country.
Trans
boundary  Impact considered global level.
C) Duration: this measures the lifetime/ existence/ continuation of the impact.

Table 1-7: Duration of Impact
Duration Description
Short term Potential/ possible Impact duration is very limited time or length of construction /
decommissioning period
Medium term Potential/ possible Impact duration will continue after construction period but stop/
discontinue/cease within a tenure of 10 years
Long term Potential/ possible Impact duration will continue more than 10 years, or entire operational life of
project.
Permanent – Potential/ possible Impact will remain after operational life of project but appropriate mitigation
Mitigated measures reduce the impact
Permanent – no  Potential/ possible Impact will remain after operational life of project.
mitigation
 No mitigation measures will reduce impact after implementation.
D) Intensity/severity: This is the degree to which the project affects or changes the
environment; it includes a measure of the reversibility of impacts.

Table 1-8: Intensity of Impact
Intensity Description
Insignificant Changes due to Potential/ possible impact are minor, not visible/ noticeable, natural functioning of
environment not affected.
Low  Natural functioning of environment is minimally affected.

 Natural, cultural and social functions and processes can be reversed to their original state
if mitigation measure taken.
Medium  Environment remarkably distorted/ disturbed/ impacted, still functions, if in modified

way.
 Negative impacts cannot be fully reversed.
High  Cultural and social functions and processes distorted/ disturbed/ impacted.
 Potentially ceasing to Environmental function temporarily.
 Negative impacts cannot be fully reversed.
Very high  Natural, cultural and social functions and processes permanently cease, and valued,
important, sensitive or vulnerable systems or communities are substantially affected.
 Negative impacts cannot be reversed.
E) Potential for irreplaceable loss of resources: This is the degree to which the project will
cause loss of resources that are irreplaceable.
Table 1-9: Potential for irreplaceable loss of resources
Potential for Description
irreplaceable loss of
resources
Low No Irreplaceable/ unique resources will be impacted.
Irreplaceable/ unique resources can be replaced, with mitigation measure/ effort and will
Medium
be replaced after certain period of time.
High Potential/ possible Impact replaces a particular/ vulnerable resource.
F) Probability: This is the likelihood or the chances that the impact will occur
Table 1-10: Probability of Impact
Probability Description
Unlikely Under normal conditions, no Potential/ possible Impact expected.
Low The probability of the impact to occur is low due to its design or historic experience.
Medium There is a distinct probability of the impact occurring.
High It is most likely that the impact will occur
Definite The impact will occur regardless of any prevention measures.
G) Magnitude: This is calculated as extent + duration + intensity + potential impact on

irreplaceable resources.
Magnitude essentially describes the intensity of the change that has the potential to occur in the
resource/receptor as a result of the potential impact. The magnitude designations themselves are

universally consistent, but the definitions for these designations vary depending on the
resource/receptor. The universal magnitude designations are:
 Positive
 Insignificant
 Low
 Medium-low
 Medium - high
 High
 Very High
In the case of a potential positive impact, no magnitude designation (aside from ‘positive’) is
assigned. It is considered sufficient for the purpose of the ESIA to indicate that the Project has the
potential to result in a potential positive impact, without characterizing the exact degree of positive
change that may occur.
H) Significance: The significance will be rated by combining the consequence of the impact
and the probability of occurrence (i.e. Magnitude x probability = significance).
Table 1-11: Significance
Probability of Impact
Item
Unlikely Low Medium High Definite
Insignificant Very Low Very Low Very Low Low Low
Magnitude of Impact
Low Very Low Very Low Low Low Medium-Low

Medium – Low Very Low Low Low Medium-Low Medium-high
Medium – High Very Low Low Medium-Low Medium-high High
Medium
High Low Medium-high High High
Low
Medium
Very High Low High High Very High
Low
Table 1-12: Significance of issues (based on Environmental Parameters)

Significance Description
Positive Potential/ possible impacts that have a beneficial impact to affected media.
Impact
Very low No action required.
 Impacts are within the acceptable range.
Low  Potential/ possible impacts such as localized or short-term effects on
habitat, species, or environmental media.
 Impacts are within the acceptable range but should be mitigated to lower
significance levels wherever possible.
Medium-Low  Potential/ possible impacts such as localized, long-term degradation of
sensitive habitat or widespread, short-term impacts to habitat, species, or
environmental media.
Medium-high  Potential/ possible Impacts are significant and require attention;

Significance Description
 mitigation is required to reduce the negative impacts to acceptable
levels;
 Potential/ possible impacts such as localized but irreversible habitat loss
or widespread, long-term effects on habitat, species, or environmental
media.
 Impacts are of great importance, mitigation is crucial.
 Potential impacts such as significant, widespread, and persistent changes
High in habitat, species, or environmental media.
 Potential impacts such as persistent reduction in ecosystem function on a
landscape scale or significant disruption of a sensitive species.
 Impacts are unacceptable.
Very High  Potential impacts such as loss of a significant portion of a valued species
or loss of effective ecosystem function on a landscape scale.
Potential social impacts are inherently variable because community response to a potential impact,
perceptions of existing and changing conditions, and the degrees of vulnerability are all heavily
dependent on local conditions and the human factor. The significance designations for potential
social impacts take into consideration social science expertise and previous experience in
Bangladesh regarding the relationships between individuals, communities, government agencies,
NGOs and special interest groups, and the oil and gas industry.
Table 1-13: Potential Social Impact Significance
Significance Definition
Positive Potential/ possible impacts that have a beneficial impact to affected
Impact stakeholders.
Very low Potential/ possible impacts that are practically indistinguishable from the social
baseline, with little to no potential impacts to or concerns from affected external
stakeholders.
Potential/ possible impacts that are short-term nuisance or inconvenience;

Low potentially affected external stakeholders concerned but likely able to adapt with
relative ease.
Potential/ possible impacts such as localized or short term effects; potentially

Medium-Low
affected stakeholders concerned but likely able to adapt with relative ease.
Potential/ possible impacts such as local-to-regional (sub-national) or medium

Medium-high term effects; potentially affected stakeholders concerned and raise the issue as a
high priority, but may be able to adapt with some targeted support or assistance.
Potential/ possible impacts such as local-to-national or long term effects;

potentially affected stakeholders concerned and raised as a high priority; may
High
not be able to adapt without targeted support or assistance in order to maintain
pre-impact livelihood.

Potential/ possible impacts such as local-to-global or irreversible long term
Very High effects; potentially affected stakeholders concerned raise the issue as a high
priority and are likely not able to adapt without targeted support or assistance.
To determine potential public health impacts, the assessment team considers the public which has
the potential to be exposed to various aspects and potential impacts of the project, whether it is a
permanent resident with continuous exposure or a periodic exposure to a fisherman transiting
through the project area. The significance determinations for potential public health impacts take
into consideration local and regional public health expertise and previous experience in Bangladesh
regarding the relationships between individuals, communities, health care providers, government
agencies, NGOs, and the oil and gas industry.
Table 1-14: Potential Public Health Impact Significance
Positive Impact Potential that has a beneficial impact to affected stakeholder.
Very low No impact to the public
Potential/ possible illness or adverse effect with limited or no impacts on
Low
ability to function and medical treatment is limited or not necessary.
Potential/ possible illness or adverse effects with mild to moderate

Medium-Low
functional impairment requiring medical treatment or management.
Potential/ possible serious illness or severe adverse health effect requiring a

Medium-high
high level of medical treatment or management.
Potential/ possible serious illness or chronic exposure of a few resulting in

High
life shortening effects.
Potential/ possible serious illness or chronic exposure of many resulting in

Very High
life shortening effects.
This chapter is designated to present details of potential impact characteristics of the proposed
power plant based on methodology developed by EQMS consulting Limited. Effective mitigation
measures are also recommended to attenuate the impact intensity. The following subsections will
describes details of impact assessment methodology, impact identification, impact types, sources,
significances and mitigation measures.
1.6 Study Area Boundary

The selected site for the construction of 200 MW HFO based Power Plant is at Gunrajdi, Chandpur
Sadar, Chandpur District. The proposed project has been bounded with existing settlement, School
and Dakatia River on the north, Agricultural Land, and settlement on South Side, Agricultural Land
and settlement in the East and Dakatia River, BPDB Power Plant and settlement in the west. For
establishing environmental baseline condition and for the assessment of impacts associated with the
interventions, an area of 10km radius from the periphery of the plant has been considered based on

nature of the proposed project and EIA Guidelines for Industries of Department of Environment
(DoE). The 10 km study area map is shown in Figure 1-5.
Source: EQMS
Figure 1-5: 10 Km Study Area Map
Figure 1-6 shows project location of the proposed power plant.

Source: EQMS
Figure 1-6: Location Map Of the proposed Project

1.7 Scoping
Environmental Quality Management System (EQMS) is adopting following approach for the
proposed ESIA for the project:
 Scoping includes review of the project related information, assessment of regulatory

requirements for the project and reconnaissance survey of the project site and surrounding
area. The reconnaissance survey was helped to identify site and surrounding features
including presence of forests and other sensitive receptors, if any, located within the project
influence area (as considered in the ESIA a study area of 5 km radius from the project
boundary) through primary and secondary data collection. EQMS also considered use of the
existing data as readily available and provided by client;
 Delineate any specific baseline information required to be collected for the study area with
reference to the physical, biological and social components of the environment
 With the assistance of client, EQMS is identified an accredited environmental laboratory of

repute to identify the sampling stations based on the criteria and collect primary data on
ambient air, ambient noise, surface and ground water, soil and sediment quality along with
terrestrial ecological and fisheries to establish prevailing baseline conditions;
 Socio-economic study identification of stakeholders, undertaking consultations, interviews;
 Assess what methodology to be adopted for identification, prediction, quantification and

evaluation of potential environmental and social impacts of the proposed Project in relation
to national and international Guidelines ;
 Review analysis of alternatives available for site, resources, technology, building materials
etc.; and
 Review project inbuilt mitigation measures available for potential adverse impacts.
1.8 Baseline Data Generation

The environmental baseline data are collected for the project site and study area of 5 km radius
from the project site covering important features on the land e.g. sensitive habitats, settlements
cultural sites, water bodies and other places of environmental and social significance.
Environmental baseline data are collected through primary baseline surveys also based on readily
available secondary information.
1.9 EIA Team

EQMS has formed an expert team to conduct EIA study of the power plant project. The Team
details are given in Table 1-15.

Table 1-15: EIA study team
Sl. No. Name Specialist

1. Kazi Farhed Iqubal Project Director/EIA expert
2. Abdul Halim Senior Social Expert
3. Sk. Salahuddin Ahammad Project Manager/ Modelling Expert
4. Mirza SA Habib Sn. Environmental Expert
5. Md. Zahidul Islam Environmental Expert
6. Tauhidul Hasan Environmental Expert
7. Md. Mustafizur Rahman Environmental Expert
8. Molla Karimul Islam Ecologist
9. Ashish Dhar Social Expert
10. Anik Mondal GIS Expert
1.10 Report Structure

This EIA report has been largely structured as per approved ToR received from DoE. The structure
of this EIA report is presented in Table 1-16.
Table 1-16: Layout of the EIA Report
Chapter Title Description

Executive Summary This section present brief overview of entire EIA report
1 Introduction Chapter 1 presents the background and motivation of the
proposed power plant project including the methodology
followed for conducting the EIA.
2 Policy, Legal And Chapter 2 provides a brief description of the policy and legal
Administrative framework with regard to the environmental aspects of the
Framework project in the context of Bangladesh. The chapter also
summarized applicable International Safeguard policies
relevant to the project
3 Project Description Chapter 3 presents a description of the different aspects of the
proposed project, including project location, site description
and construction activities, equipment and processes to be
employed, electricity generation and transmission, Fuel
supply, treatment. Waste management etc.
4 Baseline Environment Chapter 4 provides a description of the existing physical,
ecological and socio-economic environment of the study area.
5 Environmental And Chapter 5 describes the potential environmental impacts of
Social Impact the proposed power plant project. Impact significance has
Assessment And been calculated and proper mitigation measures have been

Mitigation Measures proposed
6
Analysis of Alternatives Chapter 6 discusses the alternative considerations that have
been studied before finally proposing the present project
7
Environmental Chapter 7 presents the environmental management and
Management Plan monitoring plan for the proposed project, both during
construction and operation phases.
8
Hazard and Risk Chapter 8 discusses common risks in the power plant
Assessment associated with accidents that may occur, natural disasters
and external threats and outlines important measures to
minimize those risks.
9
Occupational Health Chapter 9 discusses issues related to occupational health and
and Safety safety for the power plant
10
Grievance Redress Chapter 10 describes proposed Grievance Redress
Mechanism (GRM) Mechanism (GRM) to allow people to voice concerns
regarding environmental and social impacts of the proposed
project if they are affected.
11
Public Consultations Chapter 11 presents the findings of various consultations
carried out as a part of the environmental assessment,
including consultation with statutory and non-statutory
bodies and public consultations.
12
Conclusion and Chapter 12 presents the conclusions and recommendations of
Recommendation
this environmental impact assessment study

2 POLICY, LEGAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE FRAMEWORK
2.1 Introduction
To address the environmental and social risks of any proposed project and its associated
components; to protect and conserve the environment from any adverse impacts, the GOB has
specified regulations, policy and guidelines. Potential Lenders’ also have their own set of
requirements (such as the ADB’s Safeguard Policy and IFC’s Performance Standards) to which any
project funded by them must operate.
The activities of proposed HFO based power plant project of DECPCL fall under the ‘red’ category
according to the Bangladesh Environment Conservation Rules (ECR) 1997 and therefore an EIA
study is pre-requisite to obtain environmental clearance from the DoE. The proposed project
already got the site clearance from Department of Environment (DoE).
The following activities have been carried out under the EIA study:
 Identification of national legal obligations in relation to the interventions which will be

required to review under the EIA study of the proposed power plant;
 Exploration of the national legislative provisions and policy guidelines on environmental

sectors;
 Identification of the international legal obligations and relevant provisions of multilateral

environmental agreements related to the proposed project interventions;
 Identification of the standard guidelines at regional and international level related to the
power plant setup.
2.2 Environment Related Policies in Bangladesh

The GOB has developed a policy framework that requires environmental issues to be incorporated
into economic development planning. The Key tenets of the various applicable policies are detailed
in the following subsections.
2.2.1 National Environmental Policy, 1992

The Bangladesh National Environmental Policy, approved in May 1992, sets out the basic
framework for environmental action together with a set of broad sectoral action guidelines. Key
elements of the Policy are:
 Maintaining ecological balance and ensuring sustainable development of the country

through protection, conservation and improvement of the environment;
 Protecting the country from natural disasters;
 Identifying and regulating all activities that pollute and destroy the environment;
 Ensuring environment-friendly development in all sectors;

 Ensuring sustainable and environmentally sound management of the natural resources; and
 Promoting active association, as far as possible, with all international initiatives related to
environment.

 The Environmental Policy of 1992 requires specific actions with respect to the industrial
sector which are as follows:
 To introduce gradually corrective measures in polluting industries;
 To conduct EIAs for all new public and private industrial developments;
 To ban, or find environmentally sound alternatives for, the production of goods that cause
environmental pollution; and
 To minimize waste and ensure sustainable use of resources by industry.
The policy also states that EIA's should conduct for any development activity and the DOE is
directed to review and approve all Environmental Impact Assessments.
2.2.2 National Environmental Management Action Plan, 1995

The National Environmental Management Action Plan (NEMAP) is a wide- ranging and multi-
faceted plan, which builds on and extends the statements, set out in the National Environmental
Policy. NEMAP was developed to address issues and management requirements related to the
environment during the period 1995 to 2005; it also sets out the framework within which the
recommendations of the National Conservation Strategy are to be implemented. NEMAP was
developed to achieve the following broad objectives:
 Identification of key environmental issues affecting Bangladesh;

 Identification of actions necessary to halt or reduce the rate of environmental degradation;
 Improvement of the natural environment;
 Conservation of habitats and bio-diversity;

 Promotion of sustainable development; and
 Improvement of the quality of life of the people.

To attain the above-mentioned objectives, the plan groups all the relevant necessary actions under
four headings, namely: institutional, sectoral, location- specific and long-term issues.
The institutional aspects reflect the need of inter- sectoral cooperation to tackle environmental
problems which need new and appropriate institutional mechanisms at national and local levels.
The sectoral action reflects the way the Ministries and agencies are organized and makes it easier to
identify the agency to carry out the recommended actions. The location-specific action focuses
particularly on acute environmental problems at local levels that need to be addressed on a priority
basis. The long-term actions include environmental degradation to such degree that might become
even more serious and threatening, if cognizance is not taken immediately.
2.2.3 National Conservation Strategy, 1992

The National Conservation Strategy, 1992 provides recommendations for sustainable development
of the industrial sector. The key aspects of the strategy are as follows:
 All industries shall be subject to an EIA and the adoption of pollution prevention/ control
technologies shall be enforced;

 Hazardous or toxic materials / wastes shall not be imported as raw materials for industry;
 Import of appropriate and environmentally-sound technology shall be ensured; and
 Dependence on imported technology and machinery should gradually be reduced in favour

of sustainable local skills and resources. Other Policies relevant to Environment
Additional Bangladesh policies, their key features and applicability to the subject Project are
detailed in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1: Policies relevant to Environment
Policy Key Features Applicability
National  Afforestation of 20% land Not applicable, as
Forest no diversion of
 Bio-diversity of the existing degraded forests
Policy, forest land is
1994  Strengthening of the agricultural sector
involved in the
 Control of Global warming, desertification Project.
 Control of trade in wild birds and animals
 Prevention of illegal occupation of the forested land, tree felling,
and hunting of wild animals
National  All new roads and major improvements will be subjected to an EIA Not applicable, as
Land no new road
Transport  Funding will be provided for mitigation measures
construction is
Policy,  The Government will publish environmental standards for new involved in the
2004 roads and new design standards addressing environmental issues Project.
National  Protection, restoration, and enhancement of water resources Applicable for the
Water preservation of
Policy,  Protection of water quality, including strengthening regulations water quality in
1999 concerning agrochemicals and industrial effluent Dakatia River and
 Sanitation and potable water adjacent water
 Fish and fisheries bodies.
 Participation of local communities in all water sector development
National Applicable, as
Land Use  Deals with several lands uses including agriculture (crop
land-use of the
Policy, production, fishery, and livestock), housing, forestry,
Project site is
2001 industrialization, railways and roads, tea and rubber
agriculture.
 Identifies land use constraints in all these sectors
National Applicable, as the
Fisheries  Preservation, management, and exploitation of fisheries resources fish resources are
Policy, in inland open water available in
1998  Fish cultivation and management in inland closed water. Dakatia River.
 Prawn and fish cultivation in coastal areas
 Preservation, management, and exploitation of sea fishery
resources
Energy Applicable as
Policy,  Provides for utilization of energy for sustainable economic growth, subject Project is a
1996 supply to different zones of the country, development of the Power Plant.
indigenous energy source and environmentally sound sustainable
energy development programs
 Highlights the importance of ESIA's for any new energy
development project
Power Applicable as
Policy,  Is an integral part of the Energy Policy and deals with policy subject Project is a
1995 statement on demand forecast, long-term planning and project Power Plant.
implementation, investment terms, fuels and technologies, load
management, institutional issues, private sector participation,

Policy Key Features Applicability
technology transfer and research program, environmental policy,
and legal issues
Industrial  Deals with industrial development, direct foreign investments, Applicable as
Policy, investment by public and private sector, introduction of new Project is a private
1999 appropriate technology, women's participation, infrastructure industrial
development and environmentally sound industrial development development
2.3 Environment and Social Related Legislation in Bangladesh

The main Acts and Regulations guiding environmental protection and conservation in Bangladesh
are outlined in the following subsections.
2.3.1 Bangladesh Environmental Conservation Act, 1995 subsequent amendments

in 2000 and 2002)
The provisions of the Act authorize the Director General of Department of Environment (DoE) to
undertake any activity that is deemed fit and necessary to conserve and enhance the quality of
environment and to control, prevent and mitigate pollution. The main highlights of the act are:
 Declaration of Ecologically Critical Areas;
 Obtaining Environmental Clearance Certificate;
 Regulation with respect to vehicles emitting smoke harmful for the environment;
 Regulation of development activities from environmental perspective;
 Promulgation of standards for quality of air, water, noise, and soils for different areas and
for different purposes;
 Promulgation of acceptable limits for discharging and emitting waste; and
 Formulation of environmental guidelines relating to control and mitigation of

environmental pollution, conservation and improvement of environment.
2.3.2 Environment Conservation Rules (ECR), 1997 (subsequent amendments in

2002 and 2003)
The Environment Conservation Rules, 1997 are the first set of rules promulgated under the
Environment Conservation Act, 1995. These Rules provide for, inter alia, the following:
 The National Environmental Quality Standards (EQS) for ambient air, surface water,
groundwater, drinking water, industrial effluents, emissions, noise and vehicular exhaust;
 Categorization of industries, development projects and other activities on the basis of actual
(for existing industries/development projects/activities) and anticipated (for proposed
industries/development projects/activities) pollution load;
 Procedure for obtaining environmental clearance;
 Requirements for undertaking IEE and EIA's as well as formulating EMP's according to
categories of industries/development projects/activities; and

 Procedure for damage-claim by persons affected or likely to be affected due to polluting
activities or activities causing hindrance to normal civic life.
Depending upon the location, size and severity of pollution loads, projects/activities have been
classified in ECR, 1997 into four categories:
Green, Orange A, Orange B and Red respectively as nil, minor, medium and severe impacts on
important environmental components (IECs).
Other Relevant National Legal Instruments for the Project Table 2-2 presents an outline of other
National legal instruments that will have relevance to the proposed Project with respect to the social
and environmental considerations.
Table 2-2: National Legal Instruments relevant to the Project
Act/ Rule/ Law/ Responsible Agency- Key Features Applicability

Ordinance Ministry/Authority
The Environment Ministry of  Define Applicability of Applicable,
Conservation Act, Environment and environmental clearance Project falls
1995 and subsequent Forests  Regulation of development under Red
amendments activities from environmental Category and
perspective require
 Framing applicable limits for environmental
emissions and effluents clearance
 Framing of standards for air,
water, and noise quality
 Formulation of guidelines
relating to control and
mitigation of environmental
pollution, conservation, and
improvement of environment
 Declaration of Ecologically
critical areas
Environmental Ministry of  Declaration of Ecologically Applicable,
conservation Rules, Environment and critical areas Projects falls
1997 and subsequent Forests  Requirement of environmental under Red
amendments clearance certificate for various Category and
categories of projects require
 Requirement of IEE/EIA as per environmental
category clearance
 Renewal of the environmental
clearance certificate within 30
days after the expiry
 Provides standards for quality
of air, water and sound and
acceptable limits for
emissions/discharges from
vehicles and other sources
Environment Court Ministry of  GoB has given highest priority Applicable for
Act, 2000 and Environment and to environment pollution completing
subsequent Forests and  Passed 'Environment Court Act, environmental
2000 for completing

Act/ Rule/ Law/ Ordinance Key Features
Responsible Agency- Ministry/Authority Applicability
amendments judiciary environment-related legal legal

proceedings effectively requirements
effectively
The Vehicle Act, 1927; Bangladesh Road  Exhaust emissions Applicable for
The Motor Vehicles Transport  Vehicular air and noise proposed Project
Ordinance, 1983; and Authority pollution in relation to road
The Bengal Motor  Road/traffic safety transport
Vehicle Rules, 1940  Vehicle Licensing and
Registration
 Fitness of Motor Vehicles
 Parking by-laws.
The Removal of Bangladesh Water  Removal of wrecks and Applicable as
Wrecks and Transport obstructions in inland navigable Dakatiya River -
obstructions in inland Authority waterways inland navigable
Navigable Water waterway will be
Ways Rules 1973 used for transport
of heavy
equipment for the
Project
Water Supply and Ministry of Local  Management and control of Not directly
Sanitation Act, 1996 Government, water supply and sanitation in applicable,
Rural urban areas. however,
Development, and indirectly
cooperatives applicable when
considering water
usage
management and
sanitation
facilities for the
project
The Ground Water Upazila Parishad  Management of groundwater Proposed Project
Management resources will use surface
ordinance, 1985  Installation of tube- wells at any water source,
place after licensing from however, should
Upazila Parishad only groundwater also
be required then
licenses will need
to be obtained
prior to
installation of any
tube-wells.
The Forest Act, 1927 Ministry of  Categorization of forests as Not applicable as
and subsequent Environment and reserve, protected and village the Project is not
amendments in 1982 Forests forests on forest land
and 1989  Permission is required for use
of forest land for any non-forest
purposes

The Private Forests  Conservation of private forests

Regional Forest Not applicable as
ordinance Act, 1959 and for the afforestation on
Officer, Forest proposed Project
Department wastelands is not affecting
plantations on
surrounding
land.
Bangladesh Wild Life  Preservation of Wildlife
Ministry of Not applicable as
(Preservation) Act, Sanctuaries, Parks, and Reserve
Environment and the Project AOI
1974 forest
Forest; does not have
Bangladesh Wild any wildlife areas
Life Advisory
Board
National Biodiversity  Conserve, and restore the
Ministry of Applicable for
Strategy and Action biodiversity of the country for
Environment and conservation of
Plan (2004) well-being of the present and
Forest Bangladesh biodiversity in
Wild Life future generations the study area
Advisory Board  Maintain and improve including
environmental stability for Dakatiya River
ecosystems
 Ensure preservation of the
unique biological heritage of the
nation for the benefit of the
present and future generations
 Guarantee the safe passage and
conservation of globally
endangered migratory species,
especially birds and mammals
in the country
 Stop introduction of invasive
alien species, genetically
modified organisms and living
modified organisms
National Water Bodies  The characterization of water
Town Applicable.
Protection Act, 2000 bodies as rivers, canals, tanks or
development The power plant
authority/Munici floodplains identified in the is besides Dakatia
palities master plans formulated under River.
the laws establishing
municipalities in division and
district towns shall not be
changed without approval of
concerned ministry
The Protection and Protection and conservation of
Ministry of  Applicable for the
Conservation of Fish fish in Government-owned
Fisheries and conservation of
Act 1950 subsequent water bodies
Livestock fish as the outfall
amendments in 1982
point will be the
Dakatia River
The Embankment and Ministry of Water  An Act to consolidate the laws Applicable

Act/ Rule/ Law/ Responsible Agency- Key Features Applicability
Ordinance Ministry/Authority
Drainage Act 1952 Resources relating to embankment and
drainage and to make better
provision for the construction,
maintenance, management,
removal and control of
embankments and watercourses
for the better drainage of lands
and for their protection from
floods, erosion and other
damage by water
Antiquities Act, 1968 Ministry of  This legislation governs Not applicable as
Cultural Affairs preservation of the national the study area
cultural heritage, protects and reportedly does
controls ancient monuments, not have any
regulates antiquities as well as likely cultural
the maintenance, conservation, heritage or
and restoration of protected ancient
sites and monuments, controls monuments of
planning, exploration, and national or
excavation of archaeological international
sites significance.
However, in case,
any such
evidence of
archaeological
findings arise, the
Project will need
to act in
conformance
with the Act
The Acquisition and Ministry of Land  Current GOB Act and Not applicable As
Requisition of Guidelines, relating to the land is
Immovable Property acquisition and requisition of purchased and
ordinance 1982 and land there was no
subsequent settlement.
amendments in 1994,
1995 and 2004
The Building Ministry of Works  This act provides for prevention Applicable
Construction Act 1952 of haphazard construction of
and subsequent building and excavation of
amendments tanks which are likely to
interfere with the planning of
certain areas in Bangladesh
The Factories Act, Ministry of Labor  This Act pertains to the Applicable
1965 Bangladesh occupational rights and safety
Labor Law, 2006 of factory workers and the
provision of a comfortable work

environment and reasonable

working conditions
Ozone Depleting Ministry of  Ban on the use of Ozone Applicable
Substances (Control) Environment and depleting substances
Rules, 2004 Forests  Phasing out of Ozone depleting
substances
Noise Pollution Ministry of  Prevention of Noise pollution Applicable
(Control) Rules 2006 Environment and  Standards for noise levels
Forests
Source: Websites of DOE, Legislative and Parliamentary Affairs Division: Bangladesh Laws and Bangladesh Board of
Investment: Business laws
2.4 National Policies and Laws Related to Power Generation

Bangladesh Energy Regulatory Commission Act, 2003 (Amended 2005, 2010)
In order to create an atmosphere conducive to private investment in the generation of electricity and
transmission, transportation and marketing of gas resources and petroleum products, to ensure
transparency in the management, operation and tariff determination in these sectors and to protect
consumers’ interest and to promote the creation of a competitive market an independent and
impartial regulatory commission was established through this act. The functions of the commission
pertinent to electricity generation are as follows:
 to determine efficiency and standard of the machinery and appliances of the institutions
using energy;
 to ensure efficient use, quality services, determine tariff and safety enhancement of
electricity generation
 to issue, cancel, amend and determine conditions of licenses, exemption of licenses and
to determine the conditions to be followed by such exempted persons;
 to approve schemes on the basis of overall program of the licensee and to take decision
in this regard taking into consideration the load forecast and financial status;
 to collect, review, maintain and publish statistics of energy;
 to frame codes and standards and make enforcement of those compulsory with a view to
ensuring quality of service;
 to develop uniform methods of accounting for all licensees;
 to encourage to create a congenial atmosphere to promote competition amongst the
licensees;
 to extend co-operation and advice to the Government, if necessary, regarding electricity
generation
 to resolve disputes between the licensees, and between licensees and consumers, and
refer those to arbitration if considered necessary;
 to ensure appropriate remedy for consumer disputes, dishonest business practices or
monopoly;

 to ensure control of environmental standard of energy under existing laws; and
 to perform any incidental functions if considered appropriate by the Commission for the
fulfillment of the objectives of this Act for electricity generation, quality of services, tariff
fixation and safety improvement
Power System Master Plan, 2016
The Power System Master Plan (PSMP) 2016, sponsored by Japan International Cooperation Agency
(JICA) aims at assisting the Bangladesh in formulating an extensive energy and power development
plan up to the year 2041, covering energy balance, power balance, and tariff strategies. Bangladesh
has an aspiration to become a high-income country by 2041. The development of energy and power
infrastructure therefore pursues not only the quantity but also the quality to realize the long-term
economic development. Since Bangladesh is facing to the depletion of domestic gas supply, various
issues such as sustainable development harmonizing with economic optimization, improvement of
power quality for the forthcoming high-tech industries, and the discipline of operation and
maintenance (O&M) for power plants need to be addressed holistically. Furthermore, energy
subsidy is also a tough challenge, because there’s always a concern that drastic increase of fuel and
electricity prices may trigger another negative effect on the national economy. A meticulous
analysis is required to find the best pathway to attain the sustainability of the energy and power
sectors in balancing with the economic growth. The new PSMP study covers all the aforementioned
challenges comprehensively, and come up with feasible proposals and action plans for Bangladesh
to implement.
Power System Master Plan, 2010
A Master Plan for the attainment of stable power supply in the People's Republic of Bangladesh up
to year 2030 has been developed in consideration of the diversification of fuel resources, including
an optimum power development plan, power system plan, and identification of the potential power
plant sites based on the fuel diversification study. The power sector was heavily dependent on gas.
Even two/three years back almost 90% of the electricity used to be generated from the natural gas
of the country and rest by hydroelectricity and coal. The power sector master plan 2010 has stressed
on diversification of the fuel such as natural gas, coal, furnace oil, diesel etc as well as renewable
energy sources. In this Master Plan, the target composition of power supply as of 2030 is set at 50%
for domestic and imported coal, 25% for domestic and imported (in the form of LNG) natural gas
and 25% for other sources such as oil, nuclear power and renewable energy.
Electricity (Amendment) Act, 2012
This act lays out the responsibilities of the utilities entrusted to generate electricity (for capacities
not below 25 MW). As per this act, the duties of a generating utility shall be to establish, operate
and maintain generating stations, tie-lines or interconnection lines, and associated sub-stations, to
supply electricity to any licensee in accordance with the provisions of this Act or the rules or
regulations made under the act, submit technical details regarding its generating stations to the
Commission, coordinate with the Transmission Utility, for transmission of the electricity generated
by it; and liaise with the ISO for dispatch of electricity generated by each of its generating stations. It
shall also be the duty of every generation utility to develop a time bound plan to diversify its fuel
source and to ensure that the electric energy it sells to consumers is generated using a diverse range

of fuels and technologies, including renewable technologies under a pre-determined principle of
least-cost generation.
Private Sector Power Generation Policy of Bangladesh 1996 (Revised 2004)
The Recognizing that the likelihood of securing the substantially high volume of investment for
power generation requirements for future alone through the public sector is remote and that there
are competing demands on government resources and declining levels of external assistance from
multilateral/bilateral donor agencies for public investment in the power sector, GoB amended its
industrial policy to enable private investment in the power sector and to promote private sector
participation in the generation of electricity in order to attain higher economic efficiency. In this
policy, the Government has expressed its commitment to attract private investment for installing
new power generation capacity on a build-own-operate (BOO) basis. The modalities of
implementation, tariff for bulk purchase of power, financial incentives for the private sector and
foreign investors are laid out in this policy. The Power Cell has a mandate to lead private power
development, recommend power sector reforms & restructuring, conduct study on tariffs and
formulation of a regulatory framework for the power sector. The Power Cell shall facilitate all
stages of promotion, development, implementation, commissioning and operations of private
power generation projects and suitably address the concerns of project sponsors. It will also assist
project sponsors to secure necessary consents and permits from GoB where such consents and
permits would be needed.
Policy Guideline for Small Power Plant (SPP) in private sector, 1998 (revised 2008)
This document outlines the guidelines for private sector investors to establish Small Power Plants
(SPP) on a fast track basis, for generation of electricity for own use and sell the surplus to other
users. The plant size could be in the order of 10 MW, which could be built up in stages as necessary,
and depending on the potential market and load growth. However, if required, permission may be
accorded by the government for setting up higher size plant. The SPPs will be developed on a
Build- Own-Operate basis. The summary of the guidelines is as follows:
 The type of plant is open and the sponsor will be allowed to select plant of any
configuration provided the electrical characteristics of the plant match that of the power
system in Bangladesh.
 Where available, a subsidiary of Petrobangla may supply natural gas to the sponsor on a
commercial basis at a price determined by the Energy Regulatory Commission.
Alternatively, the sponsor may arrange his own fuel.
 It will be the responsibility of the sponsor to find customers for electricity. The
distribution system required for the supply of electricity to the contracted customers
may be built by the sponsors themselves or they can use the existing transmission and
distribution systems, if there is adequate capacity.
 In areas covered by BPDB/DESA/REB, the tariff announced by GoB from time to time
shall apply.
 As per Electricity Act, 1910, the Sponsors will be required to obtain license from the GoB.
The SPP will need to comply with all laws of Bangladesh including Environmental
Standards.

 GoB support will be provided on “First Come First Serve” basis. Necessary advice and
other assistance will be provided by the Power Cell for the establishment of SPPs.
 The sponsors under this policy including the Captive Independent Power Producer and
the sponsors of Captive Power Generation who will set up power plants within a period
of three years from the date of its statutory notification under this policy will enjoy the
“Fiscal Incentives” and “Other Facilities and Incentives for Foreign Investors” provided
under Section 5.0 and 6.0 respectively of the “Private Sector Power Generation Policy of
Bangladesh”
2.5 Administrative Setup related to Environment in Bangladesh
The Ministry of Environment & Forest (MoEF) is responsible for overseeing all environmental
matters relating to national environmental policy and regulatory issues in the country. The MoEF
oversees the activities of the following technical/implementing agencies:
 Department of Environment (DOE);

 Forest Department (FD);
 Bangladesh Forest Industries Development Corporation (BFIDC);
 Bangladesh Forest Research Institute (BFRI); and
 Bangladesh National Herbarium (BNH).
Other Related Organizations

There are several other organizations under the administrative framework which would govern
social and environmental functions related to the proposed Project, namely:
 Forest Department (FD);

 Ministry of Land: Land reform and land acquisition directorate;
 Ministry of water resources: Bangladesh Water Development Board; and
 Local Government Engineering Department (LGED).
2.5.1 Department of Environment (DOE)

The DOE has been placed under the MoEF as its technical wing and is statutorily responsible for the
implementation of the Environment Conservation Act, 1995. The Department was created in 1989,
to ensure sustainable development and to conserve and manage the environment of Bangladesh.
The principal activities of the DOE are:
 Defining EIA procedures and issuing environmental clearance permits - the latter being
the legal requirement before the proposed Project can be implemented;
 Providing advice or taking direct action to prevent degradation of the environment;
 Pollution control, including the monitoring of effluent sources and ensuring mitigation
of environmental pollution;
 Setting the Quality Standards for environmental parameters;

 Declaring Ecologically Critical Areas (ECAs), where the ecosystem has been degraded to
a critical state; and
 Review and evaluation of Initial Environmental Examinations (IEEs) and EIAs prepared
for projects in Bangladesh.
Procedure for obtaining Environmental Clearance from DoE, Bangladesh
The EIA process consists of three stages, screening, IEE and detailed EIA:
 Projects categorized as Green and Orange-A does not require IEE or EIA for environmental
clearance however, the proponent must submit an application in a prescribed format along
with specified documents;
 Projects categorized as Orange-B require an IEE to be submitted to the DOE along with an
application in a prescribed format and other specified documents; and
 Red category projects require both IEE and EIA. An IEE is required for the location clearance
and an EIA is required for the environmental clearance.
As per the ECR 1997, Power Plant project fall under the “RED” category as referred below:
 Item 6: Power Plant
The process for obtaining an Environmental Clearance Certificate for the proposed project is
outlined in the following Figure 2-1.

(Source: EIA Guideline for Industries, Department of Environment, 1997)
Figure 2-1: DoE Environmental Clearance Applicability and Procedure
2.6 Relevant International Treaties and Conventions

Bangladesh is party to a number (30)1 of international environmental conventions, treaties and
agreements. The international treaties and conventions relevant to the Project and their status are
detailed in Table 2-3.
1 Department of Environment (DoE)

Table 2-3: Project Relevant International Treaties and Conventions
Environment related International convention and Treaties Status
International Plant Protection Convention (Rome, 1951.) 01.09.78 (ratified)
International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution of the Sea by Oil
28.12.81 (entry into force)
(London, 1954 (as amended on 11 April 1962 and 21 October 1969.)
Plant Protection Agreement for the South East Asia and Pacific Region (as
04.12.74 (accessed) (entry into
amended) (Rome, 1956.)
force)
International Convention Relating to Intervention on the High Seas in Cases
of Oil Pollution Casualties (Brussels, 1969.)
Convention on Wetlands of International Importance especially as
20.04.92 (ratified)
Waterfowl Habitat (Ramsar, 1971) ("Ramsar Convention").
Convention Concerning the Protection of the World Cultural and natural 03.08.83 (accepted)
Heritage (Paris, 1972.)
03.11.83 (ratified)
Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna
18.02.82 (ratified)
and flora (Washington, 1973.) ("CITES convention")
United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (Montego Bay, 1982.) 10.12.82 (ratified)
Vienna Convention for the Protection of the Ozone Layer (Vienna, 1985.) 02.08.90(accessed)
31.10.90(entry into force)
Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer (Montreal 02.08.90
1987.)
31.10.90 (accessed) (entry into
force)
London Amendment to the Montreal Protocol on substances that Deplete
the Ozone Layer (London, 1990) 18.03.94(accessed)
16.06.94(entry into force)
Copenhagen Amendment to the Montreal protocol on Substances that 27.11.2000 (accepted)
Deplete the Ozone Layer, Copenhagen, 1992 26.2.2001 (entry into force)
Montreal Amendment of the Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete 27.7.2001 (Accepted)
the Ozone Layer, Montreal, 1997
26.10.2001 (Entry into force)
Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of 01.04.93 (accessed)
Hazardous Wastes and Their Disposal (Basel, 1989.)
International Convention on Oil Pollution Preparedness, Response and 30.01.90 (signed)

Cooperation (London, 1990.) In the process of ratification
United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change, (New York, 09.06.92 (signed)
1992.)
15.04.94 (ratified)
Convention on Biological Diversity, (Rio De Janeiro, 1992.) 05.06.92 (signed)
03.05.94 (ratified)
International Convention to Combat Desertification, (Paris 1994.) 14.10.94signed)
26.01.1996 (ratification)
Convention on the Prohibition of Military or Any Other Hostile Use of 03.10.79 (accessed) (entry into
Environmental Modification Techniques, (Geneva, 1976.) force)
Agreement Relating to the Implementation of Part XI of the United Nations 28.07.96 (signed)

Environment related International convention and Treaties Status
Convention on the Law of the Sea of 10 December 1982 (New York, 1994.)
Convention on the Prohibition of the Development, Production, Stockpiling 14.01.93 (signed)
and Use of Chemical Weapons and on their Destruction (Paris, 1993.)
Convention on persistent Organic Pollutants, Stockholm 23.5.2001 (signed)
12.03.2007 (ratified)
Kyoto protocol to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate 21.8.2001 (accessed)
Change
2.7 Development Agency’s Guidelines

Under the study health and safety guidelines of few development agencies will be reviewed. This
will include “ADB’s Safeguard Policy Statement, 2009”, “Environmental, Health, and Safety
Guidelines of the International Finance Corporation (IFC) Performance Standard” and “World Bank
Environmental Policies”.
2.7.1 ADB’s Safeguard Policy Statement, 2009

In July 2009, ADB's Board of Directors approved the new Safeguard Policy Statement (SPS)
governing the environmental and social safeguards of ADB's operations. The SPS builds upon
ADB's previous safeguard policies on the Environment, Involuntary Resettlement, and Indigenous
Peoples, and brings them into one consolidated policy framework with enhanced consistency and
coherence, and more comprehensively addresses environmental and social impacts and risks. The
SPS also provides a platform for participation by affected people and other stakeholders in the
project design and implementation.
The SPS applies to all ADB-financed and/or ADB-administered projects and their components,
regardless of the source of financing, including investment projects funded by a loan; and/or a
grant; and/or other means, such as equity and/or guarantees. ADB works with borrowers and
clients to put into practice the requirements of SPS.
The SPS supersedes ADB's Involuntary Resettlement Policy (1995), Policy on Indigenous Peoples
(1998), and Environment Policy (2002). In accordance with the SPS, these previous policies apply to
all projects and tranches of multi-tranche financing facility projects that were reviewed by ADB’s
management before 20 January 2010.
The objectives of ADB’s safeguards are to:
a. Avoid adverse impacts of projects on the environment and affected people, where
possible;
b. Minimize, mitigate, and/or compensate for adverse project impacts on the environment
and affected people when avoidance is not possible; and assist borrowers and clients to
strengthen their safeguard systems and develop the capacity to manage environmental
and social risks.
ADB’s SPS sets out the policy objectives, scope and triggers, and principles for three key safeguard
areas:
a. Environmental safeguards;

b. Involuntary Resettlement safeguards; and
c. Indigenous Peoples safeguards.
To help borrowers and clients and their projects achieve the desired outcomes, ADB adopts a set of
specific safeguard requirements that borrowers and clients are required to meet in addressing
environmental and social impacts and risks. These safeguard requirements are as follows:
a. Safeguard Requirements 1: Environment (Appendix 1 of SPS);
b. Safeguard Requirements 2: Involuntary Resettlement (Appendix 2 of SPS);
c. Safeguard Requirements 3: Indigenous Peoples (Appendix 3 of SPS); and
d. Safeguard Requirements 4: Special Requirements for Different Finance Modalities
(Appendix 4 of SPS).
In addition, ADB does not finance activities on the prohibited investment activities list (Appendix 5
of SPS). Furthermore, ADB does not finance projects that do not comply with its safeguard policy
statement, nor does it finance projects that do not comply with the host country’s social and
environmental laws and regulations, including those laws implementing host country obligations
under international law.
Consultation and Disclosure requirements of ADB
ADB’s Safeguard Policy and Public Communications Policy (2011) sets out disclosure requirements
for various ADB activities, including safeguard requirement. Safeguard Requirements 2:
Involuntary Resettlement (Appendix 2 of SPS); and Safeguard Requirements 3: Indigenous Peoples
(Appendix 3 of SPS) sets out the need for meaningful consultation and information disclosure
during project preparation and operation to the affected population and other ely stakeholders. Key
requirements include:
a. Information Disclosure: The borrower/client will submit the following documents to ADB
for disclosure on ADB’s website as per the applicability with respect to the Project:
 Draft EIA including draft EMP;
 Final EIA/IEE;
 Updated EIA/IEE and corrective active plan;
 Environmental Monitoring Reports.
 Resettlement Plan (RP)
 Indigenous Peoples Plan (IPP)
b. Information disclosure to affected people or stakeholders: The borrower/client will
provide relevant environmental information in a timely manner, in an accessible place and
in a form and language(s) understandable to affected people and other stakeholders. For
illiterate people, other suitable communication methods will be used.
c. Consultation and Participation: The borrower/client will carry out meaningful
consultation with affected people and other concerned stakeholders, including civil
society, and facilitate their informed participation.
d. Timing and Frequency for consultation and participation: Meaningful consultation begins
early in the project preparation stage and is carried out on an ongoing basis throughout
the project cycle,

ADB Project Categorization
The SPS, 2009 further outlines a classification system for the categorization of projects. The
classification tentatively occurs at the project identification stage, during the initial screening of
anticipated impacts. However, classification is an ongoing process, and the classification can be
changed at any time with the concurrence of the Chief Compliance Officer (CCO), as more detailed
information becomes available and a project proceeds.
Environment
A project’s environment category is determined by the category of its most environmentally
sensitive component, including direct, indirect, induced, and cumulative impacts. Each proposed
project is scrutinized as to its type, location, scale, sensitivity and the magnitude of its potential
environmental impacts. The level of detail and comprehensiveness of the EIA or IEE are
commensurate with the significance of the potential impacts and risks.
A proposed project is assigned to one of the following categories depending on the significance of
the potential environmental impacts and risks:
 Category A: Projects that could have significant environmental impacts. An

Environmental Impact Assessment (ESIA) is required.
 Category B: Projects that could have some adverse environmental impacts, but of less
significance than those for category A. An Initial Environmental Examination (IEE) is
required to determine whether significant impacts warranting an EIA are likely. If an
EIA is not needed, the IEE is regarded as the final environmental assessment report.
 Category C: Projects those are unlikely to have adverse environmental impacts. No EIA
or IEE is required, although environmental implications are reviewed.
 Category FI: Projects that involve a credit line through a financial intermediary (FI) or an
equity investment in a FI. The FI must apply an environmental management system,
unless all subprojects will result in insignificant impacts.
Involuntary Resettlement
A project’s involuntary resettlement category is determined by the category of its most sensitive
component in terms of involuntary resettlement impacts. The involuntary resettlement impacts of
an ADB-supported project are considered significant if 200 or more persons will experience major
impacts, which are defined as (i) being physically displaced from housing, or (ii) losing 10% or more
of their productive assets (income generating). The level of detail and comprehensiveness of the
resettlement plan are commensurate with the significance of the potential impacts and risks. A
proposed project is assigned to one of the following categories depending on the significance of the
probable involuntary resettlement impacts:
 Category A: A proposed project is classified as category A if it is likely to have

significant involuntary resettlement impacts. A resettlement plan, including assessment
of social impacts, is required;
 Category B: A proposed project is classified as category B if it includes involuntary
resettlement impacts that are not deemed significant. A resettlement plan, including
assessment of social impacts, is required;

 Category C: A proposed project is classified as category C if it has no involuntary
resettlement impacts. No further action is required; and
 Category FI: A proposed project is classified as category FI if it involves the investment
of ADB funds to, or through, a financial intermediary (paragraphs 53–58).
Projects are also classified on the basis of impacts to indigenous people, however is not applicable
for this Project.
Categorization of Proposed Project
Categorization for the proposed Project was undertaken by using ADB’s Rapid Environmental
Assessment (REA), Involuntary Resettlement (IR) and Indigenous People (IP) Assessment checklists
during the scoping exercise. The REA checklist of the Project for the Thermal Power Plant Sector has
been presented in Annex A. The findings of the assessment are presented in Table 2-4.
Table 2-4: Project Categorization as per ADB Safeguards
Sl. Criteria Relevance Remarks Category
1. Environmental Categorization
a
Unprecedented Change in land use The land was used mainly for Based on
agriculture and homestead. irreversible,
Additional land will be diverse and
required for the transmission cumulative
line tower. impacts, it should
b
Diverse Nature of activities Power generation be categorized as
‘A’
c
Irreversible Environmental Irreversible impacts due to the
issues and impacts of the project include:
Project are  Air emission and dust
anticipated during the  Change in air quality
construction  Increased noise and
and operation of vibration
the power plant  Land use change
and transmission line  Loss of agricultural land
 Health and safety
d
Cumulative There is one rice mill and one The resultant impact of these
power plant near the project industries will be higher
site.
2. Involuntary Resettlement Categorization

a Unprecedented Land Requirement agricultural land Now the project
for project development site is already
b Adverse Land acquisition The total land of the project developed and all
was voluntarily purchased land owners got
from respective land owner. their land value
No claim was raised during as per the market
the discussion with the price. No further
land seller. land is required
for the project
c Irreversible Project affected household There was no house hold exist
development.
in the project site.

Sl. Criteria Relevance Remarks Category
Hence on
Involuntary
Resettlement, the
project shall be
categorized as ‘C’
3. Indigenous People Categorization

a
Presence Existence of indigenous No indigenous people are In case of no
people present within the project AoI foreseen adverse
b
Impact Impact on No adverse impact foreseen impact. Project
indigenous/.ethnic/scheduled shall be
tribes categorized as ‘C’
As the project has been categorized as Category ‘A’ with respect to environmental categorization,
the specific requirements of ADB are:
 An EIA study is essential for this Project;

 The EIA must include an Environmental Management Plan (EMP) that outlines specific
mitigation measures, environmental monitoring requirements, and related institutional
arrangements, including budget requirements;
 Consultation with groups affected by the proposed project. The consultation needs to be
carried out as early as possible in the project cycle so that views of affected groups are
taken into account in the design of the Project and its environment mitigation measures;
 The provisions for the EMPs must also be fully reflected in the Project administration
memorandums; and
 To ensure proper and timely implementation of the EMPs and adherence to the agreed
environmental covenants, ADB requires borrowers or executing agencies to submit semi-
annual reports on implementation of EMPs, and that this requirement will be reflected in
the loan agreements.
2.7.2 International Finance Corporation (IFC) Performance Standards

The Performance Standards (PS) (January 2012) established by IFC stipulates that the Project shall
meet certain requirements throughout the life cycle of an investment by IFC or other relevant
financial institution such as other DFIs (eg. FMO) or commercial banks, which are signatory to the
Equator Principles, 2006. A brief description of the Performance standards is provided in Table 2-5.
Table 2-5: IFC Performance Standards
Performance Standards Specific Areas
Performance Standard 1 Assessment and Management of Environmental and Social Risks and
Impacts
Performance Standard 2 Labor and Working Conditions
Performance Standard 3 Resource Efficiency and Pollution Prevention

Performance Standard 4 Community Health, Safety and Security
Performance Standard 5 Land Acquisition and Involuntary Resettlement
Performance Standard 6 Biodiversity Conservation and Sustainable Management of Living Natural

Resources
Performance Standard 7 Indigenous Peoples
Performance Standard 8 Cultural Heritage
Source: IFC Performance Standards, January, 2012

These PS and guidelines provide ways and means to identify impacts and affected stakeholders and
lay down processes for management and mitigation of adverse impacts. A brief on the requirements
as laid down in the performance standards is described in the following subsections.
Following sub section tries to provide the requirements of the specific PS, so as to set up the context
for matching the requirements of these PS during the various stages of the life cycle of the Project.
PS 1: Assessment and Management of Environmental and Social Risks and Impacts
The PS 1 requires Social and Environmental Assessment and Management Systems for managing
social and environmental performance throughout the life cycle of this Project and runs through all
subsequent PSs. The main elements of PS 1 include:
a) A Social and Environmental Assessment to understand the social and environmental
impacts and risks;
b) A Management Program for mitigating the impacts and minimizing the risks identified
in the assessment;
c) Establishing and ensuring organizational capacity and requisite trainings to the staff to
implement the Management Programme;
d) Engagement with the community to ensure free prior informed consultation (FPIC),
community grievance redress constructive relationship all through the project life cycle;
and
e) Adequate monitoring and reporting systems to measure and report the effectiveness of
the Management Programs.
The social and environmental performance is a continuous process to be initiated by the
management and would involve communication between the organization, its workers and local
communities directly affected by the Project. The PS requires that Project proponent initiate regular
assessment of the potential social and environmental risks and impacts and consistently tries to
mitigate and manage strategy on an ongoing basis.
PS 2: Labor and Working Conditions
The economic growth through employment creation and income generation is recognized and
balanced protecting the basic rights of workers. PS 2 is guided by the various conventions of
International Labor Organization (ILO) and outlines the minimum requirements of working
conditions, protection to the workforce (including issues of child and forced labor) and ensuring
occupational health and safety of both its ‘employees’ as well as ‘non employees’ working through
contractors. The PS requires:

a) Establishment of a sound worker-management relationship;
b) Encouraging equal opportunity and fair treatment of workers;
c) Promoting compliance with national labor and employment laws;
d) Promoting healthy and safe working conditions for workers.
PS 2 requires project proponents to conduct its activities in a manner consistent with the four core
labor standards (child labor, forced labor, non-discrimination, and freedom of association and
collective bargaining). In addition, PS 2 also addresses other areas such as working conditions and
terms of employment, retrenchment, and occupational health and safety issues.
Some of these requirements refer to the applicable national law. Whereas national law establishes
standards that are less stringent than those in PS 2, or are silent, the project proponent is expected to
meet the requirements of PS 2.
PS 3: Resource Efficiency and Pollution Prevention
PS 3 outlines the approach to pollution prevention and abatement in line with internationally
disseminated technologies and practices with objectives to:
a) avoid or minimize adverse impacts on human health and the environment by avoiding
or minimizing pollution from activities; and
b) Promote the reduction of emissions that contribute to climate change.
PS 3 requires a project to avoid, minimize, or reduce adverse impacts on human health and
environment by adopting pollution preventive and control technologies throughout the Project life
cycle.
PS 3 outlines a project approach to Pollution Prevention and Abatement (PPA) in line with
internationally disseminated technologies and practices. It describes the measures to take into
account the potential impact of emissions on the ambient conditions (such as ambient air quality)
and seek to avoid or minimize these impacts within the context of the nature and significance of
pollutants emitted.
PS 4: Community, Health, Safety and Security
PS 4 concentrates on the responsibility that must be undertaken by the client to avoid or minimize
the risks and impacts to the community’s health, safety and security that may arise from project
activities. PS 4 require a project to evaluate risks and impacts to the health and safety of the affected
community during the Project life cycle and establish measures to avoid minimize and reduce risks
and impacts from the Project.
PS 4 recognizes that project activities, equipment, and infrastructure often bring benefits to
communities including employment, services, and opportunities for economic development.
However, projects can also increase the potential for community exposure to risks and impacts
arising from equipment accidents, structural failures, and releases of hazardous materials.
The performance standard details out project proponents responsibility to avoid or minimize the
possible risks and impacts to community health, safety and security that may arise from project
activities.

PS 5: Land Acquisition and Involuntary Resettlement
The objectives of this PS are to:
a) Avoid or at least minimize the involuntary resettlement wherever feasible by exploring
alternative project designs;
b) Mitigate adverse social and economic impacts from land acquisition or restrictions on
affected persons’ use of land by:
 Providing compensation for loss of assets at replacement cost; and
 Ensuring that resettlement activities are implemented with appropriate
disclosure of information, consultation, and the informed participation of those
affected.
a) Improve or at least restore the livelihoods and standards of living of displaced persons;
and
b) Improve living conditions among displaced persons through provision of adequate
housing with security of tenure at resettlement sites.
PS 5 require a project to consider various processes and systems to avoid/minimize social and
economic impacts related to land acquisition and resettlement.
This PS applies to physical or economic displacement resulting from the following types of land
transactions:
a) Type I: Land rights for a private sector project acquired through expropriation or other
compulsory procedures;
b) Type II: Land rights for a private sector project acquired through negotiated settlements
with property owners or those with legal rights to land, including customary or
traditional rights recognized or recognizable under the laws of the country, if
expropriation or other compulsory process would have resulted upon the failure of
negotiation; and
c) This PS does not apply to resettlement resulting from voluntary land transactions (ie
market transactions in which the seller is not obliged to sell and the buyer cannot resort
to expropriation or other compulsory procedures if negotiations fail). The impacts
arising from such transactions shall be dealt with as under PS1, though sometimes, when
risks are identified, the project proponent may decide to adhere to PS 5 requirements
even in willing buyer-seller cases.
PS 6: Biodiversity Conservation and Sustainable Management of Living Natural Resources
PS 6 aims at protecting and conserving biodiversity, the variety of life in all its forms, including
genetic, species and ecosystem diversity and its ability to change and evolve, is fundamental to
sustainable development. The components of biodiversity, as defined in the Convention on
Biological Diversity, include ecosystems and habitats, species and communities, and genes and
genomes, all of which have social, economic, cultural and scientific importance. This PS addresses
how clients can avoid or mitigate threats to biodiversity arising from their operations as well as
incorporate sustainable management of renewable natural resources.
PS 6 recognizes that protecting and conserving biodiversity—the variety of life in all its forms,
including genetic, species and ecosystem diversity—and its ability to change and evolve, is

fundamental to sustainable development. It reflects the objectives of the Convention on Biological
Diversity to conserve biological diversity and promote use of renewable natural resources in a
sustainable manner.
PS 7: Indigenous Peoples
PS 7 acknowledges the possibility of vulnerability of indigenous people owing to their culture,
beliefs, institutions and living standards, and that it may further get compromised by one or other
project activity throughout the life cycle of the project. The PS underlines the requirement of
avoiding / minimizing adverse impacts on indigenous people in a project area, respecting the local
culture and customs, fostering good relationship and ensuring that development benefits are
provided to improve their standard of living and livelihoods.
PS 7 recognizes that Indigenous Peoples, as social groups with identities that are distinct from
dominant groups in national societies, are often among the most marginalized and vulnerable
segments of the population. The term “indigenous people” is more clearly defined in the IFC
Guidance Note for PS 7.
Objectives of PS 7 underscore the need to avoid adverse project impacts on Indigenous Peoples’
communities living in the project’s area of influence, or where avoidance is not feasible, to
minimize, mitigate or compensate for such impacts through mechanisms that are tailored to their
specific cultural characteristics and expressed needs of the Indigenous Peoples, in a manner
commensurate with the scale of project risks and impacts.
PS 8: Cultural Heritage
PS 8 aims to protect the irreplaceable cultural heritage and to guide clients on protecting cultural
heritage in the course of their business operations. In addition, the requirements of this PS on a
project’s use of cultural heritage are based in part on standards set by the Convention on Biological
Diversity.
PS 8 recognizes the importance of cultural heritage with an objective to:
a) Protect cultural heritage from the adverse impacts of project activities;
b) Support its preservation; and
c) Promote the equitable sharing of benefits from the use of cultural heritage in business
activities.
The PS requires the project proponent to comply with relevant national law on the
protection of cultural heritage, including national law implementing the host country’s
obligations under the Convention Concerning the Protection of the World Cultural and
Natural Heritage and other relevant international law.
2.7.3 IFC Project Categorization

As part of its review of a project’s expected social and environmental impacts, IFC uses a system of
social and environmental categorization. This categorization is used to reflect the size of impacts
understood as a result of the client’s social and environmental assessment and to specify IFC’s
institutional requirements. Similar to ADB, the IFC categories are:

a) Category A Projects: Projects with potential significant adverse social or environmental
impacts that are diverse, irreversible or unprecedented;
b) Category B Projects: Projects with potential limited adverse social or environmental
impacts that are few in number, generally site-specific, largely reversible and readily
addressed through mitigation measures;
c) Category C Projects: Projects with minimal or no adverse social or environmental
impacts, including certain financial intermediary (FI) projects with minimal or no
adverse risks;
d) Category FI Projects: All FI projects excluding those that are Category C projects.
IFC therefore categorizes project primarily according to the significance and nature of impacts. IFC
defines the project's area of influence as the primary project site(s) and related facilities that the
client (including its contractors) develops or controls; associated facilities that are not funded as part
of the project (funding may be provided separately by a client or a third party
including the government), and whose viability and existence depend exclusively on the project
and whose goods or services are essential for the successful operation of a project; areas potentially
impacted by cumulative impacts from further planned development of a project; and areas
potentially affected by impacts from unplanned but predictable developments caused by the project
that may occur later or at a different location. The area of influence does not include potential
impacts that would occur without a project or independently of a project.
Project Classification as per IFC Performance Standards
With reference to the IFC’s environmental and social screening criteria, it is anticipated that the
proposed Project will fall under Category B for the following reasons:
Irreversible: Environmental and social impacts of theproject are anticipated during the construction
and operation of the power plant. The irreversible impacts will encompass increase noise and
vibration during the plant construction and operation, change in air quality due to existing projects,
occupational health and safety issues, community health and safety issues, risks due to storage and
handling of highly flammable chemicals and associated development in the area. These impacts will
irreversible in nature without any mitigation measures and hence require proper attention to
mitigate and minimize the overall impact in the project influence area.
Cumulative: There is small cumulative impact around the project site. There is one power plant
located opposite the proposed power plant.
Unprecedented: The Project site is a developed land, already earmarked for the 200 MW HFO fired
power plant. There one power plant opposite side of river Dakatia.
IFC EHS Guidelines
The Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) General Guidelines (April 30, 2007) will be applicable
for this Project. In addition to that, IFC’s Sector specific EHS Guidelines for Thermal Power Plants
(December 19, 2008) will also apply.

2.8 World Bank's Environmental Safeguard Policies
The World Bank has developed a number of Safeguard Policies to ensure that all possible impacts
are considered and mitigation measures are spelled out prior to the implementation of any
proposed project. These policies ensure uniformity of the quality of operations is across different
settings worldwide. If the decision is taken that a Safeguard Policy should be applied, mitigation
measures and plans must be developed and be in place before the implementation of a proposed
project.
The Bank requires environmental screening and classification for all investment projects (including
ones financed by Trust Funds, Project Preparation Facilities and Guarantees) proposed for Bank
financing, to help ensure that they are environmentally and socially sound and sustainable.
Screening and classification take into account the natural environment (air, water, and land); human
health and safety; social aspects (involuntary resettlement, indigenous peoples); cultural property;
and trans-boundary and global environmental aspects.
The objectives of environmental screening and classification are: to evaluate the environmental risks
associated with a proposed operation; to determine the depth and breadth of Environmental
Assessment (EA); and to recommend an appropriate choice of EA instrument(s) suitable for a given
project. The Bank recognizes that environmental screening and classification is not absolute and
involves professional judgment on a case by case basis. When screening, careful consideration needs
to be given to potential environmental impacts and risks associated with the proposed project.
Judgment is exercised with reference to the policy expectations and guidance; real impacts on the
ground; and established regional and Bank-wide precedence and good practice.
2.8.1 Environmental Assessment (OP 4.01)

EA requirement: The World Bank requires environmental assessment (EA) of projects proposed for
the Bank support to ensure that they are environmentally sound and sustainable, and thus to
improve decision making. The Bank Policy OP 4.01 considers that EA is a process whose breadth,
depth, and type of analysis depend on the nature, scale, and potential environmental impact of the
proposed project. EA evaluates a project's potential environmental risks and impacts in its area of
influence; examines project alternatives; identifies ways of improving project selection, siting,
planning, design, and implementation by preventing, minimizing, mitigating, or compensating for
adverse environmental impacts and enhancing positive impacts; and includes the process of
mitigating and managing adverse environmental impacts throughout the project implementation
period. EA takes into account the natural environment (air, water and land); human health and
safety; social aspects (involuntary resettlement, indigenous peoples and physical cultural
resources); and trans-boundary and global environmental aspects. The Bank Policy also envisages
that the borrower Government is responsible for carrying out the EA and the Bank advises the
borrower on the Bank's EA requirements.
EA classification: The World Bank classifies the proposed project into one of the four categories,
depending on the type, location, sensitivity, and scale of the project and the nature and magnitude
of its potential environmental impacts. These categories are defined below.

Category A: A proposed project is classified as Category A if it is likely to have significant adverse
environmental impacts that are sensitive, diverse, or unprecedented. These impacts may affect an
area broader than the sites or facilities subject to physical works.
Category B: A proposed project is classified as Category B if its potential adverse environmental
impacts on human populations or environmentally important areas-- including wetlands, forests,
grasslands, and other natural habitats--are less adverse than those of Category A projects.
Category C: A proposed project is classified as Category C if it is likely to have minimal or no
adverse environmental impacts. Beyond screening, no further EA action is required for a Category
C project.
Category FI: A proposed project is classified as Category FI if it involves investment of Bank funds
through a financial intermediary (FI), in subprojects that may result in adverse environmental
impacts.
The proposed project has been classified as Category A, since some of the potential impacts are
likely to be significant and diverse.
2.8.2 Natural Habitats (OP 4.04)

The Policy describes the conservation of natural habitats, like other measures that protect and
enhance the environment, to be essential for long-term sustainable development. The Bank
therefore supports the protection, maintenance, and rehabilitation of natural habitats and their
functions in its economic and sector work, project financing, and policy dialogue. The Bank also
supports, and expects borrowers to apply a precautionary approach to natural resource
management to ensure opportunities for environmentally sustainable development. The Bank-
promotes and supports natural habitat conservation and improved land use by financing projects
designed to integrate into national and regional development, the conservation of natural habitats
and the maintenance of ecological functions. Furthermore, the Bank promotes the rehabilitation of
degraded natural habitats. The Bank does not support projects that involve the significant
conversion or degradation of critical natural habitats.
The activities under the proposed project will not alter the natural habitat hence this policy is not
triggered.
2.8.3 Pest Management (OP 4.09)

Through this OP, the WB supports a strategy that promotes use of biological or environmental
control methods and reduces reliance on synthetic chemical pesticides. Rural development and
health sector projects have to avoid using harmful pesticides. Other pesticides can be used, but only
as an element of an Integrated Pest Management Plan (IPMP) that emphasizes environmental and
biological controls.
The project will not promote the use of chemical pesticides and fertilizers. Hence, this policy is not
triggered.

2.8.4 Indigenous Peoples (OP 4.10)
For purposes of this Policy, the term ‘Indigenous Peoples’ is used in a generic sense to refer to a
distinct, vulnerable, social and cultural group possessing the following characteristics in varying
degrees:
 self-identification as members of a distinct indigenous cultural group and recognition of this

identity by others;
 collective attachment to geographically distinct habitats or ancestral territories in the project

area and to the natural resources in these habitats and territories;
 customary cultural, economic, social, or political institutions that are separate from those of
the dominant society and culture; and
 an indigenous language, often different from the official language of the country or region.
The OP defines the process to be followed if the project affects the indigenous people.
There are no indigenous communities residing in the project area and therefore, no impacts on them
are expected under the project. Therefore, this OP is not triggered.
2.8.5 Physical Cultural Resources (OP 4.11)

The World Bank’s general policy regarding cultural properties is to assist in their
preservation, and to seek to avoid their elimination. The specific aspects of the Policy are given
below.
 The Bank normally declines to finance projects that will significantly damage nonreplicable
cultural property, and will assist only those projects that are sited or designed so as to
prevent such damage.
 The Bank will assist in the protection and enhancement of cultural properties
encountered in Bank-financed projects, rather than leaving that protection to chance.
In some cases, the project is best relocated in order that sites and structures can be
preserved, studied, and restored intact in situ. In other cases, structures can be
relocated, preserved, studied, and restored on alternate sites. Often, scientific study,
selective salvage, and museum preservation before destruction is all that is
necessary. Most such projects should include the training and strengthening of
institutions entrusted with safeguarding a nation’s cultural patrimony. Such activities
should be directly included in the scope of the project, rather than being postponed for some
possible future action, and the costs are to be internalized in computing overall project costs.
 Deviations from this policy may be justified only where expected project benefits are
great, and the loss of or damage to cultural property is judged by competent
authorities to be unavoidable, minor, or otherwise acceptable. Specific details of the
justification should be discussed in project documents.
 This policy pertains to any project in which the Bank is involved, irrespective of
whether the Bank is itself financing the part of the project that may affect cultural
property.

As part of the environmental assessment study for the project, a full baseline assessment has been
carried out, including consultations, to identify any physical cultural resources (PCR) in the project
area. Since, there is no physical cultural resource in the project site so this impact on PCR is
expected. However, the ‘chance find’ procedures are included in the EMP.
2.8.6 Involuntary Resettlement (OP 4.12)

The WB’s experience indicates that involuntary resettlement under development projects, if
unmitigated, often gives rise to severe economic, social, and environmental risks: production
systems are dismantled; people face impoverishment when their productive assets or income
sources are lost; people are relocated to environments where their productive skills may be less
applicable and the competition for resources greater; community institutions and social networks
are weakened; kin groups are dispersed; and cultural identity, traditional authority, and the
potential for mutual help are diminished or lost. This policy includes safeguards to address and
mitigate these impoverishment risks. The overall objectives of the Policy are given below.
 Involuntary resettlement should be avoided where feasible, or minimized, exploring

all viable alternative project designs.
 Where it is not feasible to avoid resettlement, resettlement activities should be conceived

and executed as sustainable development programs, providing sufficient investment
resources to enable the persons displaced by the project to share in project benefits.
Displaced persons should be meaningfully consulted and should have opportunities to
participate in planning and implementing resettlement programs.
 Displaced persons should be assisted in their efforts to improve their livelihoods and
standards of living or at least to restore them, in real terms, to pre-displacement levels or to
levels prevailing prior to the beginning of project implementation, whichever is higher.
The project will be developed on the purchased land. The land owner sold the land willingly and
they got the land value properly. Additional land requirement is not expected and hence this OP is
not triggered.
2.8.7 Forests (OP 4.36)

This Policy recognizes the need to reduce deforestation and promote sustainable forest conservation
and management in reducing poverty. The Bank believes that forests are very much essential for
poverty reduction and sustainable development irrespective of their location in the world. The Bank
assists borrowers with forest restoration activities that maintain or enhance biodiversity and
ecosystem functionality. The Bank also assists borrowers with the establishment and sustainable
management of environmentally appropriate, socially beneficial, and economically viable forest
plantations to help meet growing demands for forest goods and services. The Bank does not finance
projects that, in its opinion, would involve significant conversion or degradation of critical forest
areas or related critical natural habitats. Furthermore, the Bank does not finance projects that
contravene applicable international environmental agreements.
Though the proposed project will support some compensatory tree plantation, this OP is not
triggered since the project is not located in any forested area and will therefore not
have any direct or indirect impact on forests. The tree plantation will nonetheless be carried

out fully in compliance with the relevant paragraph of OP 4.36 on plantations (paragraph 7),
which states: “The Bank does not finance plantations that involve any conversion or
degradation of critical natural habitats, including in Project footprint or in Project influence
area with critical natural habitats. When the Bank finances plantations, it gives preference to
siting such projects on un-forested sites or lands already converted (excluding any lands that
have been converted in anticipation of the project). In view of the potential for plantation
projects to introduce invasive species and threaten biodiversity, such projects must be
designed to prevent and mitigate these potential threats to natural habitats.”
2.8.8 International Waterways (OP 7.50)

Projects on International Waterways may affect the relations between the World Bank and its
borrowers, and between riparian states. Therefore, the Bank attaches great importance to the
riparian making appropriate agreements or arrangements for the entire waterway, or parts thereof,
and stands ready to assist in this regard. A borrower must notify other riparian countries of
planned projects that could affect water quality or quantity, sufficiently far in advance to allow
them to review the plans and raise any concerns or objections. HFO is imported using international
water ways. Therefore, this policy is applicable for the proposed power plant.
2.9 Equator Principle

The Equator Principles, is “a risk management framework, adopted by financial institutions, for
determining, assessing and managing environmental and social risk in projects and is primarily
intended to provide a minimum standard for due diligence to support responsible risk decision-
making”. The Equator Principles are a voluntary set of standards which are developed to support
implementation of environmental and social policies and the Principles are outlined under 10
headings as noted under:
Principle 1: Review and Categorization;
Principle 2: Environmental and Social Assessment;
Principle 3: Applicable Environmental and Social Standards;
Principle 4: Environmental and Social Management System and Equator Principles Action Plan;
Principle 5: Stakeholder Engagement;
Principle 6: Grievance Mechanism;
Principle 7: Independent Review;
Principle 8: Covenants;
Principle 9: Independent Monitoring and Reporting and
Principle 10: Reporting and Transparency.
Though not immediately recognizable from the list of principles, the proponents of the Equator
Principles take cognizance of climate change, biodiversity, and human rights, and stressed that
negative impacts on project-affected ecosystems, communities, and the climate should be avoided
where possible. If these impacts are unavoidable they should be minimized, mitigated, and/or
offset (for details of the principles see Annex B).

2.10 Environmental Standards
The Project shall have to comply with Bangladesh environmental, health and safety laws and
World Bank Group Guidelines with special attention to comply with the Bangladesh (GOB
Environmental Conservation Rule 1997) and World Bank Group requirements regarding air
emissions (December 2008).
Therefore, the EHS standards as stipulated in ECR 1997 and amendments thereof as well as in the
IFC EHS guidelines (General and Thermal Power Plant specific) for air quality, surface and ground
water quality, ambient noise levels, emissions and effluent discharge will be applicable.
The ADB SPS policy Statement 2009 (SPS) states, "During the design, construction, and operation of
the project the borrower/client will apply pollution prevention and control technologies and
practices consistent with international good practice, as reflected in internationally recognized
standards such as the World Bank Group’s Environment, Health and Safety Guidelines. These
standards contain performance levels and measures that are normally acceptable and applicable to
projects." For this purpose IFC EHS guidelines are recommended. The applicable standards for
various environmental parameters are given in Annex-C.

3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
3.1 Introduction
Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd. has signed a Power Purchase Agreement with its
buyer, Bangladesh Power Development Board (BPDB) on January 4, 2018 and is going to install a
200 MW Heavy Fuel Oil (HFO) based power generation facility at Gunrajdi, Chandpur Sadar,
Chandpur. The power plant is designed for continuous base load operation. The Plant factor will be
80% and it will run round the year according to the electricity demand except the scheduled
maintenance outage time. Electrical power will be generated by 12 units of Wartsila 18V50 engine
with each engine having a capacity of 18.415 MW. The engine efficiency will be 43.374%. The
engines are capable of running at rated output continuously. For other conditions the power will be
adjusted. The plant will not involve any relocation of human settlement, as the project is situated on
the purchased vacant land previously owned by private individuals.
There are no particularly sensitive ecological, cultural and archeological sites in the area. The area
enjoys necessary infrastructure facilities, which include transport, electricity, telecommunication
etc. For all construction activities for the plant, the provisions of Bangladesh National Building
Code (BNBC) will be followed that include structural designs and seismicity tolerance. All the
relevant social and environmental risks and potential impacts will be taken due care of as part of
the assessment in compliance of the Performance Standards set by the World Bank besides
following the guidelines set forth by DoE. The basic data of the Desh Energy Chandpur Power
Company Limited are furnished in Table 3-1.
Table 3-1: Key Information of Proposed HFO based power plant at Chandpur
Chandpur Sadar(on the southern bank of river Dakatia), Word No.-12,
Project Location : Gunrajdi, Chandpur, Bangladesh
GPS Location 23°13'30.22"N, 90°40'25.22"E
Level-15, Lotus Kamal Tower-1, 57 Joar Sahara C/A, Dhaka-1229,
Head Office :
Bangladesh
Nature of Business : Power Generation
Project Tenure : 15 years
Status of the Plant
Equipment : New Machine
Plant type : Reciprocating Engine based Power Project
Engine model : W18V50
Net Guaranteed Heat
Rate ( LHV) : 8300 KJ/KWh
Source of HFO : Imported

Yearly Electricity
Production : 14,01,600 MWH
Evacuation Voltage : 132 kV Grid Voltage
Power Evacuation
Facility : 132 kV Chandpur-Chowmuhoni double circuit line.
Levelized Tarrif : US cents 10.65/kWh or equivalent to BDT 8.3772/kWh
Fuel Requirement : 2,78,208 MT/year [ at 80% plant factor]
Source of Water :
Operation phase: Dakatia River
3.2 The Project Site
3.2.1 Site Location
The Project site is situated at Gunrajdi Mouza in Chandpur Sadar Upazilla under Chandpur District,
Bangladesh. Dakatia River passes besides the power plant. The project site is about 70 Km from
Dhaka and 1.3 Km from Chandpur District Head Quarter. The proposed project would be set up on
the land purchased from local landowner by DECPCL. The landowner sold their land at market
price and before purchasing, the land was vacant with no settlement or temporary squatters.
Therefore there is no issue of resettlement. There is no suitable access road around the project site.
River Dakatia will be used to carry land filling materials, equipment and workers in the project site.
Chandpur- Faridganj Road is about 500 away from the project site. There is no connecting road
from the power plant to the main road. About 60 meter long approach road need to be constructed
to join with nearby earthen road which run toward the main road. The earthen road needs to be
widened and paved to allow vehicular movement up to the power plant.
Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd. has purchased about 32 acre land at Gunrajdi Mouza,
Chandpur Sadar Upazila, Chandpur District. The land is fallen type and inundated most of time of
a year. Geographical location of the DECPCL project site is between 23°13'23.83"N to 23°13'35.95"N
latitude and 90°40'16.01"E to 90°40'28.72"E longitude. The location of the proposed power plant is
shown in Figure 3-1 . There is few scattered house hold within 150 meter radius from center of the
proposed power plant.

Figure 3-1: Location Map of proposed power plant
3.3 The power plant

3.3.1 Power Plant Layout
Propose Power plant layout has the following components:
Engine Hall and Electrical Equipment Building:
The land required for engine hall and electrical equipment building area consists of (1) Two Engine
halls, (2) Space for pipe racks, (3) waste heat boilers, (4) oil fired boiler, (5) exhaust stacks, (6)
electrical equipment building and (7) control room. All these installations are closely located to
facilitate plant operation.
Tank Farm Area:

For safety reason all the fuel and lube oil tanks are located close to each other and contained within
a boundary wall called secondary containment. Tanks located in the secondary containment are:
(1) Four main HFO storage tank, (2) one HSD storage tank, (3) Two HFO Buffer tanks, (4) one HFO
service tank (6) one fresh lube oil tank, (7) one used lube oil tank and (8) one service lube oil tank.
Switchyard:
Power evacuation corridor connecting to the nearest substations has been considered during the
preparation of the plant layout. The switchyard will contain two step-up transformers, breakers,

dis-connector switches, buses, CTs, PTs and control and relay protections. A transmission tower
will be located at one side of the switchyard to evacuate power. The transmission tower will be
designed to have road crossing.
Administrative Building:
Location of the administrative building will be close to the main gate of the power plant.
Miscellaneous Plant Facilities:

In addition to the main facilities described above, there are number of miscellaneous facilities such
as:
 Cogeneration unit
 Cooling radiators and cooling tower
 HFO treatment building
 Fuel receiving facilities
 Water treatment and waste water treatment building
 Fire water pump house
 Black start DG set room
 Workshop
 Warehouse
 Security office building
The space requirement of these miscellaneous facilities, even though comparatively less when
compared with the area required for major facilities also needs consideration in deciding the
overall space requirement for the station.
Roads:
Approach road from the power plant to main road will be 6 meter wide and about 60 meter long.
All main roads in the power plant will be 6 meter wide.
Jetty:
There will be two temporary jetties on Dakatia River to carry construction materials and equipment
to the power plant during construction period. One permanent pontoon will be set up close to the
tank farm to transfer fuel from oil tanker to storage tank.
Other Facilities:
A training center will be set up in south west side of the project site close to the main gate. There are
two 4 storied dormitories, 4 residential quarters, a mosque, a school in the power plant area. There
will be a playground; a gymnasium and volleyball play ground in the premises. A Bungalow and a
helipad will be set up in the northern side of the project site.

The proposed plant layout is shown in Figure 3-2.
Source: DECPCL
Figure 3-2: Proposed power plant layout

3.3.2 Power Generation Equipment
A. Generating Set:
The W18V50 engine and generator are mounted on base frames. The base frames are flexibly
mounted on a concrete foundation by means of steel springs. The main dimensions of the W18V50
generating set are given in Table 3-2. The generating set arrangement is shown in Figure 3-3.
Table 3-2: Main dimensions of W18V50 generating set

Parameters Value
Length 18.781 M
Width 4.09 M
Height 6.02 M
Weight(dry) 368000 Kg
Weight (wet) 383000 Kg
Figure 3-3: Typical Wärtsilä 18V generating set arrangement
A1. Wärtsilä 18V50 engine
General engine description
The Wärtsilä 18V50 is a four stroke engine. The engine is designed for continuous operation on
Heavy fuel oil, and can be started and stopped on Heavy fuel oil if the fuel is heated to the
operating temperature. Light fuel oil is a back-up fuel.
Diesel process
The engine works according to the diesel process. In this process liquid fuel is injected into the
cylinder at high pressure by camshaft operated pumps. The fuel is ignited instantly due to the
high temperature resulting from the compression.

Combustion takes place under constant pressure, with fuel injected into the cylinder during
combustion. After the working phase, the exhaust gas valves open, and the cylinder is emptied of
exhaust gases. The intake air is turbocharged and intercooled. The combustion process is shown in
Figure 3-4.
Source: Engine Technical specification
Figure 3-4: The combustion process in W18V50 Engine
The engine main data is given in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3: Engine Main Data

Parameters Data
Configuration V engine form
Number of cylinders 18
Cylinder bore 500 mm
Stroke 580 mm
Speed 500 Rpm
Mean piston speed 9.7 m/s
Mean effective pressure 22 Bar
Swept volume per cylinder 94.4 dm3
Compression ratio 13.6:1
Number of inlet valves 2
Number of outlet valves 2
Direction of rotation facing towards flywheel Clockwise
A2. Generator
The generator is of the synchronous, three-phase, brushless, salient pole type. The main data of
generator is given in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4: Generator Main Data

Parameters Data
Generator apparent power 23018 kVA
Rated power factor 0.8
Nominal voltage 11000 V
Rated current (In) 1208 A
Voltage adjustment range ±5 %
Frequency 50 Hz

Parameters Data
Generator apparent power 23018 kVA
Rated power factor 0.8
Nominal voltage 11000 V
Rated current (In) 1208 A
Voltage adjustment range ±5 %
Speed 500 Rpm
Continuous short-circuit current >2.5 x In
Insulation class F
Temperature rise stator F
Temperature rise rotor F
Cooling method Air cooled
Enclosure IP23
Standard IEC60034
B1. Engine auxiliary module

To ensure installation quality and reduce erection time, Wärtsilä has developed prefabricated
auxiliary modules. These modules contain several pieces of auxiliary equipment. This saves
significant pipefitting and installation time on-site. The complete module is pressure- and function-
tested, then flushed, painted, and corrosion-protected prior to shipment. All external connection
points are sealed and covered with steel plates. The Engine auxiliary module include several pieces
of auxiliary equipment (listed below), and handles the flow of lubricating oil, cooling water and
compressed air to and from the engine. Also the fuel lines go through the module. The Engine
auxiliary module is installed in the front end of the engine with flexible pipe connections.
The Engine auxiliary module includes the following main equipment:

1 Turbo washing unit
1 Lubricating oil heat exchanger
1 Lubricating oil automatic filter
1 Pre lubricating oil pump
1 Lubricating oil thermostatic valve
1 High temperature circuit preheating unit
1 Low temperature thermostatic valve
1 High temperature thermostatic valve
1 Auxiliary module panel
1 Set piping and insulation
1 Set valves and gauges
3.3.3 Power Generation Flow Diagram
The power plant is designed to meet NLDC demand request by short notice. Electrical power will
be generated by 12 units of Wartsila 18V 50 engines with each engine having a capacity of 18.415
MW. There will be 2 engine halls having 6 engines each. There are six boilers connected with DG
set 1 to 6 of engine hall A1. Steam generated from these boilers will run 2 co-generators and

produce 6MW additional electricity. Generally, the Plant will be ready and standby for startup and
synchronization with grid for short notice.
The DECPCL is an HFO based IPP power plant of installed capacity 226.98 MW. However, the
declared capacity of the power plant is 200 MW as per the PPA with the Bangladesh Power
Development Board. Fuel energy will be converted to electrical energy. Engine efficiency will be
43.374 %. Rest of thermal energy will be gone through exhaust gas. By utilizing exhaust gas heat,
steam will be produced with the help of WHRB. Six exhaust gas stream of Engine Hall A1
exchanges heat in the boilers to produce steam. These saturated steams will be used to run turbine
blade which will generate an additional electricity of 6 MW (cogeneration). Generated hot water
will be passed through a cooling tower which will discharge the waste heat to the atmosphere. The
type of heat rejection in a cooling tower is termed "evaporative" which allows a small portion of the
water being cooled to evaporate into a moving air stream to provide significant cooling to the rest of
that water stream. The heat from the water stream transferred to the air stream raises the air's
temperature and its relative humidity to 100%, and this air is discharged to the atmosphere.
Evaporative heat rejection devices such as cooling towers are commonly used to provide
significantly lower water temperatures than achievable with "air cooled" or "dry" heat rejection
devices, like the radiator in a car, thereby achieving more cost-effective and energy efficient
operation of systems in need of cooling. A general flow diagram for power generation and
evacuation is provided in Figure 3-5.
Used lubricating oil from the engine will be stored in a dedicated used oil tank of 30 m3 capacity.
Each engine uses approximately 19 m3 of lubricating oil, 50% of which is replaced at a time when
the properties of the oil crosses certain threshold after continuous operation. The used lube oil from
these engines has been found to be in high demand among the people working in the
transportation, vehicle repair and other informal sectors. In order to ensure that the use lubricating
oil do not end up in the informal sector and used lube oil will be sold to DOE certified vendors who
are expected to handle the used oil in environment friendly manner
A small portion of the produced electricity will be consumed by all electrically operated machinery
and for lighting of the plant. All the systems of the plant will be installed as per the design, drawing
and guide lines by the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) and complying with the Standards
as set by the OEM. The engines are started by High Pressure Air. The carefully designed forced
ventilated Power House will contain the generating units and other auxiliary machinery. All MV
and LV electrical controls will be from the Plant’s Control Room through the MV and LV Switch
Room.
Exhaust gas temperature of engine is 3510C and mass flow will be 117 ton/hour. This huge
temperature will be used for producing steam from six engines of Engine Hall A1. Gas out let
temperature of the boiler is 1960C. Design steam capacity of each boiler is 7000 kg/h and super heat
stem pressure and temperature 1.27 MPa and 3120 C respectively. The specification of WHRB is
given in Annex L-4.
Waste heat power generation system
The thermal system of waste heat power generation system in this project consists of exhaust gas
boilers and corresponding auxiliary machines, de-aerators, feed-water pumps and other equipment.
After the superheated steam through the isolation valve, the main steam valve and the

Figure 3-5: Simplified process flow diagram of DECPCL power plant
control valve into the turbine for expansion work, then discharged to the condenser, exhausted
steam condensates into water in the condenser, and then by the condensate pump to the hot water
tank as an exhaust gas boiler feed-water cycle . Circulating cooling water pump pumps the cooling
water in the pool into the condenser to cool the exhausted steam of steam turbine and then
discharged to the mechanical ventilation cooling tower, the cooled water back to the pool as a
condenser cooling medium recycling.
Design advantages of exhaust gas boiler
Heat resource of the exhaust gas boiler in this project comes from the high temperature flue gas
discharged from the HFO generator sets. The boiler is operated under positive pressure and
requires good sealing. In view of the characteristics of flue gas and operation of the boiler, in order
to improve the heat efficiency of the boiler and make the boiler safe and stable, the following
measures have been adopted in the design of the boiler.
1. Work safe and reliable. Boiler design is widely used vertical flue-type natural circulation
exhaust gas boiler, evaporative heating surface is designed according to the maximum flue
gas parameters, remaining enough allowance to ensure that the flue gas parameters to
ensure that the effects of the flue gas parameters fluctuations are accommodated
2. It adopts H-finned tube structure with expanded heating surface, small size and light
weight.
3. Strong mobility, this type of boiler is with small water capacity and fast start
4. Low operating costs. The exhaust gas boiler only has the feed water pump and no
combustion equipment, therefore the equipment work is reliable and the operation cost is
low.
5. Simple structure, easy manufacture, convenient installation.
6. Gas duct section shape is good. The boiler gas duct section length and width ratio is better
than the general exhaust gas boiler, flue gas fullness, boiler heat uniformity, thermal
deviation small, heating surface erosion complete, which are good for improving the boiler
heat transfer performance, work reliability and reducing the flue gas pressure drop.
7. Modular framework structure to make boiler installation easier and less cost on-site
installation.
8. Super-heater, evaporator, economizer and other major heat pipes of the exhaust gas boiler
are adopted H-finned tube as heat transfer enhancement components to enhance the heat
transfer effect.
9. Boiler wall with metal plate; seal joints of the manhole, wall tube (header) and guard plate
are full sealed design, to ensure that the exhaust gas boiler is not air leakage.
10. Select the appropriate flue gas flow rate, to solve fouling on heating surface of exhaust gas
boiler effectively.
Exhaust gas boiler system
The exhaust gas boiler is vertical and outdoor arrangement, and it is a modular structure, composed
of inlet smoke box, super-heater section, evaporator section, economizer section and an outlet

smoke box and so on 5 parts. The manufacture, transportation and On-site installation of the whole
boiler are very fast and convenient.
Steam turbine
The steam turbine model is N3-1.27/300. This type turbine is the compound quick-assembling set,
single cylinder, LP impulse condensing turbine with the rated power of generator 3000KW. It has
the characteristics of strong packaged performance, small in volume, light in weight, and easy
transportation, which are based on the simple structure, high safety, convenient installation,
operation, disassembly and maintenance. Adapting to the compound quick-assembling, this turbine
satisfies the electricity use demand for forest cutting, mine exploring, military supplying and waste
heat utilization from the cement kiln, etc., especially suitable for the inland electric grid
construction. The turbo set can be operated as an isolated power station, or merged with grid
system. The turbine has the flexible rotor, with critical speed 3554r/min, and the rated speed is
5600r/m, decelerating to 3000r/m by the gear reducer, to driving the generator.
The turbine proper is arranged in a single floor, with the operating floor elevation at zero.
The total length of the turbo set is 4451mm, installed in the turbine house with the span of 10m.
Detail technical specification of the steam turbine is given in Annex-L
The other supporting machineries are HP Air Compressors, Charge Air Filters, Engine Hall
Ventilation Air Filters, Fuel Treatment Plant, Water Treatment Plant, Oily Water Treatment Plant,
Auxiliary Boiler, Auxiliary Diesel Generator etc.
3.3.4 HFO Supply Facility

The fuel supply arrangements will be required to ensure an adequate and reliable supply of fuel.
Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd., will ensure 15 days fuel reserve to operate the plant
at 80% plant factor. The company will construct 4 HFO storage tank to reserve at least 15 days
reserve fuel. The company will collect HFO from international market and local market (if
necessary). The HFO transportation model is shown in Figure 3-6.
HFO Import from Singapore/Global market
Unloaded at Chittagong port by lighterage vessel directly from mother vessel
Inland transportation by river to own Storage tank terminal at Gunrajdi , Chandpur
Unloaded at DECPCL 200MW Chandpur Power Plant
Figure 3-6: HFO Transportation Model
Lighterage vessel having capacity of 800 MT HFO shall carry liquid fuel from Chittagong port to
Chandpur site storage tank.

3.3.5 Power evacuation process
The evacuation of electric power from the proposed power plant will be through 132 kV Chandpur-
Chowmuhoni double circuit line. The proposed power plant will be connected to this 132 kV
Chandpur-Chowmuhoni double circuit line by making LILO ( Line In Line Out) of both of its circuit
to the power station’s 132 KV switchyard by a 132 kV double circuit interconnection lines. These
interconnection lines up to the LILO point including LILO connection will be implemented by the
Company at its own cost. The company will also arrange necessary right of way for constructing
Electrical Interconnection from the power plant to the LILO point. In addition to that the project
company will install, operate and maintain separate 132 kV synchronizing breaker for its machine
at the high voltage side of step-up Transformer and four line breakers including standard bay
equipment for each circuit of the Interconnection LILO line. The Company’s 132 kV bus will be built
at double bus bar architecture including a bus coupler. Space for PGCB for additional
line/transformer bays will have to be kept for future expansion of the 132 kV switchyard by the
company. The evacuation system will be completed in consultation and approval of Power Grid
Company of Bangladesh (PGCB)
After Commercial Operations Date the Company shall hand over the EIF except generator,
switchgear, unit transformer and its associated switchyard, metering and others equipment to
PGCB a no cost. Thereafter, the PGCB shall maintain and operate the EIF including replacement of
equipment (if required) throughout the Term at its own cost and responsibility. The power
evacuation route is shown in Figure 3-7.
Figure 3-7: Power evacuation route of DECPCL

There is no need to acquire land to set up transmission line. Power will be hooked using LILO
system to the existing 132 v kV Chandpur-Chowmuhoni double circuit line. The LILO system will
be constructed inside plant boundary.

3.3.6 Storage Tank
Fuel storage tanks are atmospheric tanks designed according to API 650; the Standard for Welded
Steel Tanks for Oil Storage. As specified there, sufficiently sized vents, filling & draining provisions,
access ladders & manholes provisions are included. In addition, both mechanical & electronic level
indicators/switches, temperature gauges, thermostats & heaters and valves are provided. Tanks are
painted with epoxy primer & 3 layers of polyurethane paints against weathering and they are
electrically grounded to avoid electrical/lightening hazards. All the tanks are surrounded by a
sufficiently sized containment tank to avoid undesired spread of oil which could be happened due
to an accidental oil spillage. The proposed power plant storage tank dimensions and capacities are
given in Table 3-5.
Table 3-5: Dimension of storage tank

Tank No of Tank Diameter Height (m) Capacity
(mili-meter) (M3)
HFO Storage Tank 4 26000 13.6 7000 m3
HFO Day Tank 1 9000 8.7 500 m3
HFO Buffer Tank 2 7750 5.8 250 m3
LFO (HSD) Day Tank 1 6600 6.4 200 m3
Used Lube Oil Storage Tank 1 3600 5.1 30 m3
Fresh Lube Oil Storage Tank 1 3665 5.1 30 m3
Oily Water Buffer Tank 1 5295 6.7 100 m3
Sludge Tank 1 5295 6.7 100 m3
There will be also a horizontal lube oil service tank and a cubic fire water tank (1800 M3) inside the
power plant. Detail design drawing of the power plant tanks are given in Annex O.
3.3.7 Fuel Treatment Plant

Fuel received from supplier may contain water and other solid impurities, which may have
detrimental effect on combustion quality and fuel injection system components. So, it is
imperative that the fuel is properly treated to separate water and sludge before the fuel is fed to the
engine. HFO received from supplier goes through a two-step (three-step) treatment process (1.
Water separated in storage tank, 2. Water separated in buffer tank, 3. Water and sludge separated in
fuel treatment plant) and finally stored in the day tank for engine consumption. The first step takes
place in the fuel storage tank, which are equipped with Suction Heater and decanting facilities. Fuel
in the storage tank is heated and allowed to settle to facilitate separation by gravity where some of
the water and solid impurities accumulate at the tank bottom.
Time to time these accumulated water and sludge are to be drained out from the storage tank
using the drain valves provided for each fuel tank. Remaining suspended solid and water goes to

the buffer tank and then separated by centrifuge. There will be 2 sets of double centrifugal
separators, out of which 2 sets, 1 in working condition and 1 will be in standby mode.
The centrifugal Heavy fuel oil separator units remove water and solids from the Heavy fuel
oil. The separator receives fuel from the buffer tank and sends clean fuel to the day tank. The
separators and auxiliary equipment are built on a steel frame, which forms a compact skid
unit. The Heavy fuel oil separator unit consists of the following equipment:
 Automatic discharge-type separators 2 sets , Capacity each 17 m³/h

 Separator delivery pumps
 Single strainers on pump suction side
 Steam heaters for the heating of heavy fuel oil
 Sludge tank
 Sludge pump
 Local control panels for manual and automatic operation
 Set of interconnection pipes, flanges, seals and valves
3.3.8 Utility Demand

Water and fuel oil and electricity are necessary for this project both at construction and operational
phase. The process need small amount of water as it will maintain 100% water recycle. The
approximate utility demand for the power plant construction and operation are shown in Table 3-6.
Table 3-6: Utility Consumption during Construction and Operational Phases

Construction phase Operational Phase
Utilities Quantity Source Utilities Quantity Source
Water 12 m3/day Deep tube well Water 100 m3/hr Mostly River;
Ground water for potable
purpose only
Electricity 800 REB (Rural Electricity 6 MW/day From own source
KW/day Electric Board)/
National Grid line
HSD 5 HFO 2,78,208 Local/Imported
MT/Month
MT/year
3.4 Civil Construction L/O 0.625 Kg/hr Local
3.4.1 Site Preparation

Site preparation would comprise the partial land filling and compaction of around 28 acres of land.
Prior to construction a 300 mm thick carpet of crushed stone should be spread in the lay-down areas
and on the working surface. All known 42 underground services should be flagged up and all
redundant services coming onto the site should be blanked off and removed.

3.4.2 Piling
The proposed power plant is being founded on piles. The piles could be bored, augured or driven
and the type will depend upon the geotechnical data available. However given the close location of
existing generating plant it is anticipated that the piles will be of a type which could be installed
with the minimum of disturbance to existing equipment. This would imply bored or augured piles
rather than driven types. Design load tests should be made on test piles for design purposes (design
piles). Design piles are normally loaded until the failure of the bearing soil as an aid to the pile
design in similar conditions.
3.4.3 Foundations
Foundations should be designed to British Standard Code of Practice BS 8004 or equivalent
Bangladesh National Building Code. The design of foundations for all structures and equipment are
to be such that differential and total settlements or other movements should not exceed acceptable
limits and ensure safe and maintenance-free operation of the plant.
Detail design parameters for the civil works would be provided by the relevant consultant. The
nature of the fill material and the construction techniques used should be such that the less heavily
loaded equipment and the buildings may be founded on rafts or spread footings.
3.4.4 Roads
The roads should be designed to be capable of carrying all the vehicles likely to be used during
construction and throughout the life of the plant including articulated vehicles and transporters
used for the removal and replacement of major items of the plant. Car parking and hard standing
areas should be of similar construction to the roads. The road pavements should be of reinforced
concrete and in conformity with relevant British or equivalent Bangladesh National Code of
Practice.
3.4.5 Drainage System

It is recommended that the surface water and foul drainage systems should be separate and should
be designed in accordance with BS EN 752 Parts 1 to 4 "Drain and sewer systems outside buildings".
Manhole and chamber covers should be heavy duty throughout.
Surface Water Drainage
The capacity of the surface water drainage system should be sufficient to deal with a storm return
period of 1 in 5 years. The surface water drainage should include all necessary gutters, downpipes,
gullies, traps, catch pits, manholes etc. The quality of the discharge shall be acceptable in all respects
to the local water and environmental authorities.
Foul Water Drainage
All waste drainage should be taken to a septic tank. A septic tank is a long retention time tank
where solids deposit out in an anaerobic bottom layer. A septic tank will be constructed for the
original power station. The Contractor shall satisfy himself that the capacity of the septic tank is
sufficient to cater for the additional load arising from the new power station. The septic tank should

be connected to a soak way by means of an overflow pipe whereby the liquid effluent can be
drained.
3.4.6 Power Station Buildings

The dimension of all the buildings should be such as to provide generous space for the safe
installation and proper operation and maintenance of the plant and its equipment. In particular
generous space should be provided immediately in front of, behind and beside all items of the plant.
It is recommended that the floors should be constructed in reinforced concrete and designed to
accommodate all foreseeable static and dynamic loads. They should be provided with surface finish
appropriate for their intended usage and properly drained bounded areas should be provided
wherever necessary to contain accidental spillage of oil or other harmful liquids. The design of all
buildings must ensure that noise, vibration and temperature levels are within permissible limit.
3.4.7 Sub-station
Transformer compounds should be constructed with oil containment facilities. Compounds should
each be provided with suitable fencing and a lockable access gate. Fences to transformer
compounds and other electrical areas within the site boundary should be of 2.4 m minimum height.
The tank should be fitted with a suitable overflow system, air vents, access hatches, ladders, a sump
and a means of emptying the tank. DECPCL will evacuate power via LILO system to 132 kV
Chandpur-Chowmuhoni double circuit line.
3.4.8 Site Fencing

A security fence will be built 2.1 m high around the permanent boundary of the site. In order to
reduce noise level plantation should be done like green belt along the boundary line of the project
site. The entrance gates should be securely built with steel gates.
3.4.9 Fuel Loading Terminal

All arrangements required for the supply of liquid fuel to the facility including construction of
jetty/pontoon, necessary arrangement, pipe line up to the storage facility, fuel measuring and
testing system, internal fuel supply system, fuel heating and purification/treatment system as per
requirement of the proposed plant will be installed by DECPCL at its own cost and responsibility.
3.4.10 Project Schedule

The project is concern with construction and operation phase. It had designed a 9 months
construction. Operational period designed with 24 hours working of yearly 365 days for 15 years
life time. The tentative project Schedule of Chandpur 200 MW HFO fired power plant is given in
Figure 3-8.

Figure 3-8: Tentative project construction schedule of the proposed power plant at Gunrajdi, Chandpur

3.5 Generation of Pollutants
Solid, liquid and gaseous waste will be generated during operation of the proposed power plant.
Detail of the wastes from the power plant during operation is shown in Table 3-7.
Table 3-7: Type of pollutants
State of waste Source of waste
Solid Sludge from oil treatment unit, waste from kitchen, sanitary, workshop
Liquid Oily water, used water (water for cogeneration, domestic including floor
washing water and gardening), used lube-oil
Gaseous SPM, CO, CO2, SOx, NOx and PM10 emission from engine exhaust stack.
3.6 Pollution Control Mechanism
3.6.1 Waste Water Treatment Plant
Water is recycled 100%. There will be an oily water separator which will trap waste oil from the oily
water. The treated water (with oil and grease concentration <15 ppm) will be drained properly. The
separated oil from the treatment will be given to DoE approved third party who will re-use for
other less quality-demanding use. The oily water system drawing is given in Annex O-22. No waste
water will be discharged in the river. Drained water will be monitored regularly. If discharged
water quality is degraded ETP plant will be set up to treat the water and reuse.
3.6.2 Air Pollution Control

Engine exhaust gas will be dispersed through 50 m stack. Low sulfur fuel is used to minimize air
pollution around the power plant. Green belt will be developed to absorb air pollutant. There is a
provision for FGD (Flue Gas Desulfurizer) in the plant design layout. In future FGD will be set up
to reduce SO2 emission up to 90% from the power plant stack. Detail stack drawings are shown in
Annex O-5.
3.6.3 Solid Waste control

All sewage drainage should be taken to a septic tank. A septic tank is a long retention time tank
where solids deposit out in an anaerobic bottom layer. The capacity of the septic tank is sufficient to
cater for the normal and incidental load arising from the power station. The septic tank should be
connected to a soak way by means of an overflow pipe whereby the liquid effluent can be drained.
3.6.4 Noise control

Noise and vibration from the Project activities will be mitigated through engineering control and
wherever possible high noise equipment will be enclosed in noise-proofed buildings that effectively
contain the noise. Engine hall wall be made by brick wall up to man height and colored sheet for
side wall & roof. The brick wall will be two layered and inside of the wall there will be sound
protected insulation material. The sheet will also be two layered sandwich type and between the
sheets there will sound protected insulation material, so that it attenuate the sound created from the
engine. Silencer will be used to attenuate noise from air intake and exhaust out let. Moreover, well
designed green belt is also developed around the noise sources to absorb sound power. Engine hall
drawing is given in Annex O-4. Project layout along with the green belt is shown in Figure 3-9.
Figure 3-9: Plant layout along with green belt

4 BASELINE ENVIRONMENT
4.1 Introduction
As a part of the environmental assessment of the proposed project, an environmental baseline
survey has been carried out in areas surrounding the proposed location of the 200 MW power plant
of DECPCL.
This section includes the existing environmental baseline status of DECPCL Project study area,
covering both the natural and social environments. The analysis was completed through the use of a
combination of secondary data sources in addition to extensive on-ground reconnaissance and
baseline studies to establish an understanding of the environmental and socio-economic baseline of
the Project area. The likely impacts on the environment based on the actual and foreseeable
events/project activities. For the impact assessment, wherever necessary, professional judgment,
experience and knowledge on similar projects will be used. Data for this chapter were collected
from:
 Secondary Sources: This included data from literature reviews, maps and monitoring
reports;
 Primary Sources: This included gathering information from field surveys, laboratory
analysis and public consultations in the project area.
The baseline condition of environmental quality in the locality of project site serves as the basis for
identification, prediction and evaluation of impacts. The baseline environmental quality is assessed
through field studies within the impact zone for various components of the environment, viz. air,
noise, water, land and socio-economic etc.
Data was collected from secondary sources for the macro-environmental setting like climate
(temperature, rainfall and humidity), physiography, geology etc. Firsthand information have been
collected to record the micro-environmental features within and adjacent to the project area.
Collection of primary information includes extrapolating environmental features on proposed
project design, location and measurement of socio-cultural features adjoining proposed project area.
Ambient air, noise and water quality samples were collected in terms of environment quality to
prepare a baseline database. Consultation was another source of information to explain local
environmental conditions, impacts and suggestions etc.
The following section describes the baseline environment into four broad categories:
 Physical Environment: Geology, Topology, Land-use, Soils, Meteorology and Hydrology;

 Biological Environment: factors related to life such as habitats, aquatic life, fisheries,
terrestrial habitats and flora and fauna;
 Environmental Quality: Air, Water, soil and Noise Quality; and Socio-economic
Environment: anthropological factors like demography, income and infrastructure.
 Socio-economic Environment: anthropological factors like demography, income and
infrastructure.

4.2 Objective and Methodology
The primary objective of the environmental and social baseline condition study is to provide an
environmental and social baseline against which potential impacts from the construction and
operational phases of the Project can be compared.
The methodology adopted for collecting the baseline data was as follows:
 Study area boundary of the proposed project was selected for the baseline studies;
 The environmental and social field monitoring and survey was conducted during September
2017 to October 2017.
 Social base line data collection through house-holds survey, FGD, Stakeholder meeting etc.
 Ambient Air, surface and ground water, soil and sediment sample collection and
Laboratory analysis
 Secondary data was collected from government reports, academic institutes, websites,
published literature, interactions with government department and stakeholders etc.
4.3 Area of Influence (AoI)
The Area of Influence (AoI) of the project comprises of the project site and the surrounding area,
where the influence of the project activities is anticipated. The areas likely to be affected by the
project and its associated activities include:
 The project activities and facilities that are directly owned operated or managed by the
project proponent (including by contractors) and that are components of the project, such as
switchyard, control room and transmission line to power grid sub-stations;
 Impacts from unplanned but predictable developments caused by the project that shall
occur later or at a related location such as increase in traffic on the approach road;
 Impacts on biodiversity or on ecosystem services upon which affected communities’
livelihood are dependent;
Further to this, the AoI with respect to the environmental and social resources was considered
based on the following reach2 of impacts:
Air Quality
 Impact on ambient air quality from vehicle exhaust;

 Impact of air pollutants emission from construction and operational activities
 Dustfall- typically up to 200 m from construction activities.
Noise
Noise impact area (defined as the area over which an increase in environmental noise levels due to
the project can be detected) - typically 500 m from the power plant center and 100 m from the access
road.
2 Distance based on EQMS’s experience with similar project

Water
 Surface water bodies within 1 km of the project footprint

 Groundwater in 1-2 km radius of project footprint
Flora and Fauna (Terrestrial and Aquatic)
 The areas immediately adjacent to the project footprint within which a zone of ecological
disturbance is created through increased dust, human presence and project related activities
(e.g., trampling, water intake/outfall, transportation). This kind of disturbance has been
estimated to occur within the project footprint and surrounding areas of about 500 m to 1
km from the activity areas.
Based on the above the AoI for environmental studies was limited to 5 km from the project site.
Socio-economic/Social
The AoI for social receptors was fixed to include 2 km radial zone which has been developed based
on the reconnaissance site visits and stakeholder consultations with the local community.
The base line map for the EIA study is shown in Figure 4-1.We have considered 5 km AOI for the
proposed power plant construction and operational activities.
Figure 4-1: Baseline Map of the Proposed Power Plant

4.3.1 Key Feature of the Site and Surroundings
The project is located just beside Dakatia River and 1.3 Km from Chandpur District Head Quarter.
The closest main road is about 500 meters from the power plant. This location is suitable for Engine
and Heavy Equipment transportation by river. However, Railway can be used to carry equipment
from Chittagong port. The basic fuel, Heavy furnace oil (HFO) also shall be transported by river.
The proposed power plant project site is fallen low land. The surrounding terrain is a low land
seasonally flooded during rainy season. There is no establishment present in the site. There are two
religious structures (Graveyard) present adjacent to the project boundary. Details of areas
surrounding the proposed project site are as under:
 North: Settlement, School and Dakatia River
 South: Graveyard and few scattered house hold
 East: Fallen land and settlement few scattered house hold
 West: Dakatia River, BPDB Power Plant, settlements
Locations of key features around the project site are presented in Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-2: Location of key feature around the proposed project site

List of important features around the project site is presented in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1: Important features around the power plant
Sl. Name Direction Distance GPS Features/
(meter) Location Remarks
1. Gunrajdi Primary School North-West 23°13'37.57"N

210 90°40'9.84"E EHS
23°13'39.76"N
2. Darjighat Madrasha and Mosque North-West 236 EHS
90°40'10.58"E
23°13'26.36"N
3. Institute of Marine Technology East 465 EHS
90°40'44.02"E
23°13'24.45"N
4. Baitun Noor Mosque, Gachtola East 392 EHS
90°40'40.87"E
Chandpur 150MW Combined Cycle 23°13'20.66"N

5. South-West 225 EHS
Power Plant 90°40'10.21"E
23°13'13.51"N
6. Chandpur 132/33 kV substation South-West 442 EHS
90°40'4.46"E
23°13'20.45"N
7. Mosque at Char Gunrajdi South 120 EHS
90°40'23.46"E
23°13'37.94"N
8. Chandpur Water Treatment Plant North-East 602 EHS
90°40'45.50"E
9. Nurani Mosque, Dakkhin Bisnudi, 23°13'44.94"N

Chandpur North-West 312 EHS
90°40'14.61"E
Inside 23°13'25.82"N
10. Power Hook point South-East project EHS
90°40'28.72"E
boundery
11. Bridge over Dakatia River on 23°13'33.54"N

Chandpur-Faridganj Road East 555 EHS
90°40'47.82"E
Note: EHS- Environmental Hotspots (mosque, madrasa, school, college etc.)

Photographs of power plant’s surrounding features taken during base line study are presented in
the Figure 4-3.
Chandpur-Faridganj Road ( East of the project) Approach Road
Chandpur-Chittagong Railway track Chandpur-Chowmuhoni double circuit grid line
Closest Residential area from the power plant Bridge over Dakatia River(Chandpur-Faridganj Road)

Nurani Mosque, Dakkin Bisnudi, Chandpur Darjighat Madrasha and Mosque
Chandpur 150 MW combined cycle power plant Chandpur 132/33 kV substation
Institute of Marine Technology Water treatment plant Chandpur

Mosque at Char Gunrajdi Bitun Noor Mohammadia Jame Mosque
Dakatia River Cage Fish Firming in Dakatia River
Grave yard Project site

Project site Project site
Figure 4-3: Key features in and around the project site
4.4 Physical Environment

4.4.1 Climate
The climate of Bangladesh is heavily influenced by Asiatic monsoon. The monsoonal influence
results in three distinct seasons:
 Pre-monsoon hot season (from March to May);

 Rainy monsoon season (from June to September); and
 Cool dry winter season (from October to February).
Bangladesh is located in the tropical monsoon region, and its climate is characterized by high
temperature, heavy rainfall, often excessive humidity, and fairly marked seasonal variations. From
a climatic point of view, three distinct seasons can be recognized in Bangladesh - the cool dry season
from November through February, the pre-monsoon hot season from March through May, and the
rainy monsoon season which lasts from June through September. January is the coolest month, with
temperatures averaging near 26°C, and April the warmest, with temperatures from 33 to 36°C. Most
places receive more than 1,525 mm of rain a year, and areas near the hills receive 5,080 mm per year.
Most rains occur during the monsoon (June-September) and little occurs in winter (November-
February). Moderate rains are also reported in the months of March, April and October.
Climatic sub-regions of Bangladesh are presented in Figure 4-4 and as per that, the Chandpur
District falls in the South-central zone. In this zone rainfall is abundant, being above 1,900 mm. The
range of temperature is, as can be expected, much less than to the west, but somewhat more than in
South-eastern zone. This is a transitory zone between the South-eastern, North-western and South-
western zones and most of the severe hail storms, nor'westers and tornadoes are recorded in this
area.

Source: Rashid, Haroun Er, 1991
Figure 4-4: Climatic zones in Bangladesh
4.4.1.1 Temperature
The proposed project site is situated on flat land of South-eastern region of Bangladesh. During the
monsoon, the temperature varies between 26°C to 32°C. The temperature falls below 10°C in winter
which is spread over December and January and may well include November and February.

The highest temperature for the DCEPCL project temperature is felt during April–May period,
when the temperature becomes as high as 33.41°C (observed in May). Variation of maximum, mean
and minimum temperature of Chandpur station (1986 to 2016) is shown in following Figure 4-5.
Monthly Maximum, Average and Minimum Temperature (°C) at Chandpur Station (1986-2016)
40
35
30
25
Temperature (°C)
20
15
10
5
0
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
Maximum 24.54 28.25 31.98 32.30 33.41 32.50 31.70 31.98 32.08 31.78 29.66 26.20
Average 19.02 22.30 26.40 28.09 29.19 29.29 28.88 29.08 29.02 28.14 25.01 20.92
Minimum 13.50 16.35 20.82 23.88 24.98 26.08 26.06 26.19 25.96 24.50 20.37 15.64
Source: Bangladesh Meteorological Department (BMD)

Figure 4-5: Temperature variation at Chandpur Station (1986 to 2016)
4.4.1.2 Relative Humidity

Humidity during the wet season is naturally the highest compared to those occurring at other times
of the year. Humidity is also responsible for the fluctuation of temperature in the region. The
monthly average relative humidity varies from 52% to 90%. Humidity remains high in summer and
comparatively low in winter season. The meteorological data of humidity from 1986 to 2016
indicates that humidity is highest during monsoon (March to May) and monsoon (June to October)
and lowest during the winter season (November to February). Monthly average relative humidity at
the Chandpur station is shown in the following Figure 4-6.
Average Monthly Relative Humidity in % (1986-2016) at Chandpur Station

90
85
Relative Humidity in %
80
75
70
65 JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
Values 78.21 72.1 72.19 76.53 80.04 83.71 85.84 84.78 84.22 82 78.02 79.15
Source: Bangladesh Meteorological Department, Chandpur
Figure 4-6: Average monthly relative humidity in % (1986-2016) at Chandpur Station

4.4.1.3 Rainfall
During the monsoon (June to September), wind direction from the southeast brings moisture laden
air from the Bay of Bengal, when the heaviest rainfall occurs. About 80% of the total rainfall occurs
in this period. From Figure 4-7 we can see highest rainfall occur in month July and lowest rainfall
occur in month December at the period of 1986-2016.
Average of Total Monthly Rainfall in mm (1986-2016) at

Chandpur Station
500
400
300
Rainfall in mm
200
100
0
JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
Values 4.76129 21.5613 48.1613 100.135 251.148 325.619 411.452 324.645 285.2 175.045 43.9032 4.07419
Source: Bangladesh Meteorological Department, Chandpur.
Figure 4-7: Average of total monthly rainfall in mm (1986-2016) at Chandpur Station.
4.4.1.4 Wind speed and Direction

The wind direction in Chandpur meteorological station is generally from North-West to South-East
direction. Average monthly wind speeds were also higher during March, April and June month
with the maximum wind speed of 8.2 m/s recorded during the month of March. From the month of
September to December the wind direction was recorded from north-northwest. During this period
the wind speed shows relatively lower. Monthly wind rose plot is shown in Figure 4-8Error!
Reference source not found.. Seasonal and Annual wind roses are shown in Figure 4-9 and Figure 4-
10.
January February March

April May June
July August September
October November December

Source: Bangladesh Meteorological Department, Dhaka
Figure 4-8: Monthly Wind Rose Diagram, 2016

Pre Monsson Monsoon Post Monsson
Figure 4-9: Seasonal Wind Rose Diagram, 2016
Figure 4-10: Annual Wind Rose diagram at Chandpur, 2016
4.4.2 Geology
The geology profile of Bangladesh is reflective of country’s location, as Bangladesh is riverine
country. The geological evolution of Bangladesh is related to the uplift of to the Himalayan
mountains and outbuilding of deltaic landmass by major River systems having their origin in the
uplifted Himalayas. This geology is mostly characterized by the rapid subsidence and filling of a
basin in which a huge thickness of deltaic sediments were deposited as a mega delta built out and
progressed towards the south. The floodplains of the Ganges, the Brahmaputra (Jamuna) and the
Meghna Rivers cover approximately 40% of Bangladesh.

Source: Geological Survey of Bangladesh, 1990
Figure 4-11: Geology of Bangladesh showing the project area
The geology of Bangladesh can be divided into three distinct regions, each having distinguishing
characteristics of their own:

I. Stable Precambrian Platform in the North-west characterized by limited to moderate
thickness of sedimentary rocks above a Precambrian igneous and metamorphic basement.
II. Geo-Synclinal Basin in the south-east: Characterized by the huge thickness of clastic
sedimentary rocks, mostly sandstone and shale of tertiary age. The basin is further
subdivided into two parts, i.e. fold belt in east and a foredeep to the west. As the intensity of
the folding decreases towards the west, the fold belts unit merges with the foredeep unit,
which is characterized by only mild or no folding. Therefore, the sedimentary layers are
mostly horizontal to sub-horizontal and free from major tectonic deformation in the fore
deep area covering the central part of the basin and this is depressed as River to delta plain
topography of the land.
III. Hinge Zone: A 25 km wide northeast-southwest zone that separates the Precambrian
platform in the northwest from the geosynclinals basin to the southeast. It is also known as
the Ecocene hinge zone.
Geology of the Study Area
The study area falls under two geological zones. The geological map of Bangladesh indicating the
project site is shown in Figure 4-11.The soil type of the project area is Alluvial Silt and 10km study
area is Alluvial silt and clay. Those are describing below:
Alluvial silt and clay- Medium- to dark grey silt to clay; colour is darker as amount of orgnic
material increases. Map unit is a combination of alluvial and paludal deposits; includes flood basin
silt, back swamp silty clay, and organic rich clay in sag ponds and large depressions. Some
depressions contain peat. Large areas underlain by this unit are dry only a few months of the year;
the deeper part of depressions and bils (bhils) contain water through the year.
Alluvial Silt Light to medium grey, fine sandy to clayey silt. Commonly poorly stratified; average
grain size decreases away from main channels. Chiefly deposited flood basins and inter-stream
areas. Unit includes small back swamp deposits and varying amount of thin, interstratified sand,
deposited during episodic or unusually large floods. Little is the most abundant clay mineral. Most
areas are flooded annually.
4.4.3 Topography
Most of Bangladesh is plain land except the hilly regions to the east and northest. The plain land
mainly consists of fluvio-deltaic sediments deposited by the Padma, the Bramaputra (currently
named as Jamuna) and the Meghna River systems. The elevation of the major part of the floodplain
ranges from 3 to 5 meters. As the floodplains approach the Himalayas from the northern part of the
Pabna District the elevation gradually increases.
A digital elevation model (DEM) or 3-D representation of the terrain surface of 10km study radius is
shown in Figure 4-12. The proposed power plant location, its 10-km buffer area as well as the other
linear features are shown in the Relief maps with the height range.
Contour of the study area are generated from the Advanced Space borne Thermal Emission and
Reflection Radiometer (ASTER) relief maps. Topo sheets were not available for the study area and
therefore all the relevant information is extracted from the Shuttle Radar Topography Mission
(SRTM) DEM only. All the processing was done in the ARC GIS 10.1 software.

Contour map derived from DEM shows that the topography of the 10km study area is
predominantly a high terrain with maximum elevation in the northern and southern part on the
bank of project area. The highest elevation levels are 30.22-34 whereas lowest is 0-3.78m. The project
area located relatively plain land region with 7.56-11.33m high (Figure 4-12).
Source: Shuttle Radar Topography Mission (SRTM)
Figure 4-12: Digital Elevation Model of the project area
4.4.4 Physiography
Physiography map of Bangladesh along with project site is shown in Figure 4-13. According to the
physiography of Bangladesh, the proposed project site falls under “Lower Meghna Floodplain”.
The project area of 10 km distance also falls in “Gangas Tidal Floodplain” and Old Meghna
Estuarine Floodplain.
Lower Meghna Floodplain:
Southward from Matlab, the Meghna Rivewr Floodplain comprises mixed alluvium from the
Ganges, young Brahmaputra (Dhaleswari, Sitalakya Channels) and Meghna Rivers. For a few
kilometers inland from the Meghna River, the materials are vary slightly calcareous because of the
admixture of calcareous Ganges alluvium. Further inland, the alluvium is not calcareous and may
have been deposited before the Ganges shifted into its present lower Meghna course in the 1840s.
The latter deposits are similar to old Meghna estuarine deposits, but the soils are younger and are
stratified at a shallow depth. This area is included in agro ecological Region 17.

Source: Modified from SRDI; Rashid, 1991; Reimann, 1993
Figure 4-13: Physiography map of Bangladesh showing the project area
The deposits are mainly olive silt loams and silty clay loams. They occupy a somewhat irregular
ridge and basin relief, but with little difference in elevation between the highest and lowest parts.
Raised cultivation platforms are numerous in the centre-south of the unit. The Meghna River bank
is constantly eroding.
Seasonal flooding formerly was mainly moderately deep over the whole area. In the south, flooding
depth fluctuated with the daily tides. Within the embanked Chandpur Irrigation Project area, most

of the land is now only shallowly flooded in the rainy season, but some basins are occasionally
flooded more deeply by rainwater that cannot be drained quickly enough during spells of heavy
pre-monsoon or monsoon rainfall. Ridge soils in the extreme south show patches which become
slightly saline in the dry season.
Ganges Tidal Floodplain
The Ganges Tidal Floodplain has low relief compared with Ganges River Floodplain. The area is
criss-crossed by innumerable tidal rivers and creeks whose banks generally stand less than a meter
above the adjoining basins. In a transitional zone in the north, the ridges may stand 1-2 meters
higher than the basins. The whole of this unit lies within the cyclone zone.
Under natural conditions, this area was flooded at high tide, either throughout the year or during
the rainy season when rivers entering from the north brought in increased flows. Embankments,
especially in the southwest, have cut off this tidal flooding in places, but basin are flooded by
rainwater which accumulates in the monsoon season. The rivers are saline throughout the year in
the west. In the east, they carry fresh water to the coast during the rainy season, and only become
saline in their lower courses during the dry season. Most of the eastern half of the unit is non-saline
throughout the year, therefor. Tidal and seasonal flooding are mainly shallow, but basin centres in
the north are moderately deeply flooded in the monsoon season.
Old Meghna Estuarine Flood plain
This extensive subunit underlies agroecological Region 19. It occupies and almost level landscape of
smooth, broad ridges and basins which are underlain by deep silty deposits. In some basins, those
silts have been buried by a layer of clay which usually is less than 50 cm thick. This older floodplain
subunit differs from the younger subunits 12a and 12b in generally having deeply developed soils
with well oxidized subsoils, and in having non-calcareous sediments. Although non-calcareous, the
subsurface material generally is neutral to moderately alkaline in reaction. Slight topsoil salinity
occurs pathily in the dry season in some sites near the boundary with Saline Yound Meghna
Estuarine Floodplain.
Seasonal flooding is mainly by accumulated rainwater. It is moderattely deep or deep in the north
and west ( including the areas of the Middle and Lower Meghna River channels), but it is shallow in
the south-east. Only a few rivers such the Gumti, Dakatia and Little Feni cross the subunit ,
bordered by a narrow strip of their own, more variable, leass rectangualar network of
interconnecting man-made canals (khals) which serve both for drainage and for navigation.
However, silting up of the river channels and failure to maintain the khals has increased congestion
of drainage, and a lagre area in the south between Comilla, Hajiganj and Begumganj is now slow to
drain after heavy rainfall or flash floods from the adjoining hills, and remains wet for most or all of
the dry season. It seems probably that, unless artificial drainage is provided, this area will gradually
develop into an area like the Gopalganj-Khulna Bils and will eventually develop peat soils.

4.4.5 Hydrology and Drainage
The hydrological situation of the study area is influenced by connecting khals adjacent to the nearby
the river Meghna. The landscape in this extensive unit is quite different from that on river and tidal
floodplains. The Meghna River is an important river in Bangladesh, one of the three that forms the
Ganges Delta, the largest on earth fanning out to the Bay of Bengal. Being a part of the Surma-
Meghna River System, Meghna is formed inside Bangladesh by the joining of different rivers
originating from the hilly regions of eastern India. When the Padma joins with the Jamuna River,
the largest distributary of the Brahmaputra, and they join with the Meghna in Chandpur District,
the result in Bangladesh is called the Lower Meghna. In its lower reaches this river follows almost a
straight line in its path. Despite its very calm and quiet look, this river is the cause of many deaths
every year. Near Chandpur it is very dangerous. The main sources of surface water irrigation are
rivers, canals, ponds and ditches used for dry season irrigation. Figure 4-14 shows major rivers and
water body around the project area.
Figure 4-14: Drainage map around the project area
Dakatia River:
Dakatia River is one of the trans-boundary Rivers of Bangladesh. It enters the country from India's
Tripura state at Bagsara of Camilla district. It is a tributary of the Meghna. The main source of flow

of this river was the Kakrai, but the Little Feni cuts back and captured its upper portion. The
Dakatia now has its source in Chauddagram Khal, which connects it with the Little Feni. The
Dakatia sends out a channel southward, which forms the Noakhali Khal. The main channel
meanders westward to Shekherhat, from where the old course goes south to join the Meghna at
Raipur, and the new and stronger channel passes through Chandpur Khal to join the Meghna west
of Chandpur town. Total length of the Dakatia is about 207 km. Tidal currents feed the Dakatia
through the Meghna for three-fourths of the year.
Ponds: There are about 150 ponds within 5 km radius centering project site.
Canals: There is a canal from River Dakatia in the south of the project site.
4.4.6 Soil Type

The major part of Bangladesh is on a delta formed by the three major rivers Brahmaputra, Ganges
and Meghna .The majority of soils within Bangladesh are alluvial (rather than colluvial) in origin
and have been deposited over time by the various river networks that drain into the Bay of Bengal.
However, this has not created uniformity of soil types and physio-chemical soil characteristics can
vary considerably based on factors such as age, relief, biological activity, parent material and
anthropogenic influences
In general, most of the soils within the country, particularly those found within alluvial floodplains,
share the following broad characteristics (Brammer, 1996 and Rashid, 1991):
 Moderately fertile to fertile;

 Clay to loam structure (including sandy loams);
 Slightly to moderately acidic; and
 Relatively deep (often around 4 km including underlying shale/sandstone layers)
Another unique characteristic of alluvial soils in Bangladesh is their rapid rate of formation, which
is primarily attributed to the significant deposition of sediments as well as warm, humid climate.
Regarding soil formation, two distinct conditions occur in Bangladesh: alternating seasonal wet or
inundated and dry conditions, as prevalent on most of the floodplain areas and intermittently wet
or moist or dry conditions, as on the upland areas of hills and terraces. This is due to variation of
agro-climatic parameters in different seasons. The soil formation process differs significantly
between floodplain, hill and uplifted terrace. The project site falls under the floodplain ranges.
The SRDI has identified about 500 soil series in Bangladesh and FAO-UNDP has identified 21
different general soil types based on the diagnostic horizons and diagnostic properties of the soil
(FAO-UNDP, 1998). Bangladesh soil map with the project site is shown in Figure 4-15. The study
area can be classified as Calcareous Grey Floodplain soils which are described below.
Calcareous Grey Floodplain soils
They have grey matrix cambic B-horizon and lime in the profiles. They range from silt loam and
silty clay loam on riverbanks and floodplain ridges to silty clays in basins. Soils of this group mainly
occur on the Ganges tidal floodplain in the southwest, also minor areas on the river floodplain of
the Ganges and Lower Meghna. They are Calcaric Gleysols.

Source: BARC
Figure 4-15: Soil map of Bangladesh showing the project area
Soils of Chandpur Sadar Upazila
The project site is situated in Chandpur Sadar Upazila. The major soils are grey to olive, deep,
calcareous silt loam, and silty clay loams and stratified either throughout or at shallow depth.
Calcareous Alluvium and Noncalcareous Grey Floodplain soils are the dominant General Soil
Types. The soils in the south become saline in dry season. Top soils and sub-soils of the area are the
dominant General Soil Types which are slightly alkaline. General fertility is medium but low in
nitrogen and organic matter. Sulphur status is medium to high. It has predominantly deep silty

soils, which are shallowly flooded mainly by the rainwater and occasionally by flash floods from
adjoining hill areas. Silt loam soils are predominant on highlands and silty clay to clay in lowlands
in Old Meghna Estuarine Floodplain region.
4.4.7 Land Use

Land use/cover inventories are an essential component in land resource evaluation and
environmental studies due to the changing nature of land use patterns. The land use study for the
proposed project and its 10 km buffer was undertaken with the following objectives:
 To study the land use/cover in the 10 km radius areas of the proposed DECPCL project site
and provide inputs for environmental planning of the proposed plant by analyzing the
existing land use/land cover scenario; and
 To establish the existing base line scenario using a GIS database for incorporation of
thematic information on the different physical features including water bodies, settlements,
transport networks and administrative boundaries etc.
The evaluation of the existing environmental status of the study area was considered 0-10 km. This
revealed that the land use/land cover consists mainly of agricultural land, settlement with
homestead vegetation and water bodies. Table 4-2 describes the existing land use composition
around 10 km of the project study area.
Table 4-2: Existing Land Use Composition Around 10 km of the Project Study Area
Criteria 10 Km
Area (Acres) Percentage (%)
Agriculture 22025.08 27.31
Brick field 23.71 0.03
Industrial Area 18.14 0.02
Char land 4164.33 5.16
Urban Area 2205.01 2.73
Homestead Vegetation 31208.90 38.70
Water Body 20990.58 26.03
Total Area 80635.74 100
Source: Google earth image analysis
Figure 4-16 shows the Land use/Land cover map shows the land use pattern within 10 km of the
study area.

Source: Google earth
Figure 4-16: Land use/Land cover map shows the land use pattern within 10 Km of the study area
4.5 Natural Hazards

4.5.1 Cyclone and Storm Surges
Chandpur District is known to be extremely vulnerable to natural disasters like cyclone and tidal
surge forming in the Bay of Bengal. As an upazila of this District, Sadar Upazila is also vulnerable to
Cyclones as it happens to many other upazilas along the coast of Bangladesh. Wind speed that hits
the coast during cyclone reaches up to 240 km per hour accompanied by extreme rain and tidal
inundations up to 6 to 7 meters. Since 1684, huge amount of life is lost. Apart from the loss of lives,
there is a high economic loss like properties, settlements; fisheries project, infrastructures, forest and
vegetation, livestock’s etc. are associated with these devastating natural calamities.
People become helpless. Fishermen are lost due to lack or absence or ignorance of weather forecast
and/or for not having lifesaving appliances. Number of cyclone shelters is also inadequate to
accommodate the affected people during cyclones. There is evidence that during 1770 till to date, at
least 25 major cyclones occurred in this belt damaging significant loss of life and properties. At least
70 major cyclones have hit the coastal belt of Bangladesh in the last 200 years. The Cox’s Bazar -
Chittagong coast is the most vulnerable and received 40 % of the cyclones during the last 35 years.
The cyclone affected area normally covers several hundred square kilometres. So, being adjacent to

Chittagong coast, Sadar Upazila became more or less victim during those cyclones. The devastating
cyclone and tidal bore of 29 April 1991 also caused damage to the life and properties of this upazila.
There is major Cyclone has been reported in the project area in recent years or recent past. Cyclone
Strom Tracks area in Bangladesh have been shown in Figure 4-17.
Source: Bangladesh Meteorological Department (BMD)
Figure 4-17: Map showing cyclonic storm tracks of Bangladesh with project area

4.5.2 Tornado
It is the pre-monsoon period when most of the abnormal rainfall or drought conditions frequently
occur in different parts of Bangladesh. Also there are severe local seasonal storms, popularly known
as norwaster (kalbaishakhi). Severe nor ‘westers is generally associated with tornadoes.Tornadoes
are embedded within a mother thundercloud, and moves along the direction of the squall of the
mother storm. The frequency of devastating nor ‘westers usually reach the maximum in April,
while a few occur in May, and the minimum in March. Nor ’westers and tornadoes are more
frequent in the afternoon. Nor ‘westers may occur in late February due to early withdrawal of
winter from Bangladesh. The occasional occurrence of nor ‘westers in early June is due to the delay
in the onset of the southwest monsoon over the region (Karmakar, 1989). List of the nor ‘westers
and tornadoes that hits the study area sites and other areas of Bangladesh is presented in Table 4-3.
Table 4-3: List of Tornadoes had hit the project site and surroundings
Date Location
14th April, 1969 Demra (Dhaka)

17th April, 1973 Manikganj (Dhaka)
10th April, 1974 Faridpur
11th April, 1974 Bogra
9th May, 1976 Narayanganj
1st April, 1977 Faridpur
26th April, 1989 Saturia (Manikganj)
14th May, 1993 Southern Bangladesh
13th May, 1996 Tangail
4th May, 2003 Brahmanbaria
21st March, 2005 Gaibandha
Source: Bangladesh Disaster Knowledge Network and internet
4.5.3 Earthquake and seismic activity

Bangladesh is located on the northeast junction of Indian plate and Eurasian plate, so it will be
affected by the medium to intense seismic activities. It has suffered from the earthquakes above
Grade 7.0 in the past 150 years, and the epicenter is in Bangladesh. The seismic distribution in
Bangladesh is shown in Figure 4-18.

Source: Geological Survey of Bangladesh (GSB)
Figure 4-18: Earthquake Zone with Fault Line Map
As per the Seismic Zoning Map of Bangladesh, the country is divided into three seismic zones. The
northern part of the country that includes the greater districts of Rangpur, Mymensingh, and Sylhet
are in the Zone-I where earthquake shock of maximum intensity of IX of the Modified Mercalli Scale
is possible. The Zone-II includes the greater districts of Dinajpur, Bogra, Dhaka, Narayanganj and
Chittagong and the shocks of intensity of VIII are possible. The southern part of the country, the
least active region, where the maximum intensity is not likely to exceed VII, is in the Zone-III. The
Project site (Chandpur Sadar) falls in the Zone-III area and at minimum risks from earthquakes that
shown in Figure 4-19.

Source: Geological Survey of Bangladesh (GSB)
Figure 4-19: Map showing Earthquake Zones of Bangladesh with project area
4.5.4 Floods
Figure 4-20 shows the flood affected areas of Bangladesh. Due to the geographical location of the
project area is not flood prone.

Data Source: BARC.
Figure 4-20: Flood Map of Bangladesh with project area
The landscape of Sadar has a combination of plain land, lower floodplains, rivers, canals and beels.
Due to huge sediment load from the upstream and river erosion, the river beds and canals of the
upazila are silted up gradually losing their navigation and drainage capacity. It is equally
responsible for losing the water holding capacity of the wetlands. So, during monsoon, when the
Meghna water exceeds the danger level due to excessive rain in the upstream, flood occurs in the
downstream shallow floodplains of the Chandpur District that includes Sadar Upazila. Flood is a

natural seasonal disaster that occurs most often during monsoon. The frequency and magnitude
depends upon many factors like volume and duration of rainfall, flooding in the upstream,
drainage congestion etc. It has also a linkage with the tidal effect from the coast. Flood causes loss of
life and livelihoods and sufferings of the poor people in particular. It also damages the crops,
households and infrastructures. The development activities of the upazila are also affected. The
most devastating floods in this region occurred in the year of 1970, 1971, 1974, 1987, 1988, 1997 and
1998. Tidal flood also have a great impact on white fish, aman seed bed, housing etc.
4.6 Road and River Traffic

The traffic survey was conducted continuously for 24 hours, one time during the study period at
one location beside the project area at Chandpur-Faridganj Road. Vehicular movement has been
counted for both directions in the closest main road from the project. Vehicles were categorized as
heavy vehicle (bus/truck/trailer), medium vehicle (Micro bus/tractor/power tiller), light vehicle
(private car, auto rickshaw, CNG, motor cycle) and non-motorized vehicle (rickshaw, bicycle etc.).
The road traffic survey was conducted from 20 th October 6AM to 21st September, 2017. At the same
period a boat survey on the Dakatia River was conducted. The survey location map is given in
Figure 4-21.
Source: EQMS survey team
Figure 4-21: Location Map of Road and River Traffic Survey

The details of the road and river traffic survey locations are shown in Table 4-4.
Table 4-4: Road and River Traffic monitoring location
SL# Code Monitoring Location Road /River name Date Geographic
Location
1 RT1 In front of Marine Chandpur- 20 -21 23°13'27.41"N
Academy, Faridganj Road September 90°40'45.77"E
2017
2. BT1 Besides Bridge over Dakatia 23°13'29.39"N
Dakatia River 90°40'45.72"E
Source: Field Survey by EQMS Team, October 2017
Road Traffic Status
In the Chandpur- Faridganj road, (500 meter away from project area) total 7935 numbers of vehicles
were moving in 24 hours. During survey period no non-motorized vehicle on the road was
observed. Maximum traffic volume of 601 vehicles in an hour was recorded between 17:00-18:00
PM and minimum traffic volume of 94 vehicles in an hour was recorded between 3:00-4:00 AM.
Vehicular distribution on the road is shown in Figure 4-22.
Distribution of vehicles on Chandpur-Faridganj Road
Van/Pickup/Truck
12%
Motor Cycle Bus/Coach
21% 1%
CNG/Easy Bike
66%
Source: Traffic Survey, conducted by EQMS Team, October 2017

Figure 4-22: Distribution of various types of vehicles on Chandpur-Faridganj Road
Heavy, medium, light and small types of vehicles plying on the highway with a ratio of 1: 12: 66: 21.
Light nad small vehicles are dominating on the road.

Hourly total number of vehicles pass the counting point is shown in Figure 4-23.
Hourly movement of total Vehicles

601
554
527526 526 514 Total Vehicles

491 500 490
404
323
289 296 298
225
192 156172
154 167 145167
124
94
7-8 AM
8-9 AM
6-7AM
1-2 AM
2-3 AM
3-4 AM
4-5 AM
5-6 AM
9-10 AM
10-11 AM
11-12 AM
00-01 AM
12-13 PM
13-14 PM
14-15 PM
15-16 PM
16-17 PM
17-18 PM
18-19 PM
19-20 PM
20-21 PM
21-22 PM
22-23 PM
23-00 PM
Source: Traffic Survey, conducted by EQMS Team, October 2017
Figure 4-23: Hourly vehicular movement on Chandpur-Faridganj Road

It was observed that vehicle movement increased from 5 AM and it was peak at 5-6 PM. Number of
vehicles on the road decreased afer 6 PM and it was minimum at midnight.
River Traffic Status
The boat traffic survey was conducted continuously for 24 hours, one time during the study period.
The boat traffic survey was done for both way movement of vessels and categorized as fishing boat
(motorized), trawler (goods carrying), passenger service boat (large), fishing boat (Non- motorized).
Water vessels distribution on Dakatia River is given in Figure 4-24.
Distribution of vessels on Dakatia River

Fishing Boat
10%Boat
17%
Trawler/Burge
73%
Figure 4-24: Types of water vessels on Dakatia River

Trawler and Burge are dominating on Dakatia River. Total number of vessels recorded at the
Dakatia river traffic monitoring point were 318 . In the river maximum 29 vessels passed during
18.00-19.00 PM and minimum vessels count of 4 nos. was recorded during 07.00-08.00 AM. Hourly
movement of total vessels on Dakatia River is presented in Figure 4-25.
Hourly Dakatia River Traffic

29
Total Number of vessels
21
18 19 18
16 16 17 16 15 15
12 11 12 13
10 10 9 10
7 8 7
4 5
6-7AM
7-8 AM
8-9 AM
9-10 AM
10-11 AM
11-12 AM
12-13 PM
13-14 PM
14-15 PM
15-16 PM
16-17 PM
17-18 PM
18-19 PM
19-20 PM
20-21 PM
21-22 PM
22-23 PM
23-00 PM
00-01 AM
1-2 AM
2-3 AM
3-4 AM
4-5 AM
5-6 AM
Figure 4-25: Hourly vessels movement on Dakatia River, Chandpur
4.7 Environmental Quality

4.7.1 Ambient Air Quality
The objective of the ambient air quality monitoring program was to establish the baseline ambient
air quality in the study area. The profile of the study area is mixed, which has mix of scattered
settlements, industry, and agriculture areas. The source of air pollution in and around the project
area are engine boat, industry( power plant), brick kilns, vehicles, construction dust and windblown
dust from agricultural lands, domestic heating and cooking. The air quality monitoring locations
were selected based on the locations of settlements and receptors within the study area. Logistical
factors such as consent of villagers, mainly the house owners, power connection, accessibility,
security, etc. were also taken into account in finalizing the monitoring stations.
Methodology
The existing ambient air quality of the study area was monitored at four (4) locations during the
monitoring period (October 2017). The monitoring parameters included Particulate Matter (PM10
and PM2.5), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx), and Carbon Monoxide (CO). All the
parameters except CO were monitored on 24-hourly basis twice a week during the duration of the
study. CO was monitored as eight-hourly average.

Selection of Sampling Locations
The baseline status of the ambient air quality has been established through a scientifically designed
ambient air quality monitoring network. The ambient air quality monitoring locations were based
on the following aspects covered in field survey plan developed prior to the field work.
 Meteorological conditions of the area based on information of BMD observatory at

Chandpur ;
 Topography of the study area; and
 Location of sensitive receptors such as major settlements;
The particulate and gaseous samples collected during the monitoring have been analyzed as per the
procedures specified in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5: Methodology for Analysis of Ambient Air Quality

Sl. Parameter Analysis procedure
1. PM10 Gravimetric method
2. PM2.5 Gravimetric method
3. Colorimetric method at 560nm using spectrophotometer (West-Gaeke
SO2 method)
4. Colorimetric method at 540 nm using spectrophotometer (Jacob and
NOx
Hochheiser method)
5. CO Digital CO meter
Air Quality Monitoring Location

The geographical locations and setting of the ambient air quality monitoring locations are presented
in Table 4-6 . The monitoring points are shown in Figure 4-26.
Table 4-6: Ambient Air Quality Sampling Locations
Sl. Station Geographic Location Setting Distance from
Sampling Station
Code Location Project Boundary
1. Inside project site AQ1 23°13'32.54"N Industrial Area Project site
90°40'24.53"E
2. In Front of BPDB AQ2 23°13'14.51"N West side of the project; 560 meter
150 MW Combined 90°40'2.54"E closest residential area
Cycle Power Plant receptor’s area
3. Besides Chandpur- 23°13'54.06"N North-East side of the project; 872 meter
Faridganj Road AQ3 90°40'46.91"E closest residential area
receptor’s area
4. Besides Chandpur North-West side of the project 752 meter
23°13'53.01"N
Stadium AQ4 90°40'0.48"E Commercial area

Figure 4-26: Ambient Air and Noise Level Monitoring Location
Pictures taken during air quality monitoring are shown in Figure 4-27.
AQ1 (Project Site) AQ2 (In front of BPDB power plant)

AQ3 (Besides Chandpur-Faridganj Road) AQ4 (Besides Chandpur Stadium)
Figure 4-27: Photographs of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

Monitoring Results
Air samples collected during field monitoring are analyzed in EQMS Laboratory following standard
procedures. At the time of sampling weather condition is stable. Wind speed was low. Analytical
results from the air samples test are given in Table 4-7.
Table 4-7: Ambient Air Quality in the Study Area
Sl. Station Sampling Ambient air pollution concentration in µg/m3
Code Date PM2.5 µg/m3 PM10 µg/m3 SO2 µg/m3 NOx µg/m3 CO* ppm
11.10.2017 25.82 58.65 5.50 16.52 <2
1. AQ1 15.10.2017 20.45 54.32 6.80 18.91 <2
Average 23.14 56.49 6.15 17.72 <2
12.10.2017 16.50 42.31 6.90 28.65 <2
2. AQ2 16.10.2017 19.42 51.42 7.25 35.32 <2
Average 17.96 46.87 7.08 31.99 <2
13.10.2017 14.82 38.45 7.10 15.60 <2
3. AQ3 17.10.2017 18.95 48.12 5.90 18.45 <2
Average 16.89 43.29 6.50 17.03 <2
14.10.2017 15.40 36.72 6.56 16.17 <2
4. AQ4 18.10.2017 20.90 42.85 7.48 13.85 <2
Average 18.15 39.79 7.02 15.01 <2
Standards
24 hourly 65 150 365 - 9
Bangladesh**
Annual 15 50 80 100 -
24 hourly 25 50 - - 9
WHO***
Annual 10 20 20 40 -
*CO concentrations and standards are 8-hourly only.
**The Bangladesh National Ambient Air Quality Standards have been taken from the Environmental Conservation Rules,
1997 which was amended on 19th July 2005 vide S.R.O. No. 220-Law/2005.
**WHO Ambient Air Quality Guideline Values (2005 and 2000), which are also being referred in the World Bank and IFC’s
General EHS Guidelines (2007)

Discussion
PM2.5
PM2.5 was monitored 24 hours two times. The maximum concentrations were 25.82, 19.42, 18.95
and 20.90 µg/m3 in the four locations respectively. All the results are within the 24-hourly National
Ambient Air Quality Standard (NAAQS) of Bangladesh.
PM10
Maximum PM10 levels in four monitoring locations were 58.65, 51.42, 48.12 and 42.85 respectively.
These values are within Bangladesh ambient air quality guideline value.
SO2
Average SO2 concentrations in the monitoring locations are 6.15, 7.08, 6.50 and 7.02 µg/m3
respectively .These concentrations are well below the national ambient SO 2 permissible limit for
Bangladesh.
NOx
Maximum NOx level found in the four locations are 18.91, 35.32, 18.45 and 16.17 µg/m3
respectively. DOE has set guideline value for ambient NOx level for annual averaging time. Annual
NOx standard is 100µg/m3 as per DOE. As per World Health Organization (WHO) the annual
permissible limit for NOx is 40µg/m3. The monitoring NOx levels are within these standard values.
CO
Monitoring level of CO in ambient air at four locations are less than 2 ppm which is well below the
national ambient air quality standard for CO.
4.7.2 Ambient Noise Quality

Noise levels were recorded at eight (8) locations in the study area during the monitoring period
(October 2017). Noise levels were recorded in the form of sound pressure levels with the help of a
digital sound level meter. The details of noise monitoring locations are given in Table 4-8.
The purpose of ambient noise level measurement was to determine sound intensity at the
monitoring locations. These locations are chosen in such a way that a representative data could be
recorded all over the project site. The sound level is recorded in form of A-weighted equivalent
continuous sound pressure level values (Leq) with the use of A-weighting filter in the noise
measuring instrument. Noise monitoring points are shown in Figure 4-26.
Table 4-8: Details of Ambient Noise Monitoring Locations

Sl. Code Location Geographic location
Location setting
23°13'33.63"N
1.
NL1 Project Site
90°40'23.93"E Mixed
2.
In front of Dilo Tohsilder’s House Char
Gunrajdi Village. 23°13'30.32"N
NL2 Residential
90°40'31.41"E

Sl. Code Location Geographic location
Location setting
23°13'26.41"N
3.
NL3 In front of Marine Academy
90°40'44.52"E Silent
4.
In front of Dulal Patwari’s house,
Gunrajdi 23°13'21.04"N
NL4 Residential
90°40'29.28"E
23°13'22.29"N
5.
NL5 In front of BPDB Power Plant
90°40'8.04"E Industrial
23°13'36.29"N
6.
NL6 In front of Gunrajdi Primary School
90°40'10.64"E Silent
23°13'40.73"N
7.
NL7 Beside Dorjibari Ghat Rail line
90°40'10.20"E Mixed
23°13'50.54"N
8.
NL8 In front of Chandpur Stadium
90°40'0.88"E Commercial
Pictures taken during noise monitoring in and around project site are shown in Figure 4-28
NL1 NL2
NL3 NL4

NL5 NL6
NL7 NL8
Figure 4-28: Pictures taken during noise monitoring in and around project site
Noise monitoring results are shown in Table 4-9 below.
Table 4-9: Noise Level Parameter in and around the Proposed Site
Location Average Noise level (dB(A)) Location Applicable World Bank
setting Standard * Standard**
(dB(A)) (dB(A))
Leqday Leqnight Lmax Lmin Day Night Day Night

NL1 54.7 43.8 58.9 41.1 Mixed 60 50 -- --
NL2 54.8 42.1 57.5 40.8 Residential 55 45 55 45
NL3 53.8 42.9 59.9 41.5 Silent 50 40 -- --
NL4 51.4 41.8 56.8 39.2 Residential 55 45 55 45
NL5 53.6 44.6 57.4 40.7 Industrial 75 70 70 70
NL6 53.3 43.7 58.0 39.6 Silent 50 40 -- --
NL7 53.5 44.2 61.2 42.7 Mixed 60 50 -- --
NL8 65.3 58.6 72.3 53.2 Commercial 70 60 -- --
Source: Field Survey by EQMS, October, 2017
**IFC/ World Bank, Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines
The project area falls into industrial zone according to Bangladesh Environmental Quality Standard
ECR’97 categorization. Although NL3 and NL6 receptor point falls under silent zone criteria, noise

level exceed few decibel than standard value. Noise level at NL3 increases due to river traffic and
some construction activities around the place. NL6 receptor is close to the Chandpur-Faridganj
road. Therefore, excess noise is added from vehicular movement in the main road.
4.7.3 Water Quality

It is essential to know present status of surface and ground water quality prior to set up a power
plant. As power plant need to use ground and surface water as per availability. Many design
parameters are influenced by water quality data. Water contamination during construction and
operation of power plant is determined on the basis of baseline water quality data. EQMS team has
collected two ground water and two surface water samples as reprehensive source of water in the
study area. The samples were analyzed for parameters covering physio-chemical characteristics
which include certain heavy metals and trace elements. For water sampling there had two types of
analysis such as on-site test and lab-analysis. For lab analysis water samples were collected as grab
water sample in a pre-washed 1-litre plastic bottle for complete physio-chemical tests.
The samples were analyzed as per standard procedure/method given in Standard Method for
Examination of Water and Waste water Edition 20, published by APHA. Water quality parameters
are checked against Environment Conservation Rules (ECR), 1997-Schedule 3 (a) and ECR-
Shcedule-3 (b). Details of the analysis method and protocol are presented in Table 4-10.
Table 4-10: Methods of Water Analysis

SL Parameter Method Protocol
1. Temperature (°C) Digital thermometer
2. Turbidity Turbidity meter APHA., 2130 B
3. Total Dissolved Solids (mg/l) Digital TDS meter
4. Conductivity (µmhos/cm) Conductivity meter APHA., 2510 B
5. Dissolved Oxygen (mg/l) Digital DO meter
6. pH Digital pH meter APHA., 4500 H+ B
7. Salinity Digital Salinity Meter APHA., 2520 B
8. Chemical Oxygen Demand(COD) CRM APHA., 5210 B
9. Iron(Fe) (mg/l) AAS APHA 3113 B
10. Cadmium (Cd) (mg/l) AAS APHA-3500-Cd (B)
11. Arsenic (As) (mg/l) AAS APHA 3500(B)
12. Manganese(Mn) AAS APHA 3113 B
13. Nitrogen(Nitrate) AAS APHA.,4110 B
14. Nitrogen(Nitrite) UVS APHA.,4110 B
15. Phosphate UVS APHA 4500-P.C
16. Total Suspended Solid Gravity Multi-meter ---
17. Oil & Grease Purge Trap GC APHA., 5220 B
18. Biochemical Oxygen Demand 5 days incubation APHA., 5210 B
The quality of surface water was compared with the standards for Inland Surface Water,
Environment Conservation Rules (ECR), 1997-Schedule 3 (a) whereas the groundwater was
compared with the Drinking Water Standard ECR-Schedule-3 (b), 1997. The standards have been
presented along with the monitoring results of surface and groundwater for comparison.

4.7.3.1 Surface Water Quality
Main water body around the project site is Dakatia River. Two surface water samples were collected
from the River. Sampling locations of surface water are presented in Table 4-11 below.
Table 4-11: Surface water sampling locations in Dakatia River near project site.
Sl. no Sampling dateGeographic Type of Source
Sampling location Sampling Code location
1 Surface Water
Collection at Upstream 23°13'38.67"N
SW1 10.12.2017 90°40'28.66"E
2 Surface Water River
Collection at 23°13'19.98"N
SW2 10.12.2017 90°40'18.62"E
Sampling locations of surface and ground water is shown in Figure 4-29 below.
Figure 4-29: Surface and Ground Water sampling location
Pictures taken during sampling and on field testing are shown in Figure 4-30.

SW1 (Upstream Dakatia River) SW2 (Downstream Dakatia River)
On-site pH test of surface water On-site salinity test of surface water

Figure 4-30: Photographs taken during surface water sampling and on-site test
Analytical results from surface water sampling test are presented in Table 4-12 along with GoB
standards for surface water (ECR, 1997).
Table 4-12: Surface Water Quality of Dakatia River
Sl. No Parameters Unit Sampling Location
SW1 SW2
1 pH - 6.8 6.9
2 EC µmhos/ cm 120 110
3 DO mg/l 7.3 7.1

4 Temperature ºC 31.1 31.1
5 TDS mg/l 75 82
6 TSS mg/L 15 14
7 Salinity ppt 0.04 0.06
8 Nitrate mg/l 1 2.3
9 Nitrite mg/l 2 1
10 BOD 5 mg/l 1 1

Sl. No Parameters Unit Sampling Location
SW1 SW2
11 COD mg/l 4 4
12 Manganese mg/l BDL BDL
13 Phosphate mg/l 0.06 0.07
14 Iron mg/l 0.25 0.46
15 Turbidity (NTU) 3.4 4.1
16 Oil and Grease mg/l 0.003 0.005
17 Cadmium mg/l 0.0002 0.0001
18 Lead mg/l BDL BDL
19 Mercury mg/l BDL BDL
20 Chromium mg/l BDL BDL
Source: DPHE Laboratory Analysis and on field test data
Table 4-13 shows the standard values of some surface water quality parameters as per the ECR,
1997.
Table 4-13: Standard values for inland surface water

Parameter
pH BOD5 DO Total
Sl. No Best Practice based classification
Coliform
number/100
Source of drinking water for 2 or less 6 or above 50 or less

1
supply only after disinfecting recreational 6.5 - 8.5
Water usable for

2 6.5 – 8.5 3 or less 5 or more 200 or less
activity
Source of drinking water

3 for supply after 6.5 – 8.5 6 or less 6 or more 5000 or less
conventional treatment
4 Water usable by fisheries 6.5 – 8.5 6 or less 5 or more ---

Water usable by various
5 process and cooling 6.5 – 8.5 10 or less 5 or more 5000 or less
industries
6 Water usable for irrigation 6.5 – 8.5 10 or less 5 or more 1000 or less
Some of the surface water quality parameters are discussed below.
pH
pH level in the two surface water samples are found 6.8 and 6.9 which is within the standard value
as per ECR 1997.

Dissolved Oxygen (DO)
Samples are collected from upstream and downstream of the Dakatia River. DO in SW1 and SW2
sampling points are 7.3 and 7.1 mg/l respectively. There is sufficient DO in the river for survival of
fish species.
Biological Oxygen Demand (BOD)
The BOD concentrations of the surface water are less than 2mg/l. The values are within permissible
limit as per 1997 Bangladesh environmental conservation rules.
Total Suspended Solids (TSS)
TSS found within the limiting value of Bangladesh surface water standard.
4.7.3.2 Ground Water Quality

Two ground water samples were collected during the EIA field survey. Table 4-13 represents the
sampling location of ground water in and around project site.
Table 4-14: Ground Water Collection point
Sl. Sampling location Depth Sampling Sampling Geographic Type of

Code Date location Source
1. Project area 50 ft GW1 10.10.2017 23°13'34.07"N Tube Well
90°40'24.55"E
2. Infront of Dilo 40 ft GW2 10.10.2017 23°37'50.1"N Tube Well
Tashilder’s House, 90°35'49.1"E
Char Gunrajdi
Pictures captured during ground water sampling and on field test are shown in Figure 4-31.
GW 1 (project site) GW 2 (Infront of Dilo Tashilder’s House)

On-site pH test of ground water On-site DO test of ground water
Figure 4-31: Photographs taken during ground water sampling and on-site test
Analytical results from groundwater sampling test are presented in Table 4-15 along with GoB
standards for drinking water (ECR, 1997).
Table 4-15: Ground water analysis result
Sl Parameters Unit Sampling code Bangladesh
No Standard*
GW1 GW2
1. pH - 6.58 6.52 6.5-8.5
2. Temperature °C 27.5 27.8 20-30 °C
3. Salinity ppt 0.06 0.03 -
4. Turbidity NTU 4.1 3.4 10
5. Chloride (Cl-) mg/l 163.68 145.37 150-600 mg/l
6. Iron (Fe) mg/l 3.42 5.35 0.3-1.0 mg/l
7. Chemical Organic Demand (COD) mg/l 2.6 2 4
8. Biological Oxygen Demand (BOD) mg/l < 0.2 < 0.2 0.2
9. Total Dissolved Solid(TDS) ppt 1.84 1.82 1
10. Total Suspended Solids (TSS) mg/l 18 15 -
11. EC µmhos/cm 367 240 -
12. DO mg/l 4.1 4.3 6
13. Total Coliform n/100 ml 0 0 0
14. Potassium mg/l 4 3.6 12
15. Phosphate mg/l 0.18 0.27 6.0
16. Nitrate mg/l 10 15.8 10
17. Nitrite mg/l 7 5 <1
18. Manganese(Mn) mg/l 0.19 0.21 0.1
19. Lead mg/l BDL BDL 0.05
20. Mercury mg/l BDL BDL 0.001
21. Cadmium mg/l 0.001 0.003 0.005
Source: DPHE and EQMS Laboratory Analysis and on field test data
*Environmental Conservation Rules 1997; SCHEDULE – 3; Standards for Water; (B) Standards for drinking water

Some parameters in groundwater are discussed below, compared with the Bangladesh ECR
Standards for drinking water.
pH
The pH of two samples is 6.58 and 6.52 which is within the Bangladesh standard range of 6.5 to 8.5.
Total Dissolved Solid (TDS)
The TDS concentrations of the samples are 1.84 and 1.82 ppt which is above the Bangladesh
Standard (ECR’97) 1 ppt.
Biological Oxygen Demand (BOD)
The BOD concentrations of the surface water are less than 2mg/l. The values are within permissible
limit as per 1997 Bangladesh environmental conservation rules.
4.7.4 Soil and Sediment Quality

Sampling Method and Locations
The soil and sediment sampling strategy was designed to assess the existing soil and sediment
quality over the study area. Two soil samples were collected from in and around the project site.
Two sediment samples were collected from River Dakatia near the project site. A composite
sampling technique was used for soil and sediment sampling from each location. The sampling
details are presented in Table 4-16.
Table 4-16: Details of Soil and Sediment sampling locations
Sampling CodeSampling date Geographic location

Sl. Sampling location Land use
11.10.2017 23°13'33.97"N Agricultural

1. Project site SQ1 90°40'18.56"E field
2. In front of Dilo Toshilder’s
House Residential
11.10.2017 23°13'28.25"N
SQ2 90°40'30.57"E area
3. Dakatia River (west side of
the project)
12.10.2017 23°13'3.98"N Water body-
4. Dakatia River ( North side of SD1 90°40'26.97"E River
the Project)
12.10.2017 23°13'39.43"N Water body-
SD2 90°40'21.48"E River
Locations of soil and sediment sampling are shown in Figure 4-32.

Source: Field Survey by EQMS, October, 2017
Figure 4-32: Sampling Location Map for Soil and Sediment

Soil samples were collected using tools from a depth of 45 cm from the top soil surface. At each
location, soil samples were collected from three spots and homogenized. The homogenized samples
were collecting following quartering technique and then packed in polythene plastic jars and
sealed. The sealed samples were sent to the laboratory for analysis. Soil sampling pictures are
shown in Figure 4-33.
SQ1(project Site) SQ2 (In front of Dilo Toshilder’s House)

Figure 4-33: Soil Sampling in and around project site

Sediment samples were collected using a sediment sampler from the Dakatia River. At each
location, sediment samples were collected from two spots and homogenized. Care was taken to
minimize the surface disturbance to the sediments. The homogenized samples were then packed in
polythene plastic bags, sealed and sent to the laboratory for analysis.
The soil and sediment samples were analyzed for physical and chemical characteristics including
minerals, heavy metals and trace elements.
Analysis Results and Discussions
The analysis results of physio-chemical parameters of soil and sediment samples are presented in
Table 4-17.
Table 4-17: Soil and Sediment Quality Analysis Result
Concen tration
Parameter Unit
SQ1 SQ2 SD1 SD2
pH - 6.1 5.9 6.6 6.3
Copper (Cu) mg/kg 6.1 5.1 11.2 10.3
Manganese (Mn) mg/kg 3.7 3.7 6.3 6.8
Zinc (Zn) mg/kg 4.5 4.9 48.3 43.4
Lead (Pb) mg/kg 15.2 8.9 10.3 12.6
Iron (I) mg/kg 53.15 53.30 75.6 83.2
Arsenic (As) mg/kg 0.42 0.48 0.58 0.62
(Source: Laboratory Analysis, SRDI, Dhaka,, Sampling Date: 11th to 12th October, 2017) and Analysis date: 10 th
November-20th November, 2017)
In the Environmental Conservation Rules (ECR), 1997 has no soil and quality standard. So, the soil
quality in the study area are compared with the heavy metal content standard of USEPA office of
solid waste and emergency response, hazardous waste land treatment (Table 4-18)
Table 4-18: Heavy Metal Contents of the Natural Soil
Element Symbol Common Range Average Concentration
(µg/g) (µg/g)
Arsenic As 1-50 5
Copper Cu 2-100 30
Lead Pb 2-200 10
Mercury Hg 0.01-0.3 0.03
Zinc Zn 100-300 50
Source: USEPA office of solid waste and emergency response, hazardous waste land treatment, SW-874 (April 1983, page 273)
Both baseline soil and sediment qualities were observed to be well below the threshold limit
compared with the USEPA standard of heavy metal content in soil.
4.8 Biological Environment

4.8.1 Biodiversity of the Study Area
Biodiversity is the variety of plant and animal life in the world or in a particular habitat, a high level
of which is usually considered to be important and desirable. The biodiversity component of the
study, focused on a few groups of biological components comprising of flora (trees, herbs, shrubs,
climbers) and fauna (birds, reptiles, amphibians, mammals, Butterflies, Fisheries) as well as the

surrounding ecosystems. The overall objective of this study is to establish the baseline data for flora
and fauna of study area. A multidisciplinary team related to ecology (terrestrial & aquatic) has been
engaged in order to conduct the study profoundly.
The survey was conducted with following objectives:
 Enumeration of terrestrial and aquatic floral and faunal species within the study area.
 Identification of floral and faunal species with conservational significance.
 To develop the ecological mitigation and management plan.
4.8.2 Bio-Ecological Zone

As per IUCN classification based on physiographic and biological diversity the study area falls
under Meghna Floodplain (4e)’. Basic information on the project site bio-ecological zone is
summarized in Table 4-19 .
Table 4-19: Information on Project site Bio-ecological Zone
Features Information
Location: 22050’-24025’ N and 90040’-91037’ E
Relevant Administrative HQ: Feni, Lakshimpur, Chandpur, Comilla, Brahmanbaria
Physiography: Middle Meghna floodplain and Lower Meghna river floodplain
Soil: Noncalcareous dark gray floodplain soils; Noncalcareous gray floodplain,soils,
Calcareous dark gray and gray floodplain soils
Rainfall: 2030-2290 mm
Temperature: Maximum 330C, Minimum 100C
Flooding Depth: ML-L
Land use: Boro-Fallow-T.aman (4a); Rabi-T.aus-T. aman (2a); Rabi-Mixed B. aus & aman.
Floral diversity Planted trees
Kanthal (Artocarpus heterophyllus), Aam (Mangifera indica), Narikel (Cocos nucifera),
Supari (Areca catechu)
Trees near water
Debdaru (Polyalthia longifolia), Rain Tree (Samanea saman), Gora Neem (Melia
azaderach), Barun (Crataeva nurvala), Pitali (Trewia nudiflora)
Aquatic Plants
Kachuripana (Eichhornia crassipes), Makhna (Euryale ferox), Sada Sapla (Nymphaea
nouchali), Bara nukha (Monochoria hastat)
Mammals
Faunal Diversity
Thick-eared bat (Eptesicus pachyotis), Rhesus macaque (Macca mulatta), Common tree
shrew (Tuphaia glis), Small Indian civet (Viverricula indica)
Birds
Gray nightjar (Caprimulgus indicus), River lapwing (Vanellus duvaucelii), Black-
shouldered kite (Elanus caeruleus), Cattle egret (Bubulcus ibis), Black kite (Milvus
migrans)
Reptiles
Brahminy river turtle (Hardella thurjii), Dark-bellied marsh snake (Xenochrophis
cerasogaster), Slender worm snake (Typhlops porrectus).
Amphibians
Large tree frog (Rhacophorus maximus), Boulengers frog (Rana alticola), Red
microhylid (Microhyla rubra), Ornate microhylid (Microhyla ornate).
Source: Atlas of Bio-ecological Zones of Bangladesh

The Bio-Ecological Zone of Bangladesh and the study area is shown in Figure 4-34.
Figure 4-34: Bio-Ecological Zone of Bangladesh and Project Location
4.8.3 Biodiversity of Flora

The floral species are broadly categorized in the following two categories
I. Terrestrial Flora
II. Aquatic flora

4.8.3.1 Terrestrial Flora
Methodology for terrestrial flora survey
The Primary data collection of different components of the study area conducted by using well
established and accepted ecological methods in the different habitats. Ecological surveys were
undertaken in September 2017 in the study area of Desh HFO power plant at Chandpur Sadar,
Chandpur. Quadrate sampling method has been used for the counting the vegetation structure in
and around the study area. A quadrat is a frame that is laid down to mark out a specific area of the
community to be sampled. Within the quadrat frame, the occurrence of plants is recorded using an
appropriate measure of abundance. The quadrat method can be used in virtually any vegetation
type to quantify the plant community. There were no any floral and faunal diversity inside the
project area that’s why the ecology team has been considered the 5km radius of the study area. A
total four quadrates study in all four directions from the project boundary has taken out of different
floral aspects. The ecology team has counted the different floral species in the study area. The
Quadrates study sites have been provided in the Table 4-20.
Table 4-20: Quadrates location
Area Quadrates GPS coordinates

584 m from the project location in Western 23°13'28.07"N
direction Q1
90°40'6.33"E
602 m from the project location in the Western 23°13'46.70"N
direction Q2
90°40'19.02"E
481 m from the project location in North 23°13'14.65"N
Eastern direction Q3
90°40'13.42"E
23°13'40.24"N
890 m from the project in western direction Q4
90°40'56.75"E
The field data collection was mainly included on biodiversity assessment of different life of floral
elements such as trees, shrubs, climbers, herbs and grasses.
Terrestrial Floral Analysis
In its adjoining area’s (study area) terrestrial flora were divided into three categories.
a. Agricultural or crop field vegetation
b. Homestead Plantation
a. Agricultural or crop field vegetation
Crop field vegetation is a major type vegetation of the study area. A big portion of crop fields is
inundated in rainy season. The most common agricultural crops cultivated in the study area are
Jute, Aus (Local), Aus (HYV), Broadcast Aman (Local), L.T. Aman, Aman (HYV), Local Boro, HYV
Boro, Hybrid Boro, Wheat, Maize, Cheena & Kaon, Lentil (Masur), Pea (Motor), Green Gram (Mug),
Black Gram (Mashkalai), Keshari, Sesame, Mustard, Groundnut, Soya bean, Chili, Onion, Garlic,
Turmeric, Ginger, Coriander, Sugarcane, Date-Palm, Cotton, Betelnut and so on. Local inhabitant

plant Dhaincha (Sesbania rostrata) at the end of Boro harvesting and this species is commonly
found in most of the area.
Some of the most common weed species (other than planted crops) within the study area are
provided in Table 4-21.
Table 4-21: Weed Species in the study area
SL No. Scientific Name Family Local Name
1. Cynodon dactylon Gramineae Durba
2. Ageratum conyzoides Compositae Fulkuri
3. Dentella repens Rubiaceae Hachuti
4. Heliotropium indicum Boraginaceae Hatisur
5. Cotula hemispherica Compositae Kancha ghash
6. Cyperus cephalotes Cyperaceae Niratraba
7. Alternanthera sessilis Amaranthaceae Sachishak
b. Homestead Plantation
A total of 34 homestead species of 21 Families were listed from the site. Majority of the family
belongs to the family of Arecaceae, Fabaceae and Myrtaceae. Moreover, among the resulted species
the Trees are 82%, Shrub 12%, Herb 3% and Grass 3%.
GrassHerbShrubTree
3% 3%
12%
82%
Figure 4-35: Types of homestead tree species
Common planted tree species are Aam (Mangifera indica), Supari (Areca catechu), Mehogani
(Swietenia mahagoni), Kola (Musa sp), Guava (Psidium guajava) etc. Raintree (Samanea saman), Narikel
(Cocos nucifera) and Supari (Areca catechu) occupied the top canopy. Homesteads are commonly
found near the plain land which favors healthy growth of the plant. Among the shrubs Lemon
(Citrus sp.) is the most common of all species. Homestead flora consists of both native and exotic
species (Acacia auriculiformis) and some of them are naturalized. Homestead plantation species are
listed in the Table 4-22.

Table 4-22: Available homestead floral species within the study area
SL# Local Name Common Scientific name Family Types Uses
name
1. Amrah Kurz Spondias pinnata Anacardiaceae Tree Fruit
2. Amloki Aonla Phyllanthus embelica Euphorbiaceae Tree Fruit
3. Baroi/Kul Jujube Zizyphus mauritiana Rhamnaceae Tree Fruit
4. Kamranga Carambola Averrhoa carambola Averrhoaceae Tree Fruit
5. Kanthal Jackfruit Artocarpus heterophyllus Myrtaceae Tree Fruit
6. Supari Areca palm Areca catechu Arecaceae Tree Fruit
7. Narikel Coconut Cocos nucifera Arecaceae Tree Fruit
8. Khezur Date palm Phoenix dactylifera Arecaceae Tree Fruit
9. Tal Palm Borassus flabellifer Arecaceae Tree Fruit
10. Amm Mango Mangifera indica Anacardiaceae Tree Fruit
11. Chatim Devil's tree Alstonia scholaris Apocynaceae Tree Medicinal
12. Kath Badam Indian- Terminalia catappa Combretaceae Tree Fruit
almond
13. Chalta Chalta Dillenia indica Dilleniaceae Tree Fruit
14. Shimul Showy Silk Bombax insigne Malvaceae Tree Asthetic
Cotton Tree
15. Tal Doum Palm Hyphaene thebaica Arecaceae Tree Firewood
16. Kadam Burflower- Neolamarckia cadamba. Rubiaceae Tree Firewood

tree
17. Koroi Rain tree Samanea saman Fabaceae Tree Timber
18. Sada koroi White Siris Albizia procera Fabaceae Tree Timber
19. Tetul Tamarind Tamarindus indica Fabaceae Tree Fruit
tree
20. Akasmoni Acacia Acacia auriculiformis Fabaceae Tree Timber
21. Gab Gach Mabolo Diospyros discolor Ebenaceae Tree Fruit
22. Bot Gach Banyan tree Ficus bengalensis Moraceae Tree Fuel
23. Jam Java Plum Syzygium cumini Myrtaceae Tree Fruit
24. Peyara Guava Psidium guajava Myrtaceae Tree Fruit
25. Jam Java Plum Syzygium cumini Myrtaceae Tree Fruit
26. Kola Banana Musa sapientum Musaceae Herb Fruit
27. Mehegony Mehegoni Swietenia mahagoni Meliaceae Tree Timber
28. Royna Pithraj tree Aphanamixis Meliaceae Tree Timber
polystachya
29. Chambol Silk tree Albizia richardiana Mimosaceae Tree Fuel
30. Kamranga Star fruit Averrhoa carambola Oxalidaceae Tree Fruit
31. Boroi Indian Zizyphus mauritiana Rhamnaceae Tree Fruit
Jujube
32. Zambura Pomelo fruit Citrus maxima Rutaceae Shrub Fruit
33. Daton Daton Glycosmis pentaophylla Rutaceae Shrub Fuel
34. Lebu Lemon Citrus spp. Rutaceae Shrub Fruit

35. Bash Bamboo Bamboo spp. Poaceae Grass Timber
36. Vati Hill glory Clerodendrum Lamiaceae Shrub Fuel
bower infortunatum

Pictures taken during block study are shown in Figure 4-36.
A) Image view of block studied area B) Image view of grassland block studied area
C) Neolamarckia cadamba. D) Dillenia indica.
E) Areca catechu F) Borassus flabellifer

Figure 4-36: Pictures taken during block study
Figure 4-37 shows types of plant species in the study block.

AestheticFruitTimberFuel
7%
13%
13%
67%
Figure 4-37: Types of plant species in the study block

In the study site among all of plant species, it has been found that 67% are fruits, 13% timbers and
13% are fuel type tree. And rest only 7% trees are Aesthetic type.
Floral diversity Index of study area
A diversity index is a mathematical measure of species diversity in a community. Diversity indices

provide more information about community composition than simply species richness (i.e., the
number of species present); they also take the relative abundances of different species into account.
Diversity indices provide important information about rarity and commonness of species in a
community. The ability to quantify diversity in this way is an important tool for biologists trying to
understand community structure.
Shannon Weiner Diversity:
The Shannon diversity index (H) is an index that is commonly used to characterize species diversity
in a community. Shannon's index accounts for both abundance and evenness of the species present.
The proportion of species i relative to the total number of species (pi) is calculated, and then
multiplied by the natural logarithm of this proportion (lnpi). The resulting product is summed
across species, and multiplied by -1:
Shannon's equitability (EH) can be calculated by dividing H by Hmax (here Hmax = lnS).
Equitability assumes a value between 0 and 1 with 1 being complete evenness.
On the diversity scale, biologically realistic H’ values range from 0 (only one species presents with
no uncertainty as to what species each individual will be) to about 4.5 (high uncertainty as species
are relatively evenly distributed). In theory, the H’ value can be much higher than 4.5, although
most real world estimates of H’ range from 1.5 to 3.5.

Table 4-23: Biodiversity index of floral species at study area
Homestead Plantation Block(04) study
Parameter Plot#1 Plot#2 Plot#3
Shannon-Wiener Diversity Index(H) H=1.062257303 1.885192629 1.869664739
Evenness (E) 0.592858594 0.857986944 0.848884552
Species Richness (S) 6 9 8
4.8.3.2 Aquatic flora

Free floating plants are commonly observed throughout the study area. During the survey several
species of aquatic plants have been found where Lemnaceae & Polygonaceae families are
dominating. Among them Colocasia esculenta, Cyperus sp., Eichhornia crassipes, Enhydra fluctuans,
Ipomoea aquatica, Nymphaea nouchali and Phragmites karka were largely seen.
4.8.4 Biodiversity of fauna

During the faunal survey mainly covers: –
 Birds
 Amphibians and Reptiles
 Mammals
 Fisheries
4.8.4.1 Birds
The basic method has been chosen based on setting up a single line at each site called a “transect”.
The birds were identified either visually, by their calls or digitally recorded. This method involves
identifying all the birds; it has been seen or heard while standing at a series of points along a
transect (Straight line through the site). Bird’s counts were conducted at the early in the morning. It
is also time of maximum bird movement as birds through the bush to begin feeding. A systematic
search in the project impact area (over a fixed area and/ or for a fixed time) such as the method
specified here has been the added advantage of providing an index of the abundance of individuals
and species. Nesting also consider during the survey tenure in order identified the taxon. The
reliability of the abundance index can be reduced by either overestimates or underestimates of bird
numbers. To reduce overestimates, particularly when a member is observing, try to ensure that each
individual bird is recorded only once. Hence, ensure that a least one member of the team was
watching at all times. Focus Group Discussion (FGD) with local people (including villagers, school
teachers, Mosque Imam, help us to get information of the local species available in the study area.

Habitat Condition of the study Area:
During the survey tenure, a total of 26 species of birds were identified belongings to 18 families
within the study area.
3.5
3
2.5
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
Figure 4-38: Different family’s number of Birds.
The highest number of birds dominated in the site belonging to the family Sturnidae. However, the
birds belong to the family alcedenidae, columbidae, ardidae, corvidae and accipitaridae consist two
species among all. Homestead forest, grassland and bush, and some aquatic habitat of this site have
supported the wild birds for feeding and roosting.
All of the bird species at this were found to be Least Concern (LC) both locally and globally
according to IUCN Red List 2015. A detail about the bird’s species checklist has shown in Table 4-24
and the picture of the birds has been provided in Figure 4-39.
Table 4-24: Birds species counted in the study area
Sl. Common Local Name Scientific Family IUCN IUCN
No Name Name Global Local
Status Status
1. Black-rumped Sonali kaththokra Dinopium Picidae LC LC
Flameback benghalense
2. Common King Chhoto Alcedo atthis Alcedinidae LC LC
fisher Maachranga
3. White-throated Dhola gola Halcyon Alcedinidae LC LC
kingfisher Machranga smyrnensis
4. Rose-ringed Shobuj Tia Psittacula Psittacidae LC LC
Parakeet krameri
5. Blue Rock Gola Paira Columba livia Columbidae LC LC
pigeon
6. Spotted dove Tila Ghughu Streptopelia Columbidae LC LC
chinensis
7. Indian pond Kani Bok Ardeola grayii Ardidae LC LC
heron
8. Cattle egret Go Boga Bubulcus ibis Ardidae LC LC
9. Long-tailed Lenja Latora Lanius schach Lanidae LC LC
Shrike
10. House Crow Patikak Corvus Corvidae LC LC

Sl. Common Local Name Scientific Family IUCN IUCN
No Name Name Global Local
Status Status
splendens
11. Rufous treepie Harichacha, Khoira Dendrocitta Corvidae LC LC
Harichacha vagabunda
12. Black hooded Halde Pakhi Oriolus Oriolidae LC LC
oriole xanthornus
13. Black Drongo Kala Fingey Dicrurus Dicruridiae LC LC
macrocercus
14. Oriental magpie Doel Copsychus Muscicapidae LC LC
robin saularis
15. Common myna Salik/BhatSalik Acridotheres Sturnidae LC LC
tristis
16. Jungle Myna Jhuti Shalik Acridotheres Sturnidae LC LC
fuscus
17. Asian Pied Gobrey shalik Sturnus contra Sturnidae LC LC
Starling
18. Red-vented Bangla bulbul Pycnonotus Ptcnonotidae LC LC
Bulbul cafer
19. House sparrow Pati choroi Passer Passeridae LC LC
domesticus
20. Little Cormorant Chot Pankowri Microcarbo Phalacrocoracidae LC LC
niger
21. Black kite Bhubon chil Milvus Accipitridae LC LC
migrans
govinda
22. Brahminy Kite Shonkho Chil Haliastur Accipitridae LC LC
Indus
23. Asian Koel Kokil, koel Eudynamys Cuculidae LC LC
scolopacea
24. Barn Owl Lokkhi pecha Tyto alba Tytonidae LC LC
25. Spotted owlet Khurley pecha Athene brama Srtigidae LC LC
indica
26. Common kestrel Pati Shahin Falco Falconidae LC LC
tinnunculus
Pictures taken during bird survey around the project area are shown in Figure 4-39.
a) Black Drongo b) Black Kite c) Little Cormorant

d) Asian Koel e) Brahminy Kite f) Little Egret
g) Black Headed Bulbul h) Asian Pied Starling f) House Crow

Figure 4-39: Birds species found in the study area
4.8.4.2 Amphibians & Reptiles
Amphibians and Reptiles have been assessed on an opportunistic basis by the team. For this
inventory, it has been used a combination of diurnal and nocturnal time-recorded visual encounter
surveys ("general surveys"). Interviews were held with local people in the area to assess the
presence of game species. Focus Group Discussion (FGD) with local people (including villagers,
school teachers, Imam, help us to get information of the local species available in the study area).
During field investigation, four species of reptiles and two species of amphibians were recorded in
the study area. All of the species are Least Concerned according to the IUCN red list 2015. The
Amphibian- reptiles have been provided in Table 4-25.
Table 4-25: Herpetofauna counted in the study area
Reptiles
Sl. No Common Name Local Name Scientific Name Status
1. Spotted house lizard Tiktiki Hemidactylus frenatus LC
2. Garden lizard Roktochosa Calotes versicolor LC
3. Checkered keel back Dora shaap Xenochrophis piscator LC
4. Kori Kaitta Kori kaitta Pangshuratecta LC
Amphibian
Kuno bang Duttaphrynus
1.
Asian Common Toad LC
melanostictus
Kola bang, Sona
Indian Bull Frog
2.
Hoplobatrachus tigerinus LC
bang

4.8.4.3 Mammals
For mammal's inventory, it is generally huge challenging, time consuming as well as costly. During
the inventory of this study area with the stipulated short time, it has been followed "Observational
methods" including imaging record by digital camera, identification of dung or feces, foot print,
tracks and others signs, night walks. Focus Group Discussion (FGD) with local people also consider
during this inventory of the study area.
It has been recorded four mammal’s species belonging four families in the study area. Mammals
that were found in the study area are Common mongoose (Herpestes edwardsii), Golden Jackal
(Canis aureus), Common Indian field mouse (Mus booduga) and Indian Flying fox (Pteropus
giganteus). According to the IUCN red list status 2015 all of the species are belongs to Least
Concern (LC) Category. The checklist of Mammals has been provided in Table 4-26.
Table 4-26: Mammals counted in the study area
Mammals
1.
Common Boro beji Herpestes edwardsii Least Concern
mongoose
2.
Golden Jackal Pati shiyal Canis aureus Least Concern
3.
Common Indian Metho Idur Mus boodug Least Concern
Field Mouse
4.
Indian Flying fox Boro badur Pteropus giganteus Least Concern
4.8.4.4 Fisheries
Fish survey has been conducted based on discussion with the Fishermen and FGD at fish market,
discussion with local people and secondary information for fish species in the study area. It has
been considered different water body within the area. Total 28 fish species under eight families
have been found. Among all, fishes from the family Cyprinidae consist highest eight species. Fis
species found in the study area is presented in Table 4-27.
Table 4-27: List of fish species found in the study area
SL Local Name Common Name Scientific Name Family IUCN
Status*
1 Koi Climbing perch Anabus testudines Anabantidae LC
2 Choto Tengra Tengara Catfsh Mystus tengara Bagridae LC
3 Tengra Striped Dwarf Catfsh Mystus vittaus Bagridae LC
4 Aier Long-whiskered catfish Sperata aor Bagridae VU
5 Magur Walking Catfsh Clarias batrachus Clariidae LC
6 Mrigal Mrigal Carp Cirrhinus cirrhosus Cyprinidae NT
7 Jat Punti Spotfn Swamp Barb Puntius sophore Cyprinidae LC
8 Mola Mola Carplet Amblypharyngodon mola Cyprinidae LC
9 Bata Bata Labeo Labeo bata Cyprinidae LC
10 Rui Ruhu Labeo rohita Cyprinidae LC

SL Local Name Common Name Scientific Name Family IUCN
Status*
11 Chela Large Razorbelly Salmophasia bacaila Cyprinidae LC
Minnow
12 Katol Catla Catla catla Cyprinidae LC
13 Olive barb Silver Barb fish Systomus sarana Cyprinidae LC
14 Chapila Ganges River Gizzard Gonialosa manmina Clupeidae LC
Shad
15 Hilsha Shad Ilish Tenualosa ilisha Clupeidae LC
16 Kachki Ganges river sprat Corica soborna Clupeidae LC
17 Shol Snakehead Murre Channa striatas Channidae LC
18 Taki Spotted Snakehead Channa punctata Channidae LC
19 Gajar Giant Snakehead Channa marulius Channidae EN
20 Bele Bele Glossogobius giuris Gobiidae LC
21 Shing Stinging Catfsh Heteropneustes fossilis Heteropneustidae LC
22 Chital Humped Featherback Chitala chitala Notopteridae EN
23 Boal Freshwater Shark Wallago attu Siluridae VU
24 Baan Bengal eel Ophisternon bengalense Synbranchidae VU
25 Pangash Yellowtail Catfsh Pangasius pangasius Pangasiidae EN
26 Chanda Indian Glassy Fish Pseudambassis baculis Perciformes NT
27 Khailsha Banded Gouram Trichogaster fasciata Osphronemidae LC
28 Tilapia Tilapia Oreochromis mossambicus Cichlidae NT
According to the IUCN red list status 2015, it has been found that majority of the fish species at the
study area are least Concern (about 65%). Moreover, fishes are found to be Near Threatened,
Vulnerable, and endangered are almost same. But there is good news is that, there found no
critically endangered fish at the survey area.
Family of the fish fauna found at the project site

9
8
Family
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Figure 4-40: Number of fish family at the study area

IUCN fishes status (2015) of the study area
Endangered 11%
Vulnurable 12%
Near
Least Threatened 12%
Concern 65%
Figure 4-41: IUCN Fishes status (2015) in the study area

Pictures captured during fish survey at the study area are shown in Figure 4-42.
a) Fishing equipment used at the study area b) Fishermen at the study area
a) Fish market survey b) Fish market survey

e) Fish at the study area f) Fish at the study area
Source: EQMS Survey Team
Figure 4-42: Photographs of in field fish survey
4.8.5 Phytoplankton & Zooplankton Composition
4.8.5.1 Study of Phytoplankton

Phytoplankton sample was collected from the surface (0.3-0.5 m from the surface) of water body in
the Project area and another one from the Palbazar Bridge that is 1.4 km upstream from the
Chandpur Estuary (Dakatia & Meghna). About 50 L water has been filtered through plankton net.
After filtration through plankton net 50 mL of water was collected (Collecting bucket) from each site
and was preserved with Lugol’s solution for phytoplankton analysis. The analysis of phytoplankton
has been executed in the Zoology laboratory of the University of Dhaka.
Figure 4-43: Sampling of Phytoplankton & Zooplankton

Total phytoplankton density was much higher at the samples collected from the Palbazar Bridge
location (68760 individuals/L) compared to the Project Area (64520 individuals/L). Phytoplankton
community was represented by 17 genera. Among the phytoplankton genera Coscinodiscus sp. was
the most dominant followed by Scenedesmus sp. and Synedra sp. Phytoplankton community
compositions at the monitored location are presented in Table 4-28.

Table 4-28: Phytoplankton Community Composition at the Monitored Locations
Number (individuals/L)
Sl. No Phytoplankton Genera Palbazar Bridge Project Area
(23°13'47.63"N; (23°13'24.57"N;
90°38'28.79"E) 90°40'15.40"E)
1 Navicula 2030 3015
2 Synedra 8300 7400
3 Cyclotella 2790 3100
4 Coscinodiscus 19350 18700
5 Anabaena 125 560
6 Nostoc 480 750
7 Oscillatoria 3200 1750
8 Chlorella 300 425
9 Spirogyra 880 520
10 Coelastrum 3,100 2020
11 Scenedesmus 17380 15100
12 Microspora 80 170
13 Ankistrodesmus 2800 1750
14 Ceratium 375 580
15 Phacus 7300 8300
16 Pediastrum 120 70
17 Melosira 150 310
Total 68760 64520
4.8.5.2 Study of Zooplankton

Zoo-planktonic sample has been collected from 0.5-1.0 m deep from the water body in study area
and another one from the Palbazar Bridge that is 1.4 km upstream from the Chandpur Estuary
(Dakatia & Meghna). About 50 L water was filtered through plankton net. After filtration through
plankton net 50 mL of water was collected (Collecting bucket) from each station and will be
preserved with buffered formalin. The analysis of zooplankton has been executed in the Zoology
laboratory of the University of Dhaka.
Similar to that of phytoplankton samples, total zooplankton densities were much higher at the
samples collected from the Palbazar Bridge location (27385 individuals/L) compared to the Project
area (25420 individuals/L). Zooplankton community was represented by 11 genera.
Among the zoo planktonic genera Nauplius sp. was most dominant followed by Brachionus sp. and
Cyclops sp. Zooplankton community compositions at the monitored locations are presented in
Table 4-29.

Table 4-29: Zooplankton Community Composition at the Monitored Locations
SL. NO Number (individuals/L)
Zooplankton Genera Pal Bazar Bridge Project Area
(23°13'47.63"N; 90°38'28.79"E) (23°13'24.57"N; 90°40'15.40"E)
1 Brachionus 8350 3400

2 Keratella 1250 3200
3 Philodina 700 860
4 Nauplius 4520 8380
5 Cyclops 4180 2750
6 Bosmina 180 720
7 Moina 2800 1750
8 Daphnia 3825 3020
9 Cypris 700 550
10 Polyarthra 860 700
11 Diaptomus 20 90
Total 27385 25420
4.9 Social baseline
4.9.1 Socio-Economic Baseline
Conditions
The present socio-economic conditions of the people of the study area will provide sound reference
and assess probable socio-economic impact of the proposed interventions. This will enable us to
compare the changes and impacts of the project interventions in future.
The socio-economic baseline scenario describes the socio-economic characteristics of project area on
the basis of primary and secondary data. The socio-economic characteristics include administrative
area, demographic, household size, education, occupation, housing, employment opportunity,
health, housing, access to water and sanitation status etc.
4.9.2 Administrative area and location

The Project site is located in Chandpur Sadar near Darjibari ghat, Chandpur district. Based on the
assessment of the project, its surroundings and its environmental & social influence, a 5 kilometer
radius is considered as the study area for the social study. Table 4-30 show the study area of the
project across Unions, Upazila and Districts. The socio-economic features of the study area are
discussed in this section.
Table 4-30: Study Area
Project Study Area
District Name Upazila Union
Tarpur Chandi
Maishadi
Baghadi
Chandpur Chandpur Sadar
Paurashava
Balia
Sakhua
Source: Bangladesh Bureau of Statistics (BBS)

4.9.3 Population and Demography
In the study area, there are 60236 households (HHs) including squatters with a total population of
288413 that will be influenced by the implementation of the Project. The average sex ratio is 94.2 and
the average household size is 4.8. Demography of the study area is shown in Table 4-31.
Table 4-31: Demography of the Study Area

Total
Upazila Union Total Pop Avg. HH Literacy
Sex Ratio
HHs size (%)
Tarpur Chandi 12044 2491 4.8 93 59.0

Maishadi 15030 3255 4.6 91 55.1
Baghadi 32163 6740 4.8 92 50.3
Chandpur Sadar
Chandpur Paurashava 159021 33322 4.8 101 67.4
Balia 30527 6461 4.7 86 51.8
Sakhua Union 39628 7967 5.0 102 47.2
Study Area 288413 60236 4.8 94.2 55.1
Source: Population and Housing Census, 2011, Bangladesh Bureau of Statistics (BBS)
4.9.3.1 Religion
As per the population and housing census 2011, the population of the study area dominated by the
Muslim community 92.43% in terms of faith. The second group goes to Hindu who is only 7.31%
and other groups (Christian and Buddhist) are very negligible in percentage. The following Figure
4-44 indicates the various religious profile of the study area.
Religion Distribution (%)

92.43
100
Population %
80
60
40
7.31 0.08 0.03 0.14

20
0
Muslim Hindu ChristianBuddhist Others
Figure 4-44: Distribution of Religion in the Study Area

4.9.3.2 Ethnic Composition
According to the population and housing census 2011, among the selected wards and unions only
1140 ethnic populations are found in the study area. Tripura, Chakma and some other ethnic
communities are over the Chandpur Districts. Ethnic Composition of the study area is shown in
Figure 4-45.
Figure 4-45: Ethnic Composition of Study Area

4.9.4 Education
According to population and housing census 2001, it shows that concentration of literate people in
the study area. The illiteracy rate in the study area is 55.1% which is more than the national average
of 42.1%. Table 4-31 shows the Literacy (%) of the Study area.
4.9.5 Settlement and Housing

According to the population and housing census 2011, total household of the study area is 43159.
Predominant structure of this study area is kutcha (78%) followed by Semi-pucka (24%), Pucka
(4%), and Jhupri (2%). Housing tenancy of the study area is owned by (91%), rented (7%) and rent
free (2%). Figure 4-46 and Figure 4-47 show the type of structure and housing tenancy status in the
project study area.
Housing Structure(%)
1%
8%
13%
Pucka
Semi-pucka
Kutcha Jhupri
78%
Figure 4-46: Type of Housing structure in the study area

Housing Tenacy Status(%)
2%
OwnedRented Rent free
7%
91%
Figure 4-47: Housing Tenancy Status in the Study Area
4.9.6 Public Utilities
4.9.6.1 Water Supply

In the study area, the major source of drinking water is tube-well where about 79% population use
tube-well water. Few people 13% have access to tap-water. Other 8% people have access neither
tube-well nor tap water. An overview is depicted in Figure 4-48 below.
Source of Drinking Water (%) TapTube-well
13%
8%
79%
Figure 4-48: Sources of Drinking Water in the study area
4.9.6.2 Electricity
Electricity is an important indicator for measuring the quality of life in the Study area. In the study
area, 71.85% of the households have grid electricity connection. Table 4-32 shows the detail
electricity connection situation by union. However, households mostly use the electricity for
lighting and fanning purposes and some people for irrigation purpose.

Table 4-32: Electricity connection in the Study Area
District Name Upazila Union Electricity Connection (%)
Tarpur Chandi 83.7
Maishadi 72.4
Baghadi 64.2
Chandpur Chandpur Sadar
Paurashava 95.9
Balia 58.1
Sakhua 56.8
Study Area 71.85
4.9.6.3 Sanitation
In the study area, about 23.2% and 52.3% of households use water sealed and non-water-sealed
sanitary latrine facility respectively which represents the 75.5% households of the study area. About
22.2% households use non sanitary facilities. Only 2.4% households defecate in open places with no
access to hygienic latrine facility. Sanitation facility in the study is presented in Figure 4-49.
Sanitation Facility in the Study Area
60
Households %
40
52.3
20
23.2 22.2
2.4
0
Sanitary (water-sealed) Non-sanitary
Sanitation Type
Figure 4-49: Sanitation Facility in the study area
4.9.6.4 Solid Waste

Uncontrolled waste generation coupled with inadequate collection and disposal systems have the
potentiality to give rise to pollution and environmental degradation as well as disease. While no
specific data on local waste management was collected from the study area, it is likely that – as with
many other parts of rural Bangladesh – the unions within the study area have no formal waste
management facilities, and that in general people dispose of their waste in landfills or in fallow
land.
4.9.7 Economy and Employment

According to the Population and Housing Census 2011, agriculture and service are the dominant
source of employment in the study area. Approximately, 6812 male and 141 female are involved in
agricultural activities. Moreover, significant numbers of the population; 9223 male and 1169 female,
of the study area are employed in services. Table 4-33 shows the employment status of the project
area.

Table 4-33: Employment status of the Study Area
Population Aged 7+, not attending school Field of Activity
District but employed
Upazila Union Agriculture Industry Service
Name
Total Male Female Male Female Male Female Male Female
Tarpur Chandi 864 838 26 334 3 71 4 433 19
Maishadi 986 949 37 713 20 158 9 78 8
Chandpur Chandpur Sadar Baghadi 2039 1984 55 1070 20 50 2 864 33
Paurashava 9873 8700 1173 1324 24 1000 105 6376 1044
Balia 2098 2053 45 1658 23 152 6 243 16
Sakhua 3383 3261 122 1713 51 319 22 1229 49
Study Area 19243 17785 1458 6812 141 1750 148 9223 1169

5 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT
AND MITIGATION MEASURES
5.1 Introduction
This section identifies and assesses the potential impacts in the environment that could be expected
from the proposed Power Plant. The impacts due to the Project activities across different phases
have been identified and assessed. The Project activities will impact the physical, social and
ecological environment in three distinct phases:
 Pre-Construction
 Construction
 Operation
Impacts are identified and predicted based on the analysis of the information collected from the
following:
 Project information;
 Baseline information.
The identification of likely impacts during construction and operation phases has been carried out
based on likely activities having their impact on environmental and socio-economic parameters.
The details of the activities and their impacts have been worked out in the following sections. The
next section discusses in detail the impact assessment methodology adopted as part of EIA process
for the proposed Power Plant Project.
5.2 Identification of Potential Impacts

The potential impacts have been identified through a systematic process whereby the activities
(both planned and unplanned) associated with the Project have been considered with respect to
their potential to interact with environmental and social resources or receptors.
The interaction matrix enables a methodical identification of the potential interactions each Project
activity may have on the range of resources/ receptors within the Area of Influence i.e. the study
area for the Project. An activity-impact interaction matrix for pre-construction, construction and
operation phase is presented in Table 5-1.

Table 5-1: Impact identification matrix for the proposed power plant
Environmental Ecological Social
Population Displacement
Economy and Livelihood
Infrastructure & Services

Ground Water Quantity
Surface Water Quantity
Occupational Health &
Community Health &

Social and Cultural
Terrestrial Ecology
Aesthetic & Visual
Vulnerable Group
Sediment Quality
Potential Impacts/
Drainage Pattern
Aquatic Ecology
Climate Change
GHG Emission
Vibration level
Social Conflict
Risks Activity
Employment
River Traffic
Road Traffic
Noise Level
Soil quality
Air Quality
Landscape
Structure
Land use
Impact
Safety
safety
Pre-Construction & Construction Phase
Land Purchase/
Acquisition
Site Clearing
Filling of land
Building of structures
including temporary
structures
Heavy equipment
operations
Storage, handling and
disposal of waste
Generation of sewage
and discharge
Construction of
transmission line
Construction of
Temporary Jetty
Influx of construction
workers
Concreting work
Transportation of
manpower, equipment &
materials by road

Environmental Ecological Social
Population Displacement
Economy and Livelihood
Infrastructure & Services

Ground Water Quantity
Surface Water Quantity
Occupational Health &
Community Health &

Social and Cultural
Terrestrial Ecology
Aesthetic & Visual
Vulnerable Group
Potential Impacts/
Sediment Quality
Drainage Pattern
Aquatic Ecology
Climate Change
GHG Emission
Vibration level
Social Conflict
Risks Activity
Employment
River Traffic
Road Traffic
Noise Level
Soil quality
Air Quality
Landscape
Structure
Land use
Impact
Safety
safety
Storage and handling of
chemicals (unplanned
release)
Operation Phase
Air Emission from
stacks of the power
plant
Noise generation due
to operation of plant
and auxiliaries
Water demand for
plant operation
Wastewater
discharge/disposal
Hazardous material
and waste storage
Construction of
pontoon
Storages of
flammables
HFO transportation
Job facilities

5.3 Impact in Pre-construction phase
The proposed plant site is low agricultural land. The proponent purchased the land from the land
owner. There is no settlement in the area. As a result there is no resettlement issue. Moreover, there
are no trees in this area. So, during land development no trees need to cut. The project site is
inundated with water most of the time. No significance amount of agricultural product achieved
from this land. As such the impact during pre-construction stage is very low.
5.4 Impact in Construction Phase

Construction activities have some negative impacts on land, air, water, ambient noise and,
ecosystem and society in and around project site. However some positive impact on the society will
be observed. Impact assessments details during construction phases are elaborate in the following
subsections.
5.4.1 Impact on soil quality
A. Impact on soil due to compaction
Sources of impact:
 Soil will be compacted during the establishment of laydown areas, internal roads and
installation of equipment to ensure stability
 Movement of heavy vehicles and heavy construction machinery will also cause soil
compaction
Impact Significance:
Soil compaction and possible damage to the soil structure due to heavy vehicular movement will
only be limited to the vicinity project site. Based on the impact assessment matrix given below the
impact was assessed as low.
Impact Impact on soil due to compaction
Impact Nature Direct Indirect Induced
Impact Scale within project site and near site boundary area
Frequency Limited to construction Phase

Extent and location Project Site Local Regional National Trans boundary
Medium Permanent – Permanent – no

Impact Duration Short Term Long-term
Term Mitigated mitigation
Impact Intensity/ severity Insignificant Low Medium High Very High

Potential for irreplaceable
Low Medium High
loss of resources
Medium-
Magnitude Insignificant Low Medium - high High Very High
low
Probability of Impact Unlikely Low Medium High Definite
Medium- Medium-
Very low Low High Very High
Impact Significance Low high
Significance of impact is considered as Low

Mitigation Measure:
The following measures will be implemented to mitigate potential soil compaction:
 Demarcating routes for movement of heavy vehicles;

 Stripping and placing soils when dry, and not when wet;
With mitigation this impact can be limited to project site and the impact significance will be very
low.
B. Impact on Soil due to contamination
Sources of Impacts:
 Soil contamination during the construction phase may result from leakage and spillage of
oil, lubricants, fuel from heavy equipment or leakage from chemical/fuel storage.
 Transportation of construction material, equipment and personnel;
 Storage of construction materials including hazardous material;
 Hazardous materials and waste disposing;
 Civil work activities;
 Erection of construction yards;
 Waste Water discharge

During the construction stage of the project, a large number of workers/employees will be engaged
with the proposed project. At the same time, a significant amount of solid waste will be produced
from the domestic waste, garbage, sludge from a food waste, by-product material etc. Solid waste
can effect on soil if it is not manage properly.
The waste both solid and small quantity of hazardous waste generated from the proposed project
will be handled as per the GOB ECR 1997 guideline. Liquid effluents arising from construction
activities will be treated to the standards specified in Schedule 9 and 10 of ECR, 1997 of the GOB and
the applicable International guidelines prior to discharge. Therefore, the likelihood of unplanned
events leading to soil contamination is possible but low. Based on the matrix the impact has been
considered as low.

Impact Impact on soil due to contamination
Impact Scale Within the project location
Trans
Extent and location Project Site Local Regional National
boundary
Medium Permanent –
Impact Duration Short Term Long-term Permanent – Mitigated
Term no mitigation
Impact Intensity/
Insignificant Low Medium High Very High
severity
Potential for
irreplaceable loss of Low Medium High
resources
Medium- Very
Magnitude Insignificant Low Medium - high High
low High
Probability of
Impact
Medium- Very
Very low Low Medium-high High
Impact Significance Low High
Significance of impact consider low
Mitigation Measures:
 A site specific Emergency Response Plan will be prepared by the Contractor for soil clean-up
and decontamination;
 Design processes to prevent/minimize quantities of wastes generated and hazards
associated with the waste generated;
 Minimize the production of waste materials by 3R (Reduce, Recycle and Reuse) approach;
 Leaching from the sediments should be contained to seep into the subsoil or should be
discharged into settling lagoons before final disposal;
 Training labourers for waste disposal in designated areas and use of sanitation facilities;
 The storage areas of oil, fuel and chemicals will be surrounded by bunds or other
containment device to prevent spilled chemicals from percolating into the ground or
reaching the receiving waters;
 Proper storage of the construction materials and wastes to minimize the potential damage or
contamination of the materials; and
 Fuel tanks and chemical storage areas will be sited on concrete platform and provided with
locks to prevent unauthorized entry.
With implementation of mitigation measures the impact will be very low.

5.4.2 Impact on water Resources
A. Impact on surface water
Source of impact: Potential impact on surface water could arise from:
 Earthworks in the Project area may increase the erosion, especially during rainfall events,
which may increase the suspended sediment concentrations and pollute water sources.
Similar impacts are possible from construction of the floating jetty at Dakatia River for
receiving construction materials and equipment;
 Wastewater generated from washing of equipment and machinery on site.
 Surface water runoff from construction site
 Generation and disposal of domestic waste water from construction camp
 Pilling activities
 Use of poisonous chemicals.
 Discharge of hydro-testing water.
The wastewater may contain suspended solids and trace amount of HFO. The contractor will be
responsible for ensuring that any wastewater discharged meets the standards stipulated in Schedule
10 of ECR, 1997 and the applicable World Bank/IFC General EHS Guidelines prior to discharge of such
wastewater. Sanitary facilities including toilets will be provided for the use of the construction
workforce both on-site and at the workers’ accommodation. Such sewage streams are likely to be
high in organic matter, suspended solids, coliform and other Pollutants. Septic tanks will be
provided to treat sanitary wastewater. Potential impacts are expected to be short-term and localized
in nature. A potential impact on surface water is low.
Impact Impact on surface water

Impact Scale impact on nearby ponds
Low Medium High
loss of resources
Magnitude Insignificant Low Medium-low Medium - high High Very High

Medium-
Very low Low Medium-high High Very High
Impact Significance Low

Mitigation Measure:
 Restrict the earth work activities during monsoon season;

 Channelize all surface runoff from the construction site through storm water drainage
system and provide adequate size double chambered sedimentation tank;
 Prevent and mitigate spill of paint/fuel within the construction site;
 Treat the hydro-testing water before discharge
 Prevent & mitigate spill of paint/fuel within the construction site;
 Oil leakage or spillage will be contained and cleaned up immediately. Waste oil will be
collected and stored for recycling or disposal;
 Minimize the generation of sediment, oil and grease, excess nutrients, organic matter,
litter, debris and any form of waste (particularly petroleum and chemical wastes). These
substances must not enter waterways, storm water systems or underground water tables;
 Any surplus wastewater from the concrete batching will be treated to comply with
discharge standards before it is discharged to the Dakatia River
 Adequate sanitary facilities, i.e. toilets and showers, will be provided for the construction
workforce;
 All liquids effluent will be treated to meet the standards specified in Schedules 9 and 10 of
the ECR, 1997 and IFC EHS Guidelines prior to discharge to Dakatia River.
 Stockpiles will be protected by plastic sheets and suitably secured against the wind, at the
end of each working day if rain is forecasted;
With proper mitigation measures the impact will be very low

B. Impact on ground water
Source of impact: Potential impact on ground water could arise from:
 The spillage and seepage of chemical, oil and lubricants from storage area, waste handling
area and generation of domestic waste/wastewater from construction labour camp area may
adversely affect ground water quality in the area.
 Liquid effluents will be generated from washing of construction equipment and vehicles
The existing groundwater quality analysis around project does not reveal any existing
contamination or pollution. Groundwater contamination during the construction phase may occur
from unplanned events such as leaks and spills of oil, lubricants, fuel from heavy equipment,
improper handling of sewage or chemical/fuel storage. Mitigation measures such as storage of
chemicals at concretedlay down areas will be implemented to minimize contamination in the event
of a spill. Septic tanks will be provided to treat sanitary wastewater. As stated above, all wastewater
discharges will meet the standards stipulated in Schedule 9 and 10 of ECR, 1997 and the applicable
World Bank/IFC General EHS Guidelines prior to discharge. While there is a potential for long-term
direct impacts to groundwater quality from construction, with the implementation of mitigation

measures for proper handling of chemicals, waste and liquid effluents, the impact to groundwater
from spills and leaks is assessed to be low.
Impact Impact on ground water
Impact Scale in and around project site
Medium Long- Permanent – no
Impact Duration Short Term Permanent – Mitigated
Term term mitigation

Low Medium High
loss of resources
Medium-
low
Very low Low Medium-Low Medium-high High Very High

Impact Significance
Mitigation Measure:
The following measures can be taken to minimize impact on ground water during construction
phase
 Ensure proper spill control and management at site;

 Ensure storage of hazardous material and waste in proper manner and disposed the waste
in Hazardous waste Landfill site;
 The surface runoff or extracted ground water contaminated by silt and suspended solids
will be collected by the on-site drainage system and discharged into storm drains after the
removal of silt in silt removal facilities;
 Monitor groundwater from time to time to detect any contamination.
With proper mitigation measure the impact will be very low
5.4.3 Impact on Air Quality

Sources of Impacts: The major sources of impacts on air quality during construction phase are as
follows:
 Site preparation and leveling

 Exhaust emission from movement of equipment by barge,, trucks, and other heavy loaders;
 Operation of diesel generators and other diesel based construction machinery
 Earthworks, Including excavation, soil stripping;
 Dust generated from stockpiles of materials, waste, loose earth, handling and moving
excavated material and transporting wastes on vehicles.

 Site clearance including removal of topsoil;
 Construction site generate dust from construction materials, waste, loose earth, and moving
excavated material and transporting wastes on vehicles;
 Heavy machineries causes air pollution;
 Loading and unloading construction materials;
 Handling and mixing of cement
 Concreting works, including operation of concrete batching plant;
 Movement of construction equipment by vehicle and barge;

Impact Assessment
The assessment of air quality impacts has considered Schedule 11ECR, 1997 of the GOB and the World
Bank/IFC General EHS Guidelines. Maximum construction activities have the potentiality to generate
dust. The expansion of impacts from dust will depend on the location of construction activities.
Weather also an important factor for dust generation. Stronger winds and dry condition will
increase the transfer of dust, where damp or wet conditions will reduce the impact. Construction
dust dispersion is expected to be localized due to the relatively high mass of the dust particles
which will tend to confine the most significant dust impacts to the area within 500 m of the source.
The magnitude of the impact associated with the emission of dust during construction activities on
the basis of above factors is predicted to be medium and the significance of the impacts is assessed
to be low.
Impact Impact on air quality in construction phase
Impact Scale In and around project site
Frequency Limited to construction phase
Project
Extent and location Local Regional National Trans boundary
Site
Short Permanent – Permanent – no
Impact Duration Medium Term Long-term
Impact Intensity/ Insignific

Low Medium High Very High
severity ant
Potential for
resources
Insignific
Magnitude Low Medium-low Medium - high High Very High
ant

Impact Significance

Mitigation Measures
 Implementation of a regular watering and sprinkling dust suppression regime, during the
dry season;
 Concrete batching plant will be located within the Protected site to keep it away from
sensitive receptors;
 Restricting heights from which materials are dropped as far as practicable, to minimize the
fugitive dust arising from unloading/loading;
 Stockpiles will be maintained at site only, which is a fenced area. No stockpiles will
maintained outside, and maximum Possible distance between the stockpiles and receptors
will be maintained;
 Use effective dust suppression techniques, such as on-site watering and street cleaning;
 Water the material stockpiles, access roads and bare soils on an as required basis to
minimize the potential for environmental nuisance due to dust;
 Effective water sprays should be used to control potential dust emission sources;
 Cover haul vehicles carrying dusty materials moving outside the construction site;
 All diesel-powered equipment will be regularly maintained and idling time reduced to
minimize emissions;
 Establish adequate locations for storage, mixing and loading of construction materials, in a
way that dust dispersion is prevented because of such operations;
 Dusty activities should be re-scheduled where possible if high-wind conditions are
encountered;
 Crushing of rocky and aggregate materials shall be wet-crushed, or performed with particle
emission control systems.
 Waste from construction will not be burned.
 The movement of construction vehicles will be minimized and a 20 km/hr speed limit will
be enforced around the construction site,
 Low sulphur diesel (S<O.5%) will be used in diesel powered equipment in collaboration
with best management practices;
The impact of air will have low intensity with locally extent for a short term duration which will
result in an overall low impact without mitigation. However, with proper implementation of
suggested mitigation the impact will be reduced to very low.
5.4.4 Impact on Noise Quality

Sources of Impact:
The potential sources of noise during the construction phase of the Project include equipment,
machinery and transportation used for the construction activities. The heavy equipment used for

the construction activities will be the major sources of noise. This will include piling and preparing
concrete foundations for plant and buildings. The traffic volume will be increased during the
construction phase due to transportation of equipment, construction materials and workers on the
access road and the Dakatia River which will be the source of noise to the closest receptor. To
minimize these impacts, only those vehicles meeting the standards stipulated in Schedule 5 of the
Environmental Conservation Rules, 1997 will be used. The noise impact assessment was conducted
with reference to Bangladesh Environmental Conservation Rules, 1997 and the IFC EHS Guidelines.
Impact Significance
The nearest settlement is located adjacent to the south-western and south-eastern boundary. The
household is located within the 100 m of the project area and also closest to access road as a result
they will be affected due to construction work and movement of vehicle.
Construction traffic is expected to be generated throughout the entire construction period; however
the volume and type of traffic generated will depend on construction activities being conducted
which will vary during the construction period. There is potential for disturbance to habitations in
proximity of construction site. Movement of traffic during night hours can also disturb the local
community. So the impact on ambient noise due to the project activities during the construction
phase has been assessed as Medium-Low.
Impact Impact on noise quality

Impact Scale Within the project site

Low Medium High
loss of resources

Medium-
Significance of impact is considered as medium-low
Mitigation measures
Noise level shall be minimized as follows:
 Normal working hours of the contractor will be between 06:00 and 21:00 hours. If work
needs to be undertaken outside these hours, it should be limited to activities that do not
exceed the noise criteria at nearby noise sensitive receptors;
 Only well-maintained equipment will be operated on-site;

 Regular maintenance of equipment such as lubricating moving parts, tightening loose parts
and replacing worn out components should be conducted;
 Machinery and construction plant that may be in intermittent use (e.g. trucks) shall be shut
down or throttled down during non-work periods;
 Low noise equipment shall be used as far as practicable;
 The number of equipment operating simultaneously shall be reduced as far as practicable;
 Equipment known to emit noise strongly in one direction should be orientated so that the
noise is directed away from nearby NSRs as far as practicable;
 Noisy plant (such as breakers and rollers) shall be located as far away from receptors as
practicable.
 The contractor should consider the noise emission characteristics of equipment when
selecting equipment for the project and select the least noisy machine available to perform
the specific work (this is a requirement of OSHA 2007);
 The contractor should undertake additional post development noise monitoring in

accordance with National and International noise standards.
 Mobile noise sources such as cranes, earth moving equipment shall be routed in such a way
that there is minimum disturbance to receptors;
 Developer shall instruct their Safety Officers to arrange for inherently quiet construction
equipment and machines to maintain the noise level to minimum;
 Only limited construction activities shall be carried out during night-time;
 Restrict the night time vehicle movement through the access road;
 Adopt the vehicle speed (20 km/hr) limit in the access road
 Rubber padding/noise isolators will be used for construction equipment.
 Temporary noise barriers shall be provided surrounding the high noise generating
construction equipment;
 The personnel involved in high noise generating activities shall be provided with personal
protective devices to minimize their exposure to high noise levels;
 Construction vehicles and machinery will be well maintained and not kept idling when not
in use;
The impact of noise level will have medium intensity with locally extent for a short term duration
which will result in an overall medium- low impact without mitigation. However, with proper
implementation of suggested mitigation the impact will be reduced to low.

5.4.5 Impact on Ecosystem
A. Impact on Terrestrial Ecosystem
Sources of Impact
The potential sources of impact on terrestrial ecosystem during the construction phase of the project
are as follows.
 Site development activities
 Vegetation clearance;
 Fugitive emission and deposition on vegetation
 Noise and vibration.
 Construction activities at site;
 Influx of labor force; and
 Transportation of man and material by road and river
 Clearance of vegetation at the temporary jetty location for unloading the heavy equipment
and clearance of vegetation in the transportation routes to the project site.
Impact Significance
Project site was previously agricultural land. There were no trees on the site. . There is no significant
plant species found in the project site according to the IUCN red list status 2015. Small species like
frog, rat, odonate, butterfly etc, are observed in and around the project site. These species are
moving from project site to other places during construction phases. Noise and dust during
construction activities can be harmful for the local terrestrial ecology. Significance of Impact
calculated as very low.
Impact Impact on Terrestrial Ecosystem


Low Medium High
loss of resources
Medium- Medium -
Magnitude Insignificant Low High Very High
low high
Medium- Medium-
Significance of impact is considered as very low

Mitigation Measures
To minimize impact on terrestrial eco-system the following activities can be implemented
 The noise generating activities should be schedule during day time only.
 Movement of construction and transport vehicles should be restricted to dedicated paths to

minimize any harm to small mammals near to proposed site.
 Construction activities should be planned and undertaken in a phased manner

 Project related activities should be avoided during the night time;
 Damage to the natural topography and landscape should be minimized;
 Plantation in surrounding areas;
 Water sprinkling for dust suppression;
 Provision of dust curtains to reduce the dust emission.
 Strict prohibition should be implemented on trapping, hunting or injuring wildlife within
by the subcontractors and should bring a penalty clause under contractual agreements;
 Tree species which are present edge of the project boundary should keep remain alive;
 Plantation of local species for stabilization of the filled in material and plantation in
surrounding areas;
B. Impact on Aquatic Ecosystem
Sources of Impact
 Surface runoff from construction site, discharge of hydro-testing water,

 spillage & leakage of oil and lubricate, from construction site;
 Spillage from River Transportation
Impact Significance
The Dakatia River is located adjacent to the plant boundary. This River will be used as a means of
transport for equipment for the power plant which may disturb the aquatic habitat. Transportation
will be undertaken with the help of barges/trawlers. There is a likelihood of accidental spillage of
oil and other chemicals during transportation/unloading, which may impact on the flora and fauna
of Dakatia River. The spillage may affect the fish habitat hence due care should be exercised to
avoid spill incidences. Based on the matrix below the impact has been considered as Low.

Impact Impact on Aquatic ecosystem
Medium Permanent – no
Term mitigation

Low Medium High
loss of resources
Medium- Medium
low - high
Medium- Medium-
Significance of impact is considered as Very Low
Mitigation measures
The following mitigation measures should be taken to minimize impact on aquatic ecosystem.
 Avoidance of any leakage of fuels and other contaminants from barges/trawlers to Dakatia
River;
 Trawlers/barges with valid requisite licenses and emergency handling capacity or tie-ups
shall only be engaged; and
 Standard codes and practices to be followed during unloading of fuels and construction
material.
 Proper maintenance for avoidance of any leakage of fuels and other contaminants from
barges/trawlers to the Dakatia River;
Impact on aquatic habitat due to construction of temporary Jetty
The requirement for a jetty is primarily for receiving the heavy equipment (engine, Transformer,
construction materials etc.), which could not be able to transport by road. Jetty construction needs
limited scale dragging which may impact on aquatic Habitat. The impact significance on aquatic
habitat due to construction of jetty is calculated as low.

Impact Impact on Aquatic habitat due to construction of Jetty
Impact Scale Dakatia river
Extent and
Project Site Local Regional National Trans boundary
location
Impact Permanent – Permanent – no
Short Term Medium Term Long-term
Duration Mitigated mitigation
Impact
Intensity/ Insignificant Low Medium High Very High
severity
Potential for
irreplaceable
Low Medium High
loss of
resources
Very
Magnitude Insignificant Low Medium-low Medium - high High
High
Probability of
Impact
Very
Impact Very low Low Medium-Low Medium-high High
High
Significance
Significance of impact is considered as low
Mitigation Measures
 Construction workers will be given conservation and awareness training to promote
sustainable resource use.
 Vegetation clearing will be kept to the minimum extent practicable for the temporary jetty
construction
5.4.6 Impact on Traffic

A. Impact on Road Traffic
There is very low impact on the road traffic during construction period of the power plant. The
Chandpur-Faridganj main road is about 500 meter away from the project site and there is no
suitable link road between the project site and the main road. The proponent has no other option
except use River Dakatia to carry construction materials and equipment in the project site. There is
no impact on existing road traffic in the study area during construction period.
B. Impact on River Traffic

During the construction phase of the Project land filling materials, construction materials such as
equipment, construction equipment and machinery will be transported to the site via River Dakatia.
An increase in river traffic is expected as a result of the vessels carrying land filling materials,
construction material, machinery and equipment. However, the extra traffic load during
construction stage is not so high to impose high level impact on the River Traffic. The impact
significance is assessed as low

Impact Increase River traffic in Dakatia River
Impact Scale Dakatia River
Trans
boundary
Permanent Permanent –
Impact Duration Short Term Medium Term Long-term
– Mitigated no mitigation

Low Medium High
loss of resources
Medium- Very
Magnitude Insignificant Low Medium - high High
low High
Medium- Very
Very low Low Medium-high High
Impact Significance Low High
Mitigation Measures
The following steps should be taken to minimize impact due to increasing river traffic.
 Proper signalling light on the vessel at night time to avoid collision
 Barge and vessels should be anchored close to the bank so that they will not impede normal
boat movement
 Vessel movement should not hamper fish cultivation activities in Dakatia River.
 A 24 hours river traffic management plan
5.4.7 Impacts on Community Health and Safety

Source of Impacts
During the construction phase of the project the main sources of impacts on community health and
safety are:
 Influx of workers in project area;

 Increasing water vessels movement
 Changes the environment quality at construction site,
 possible hazardous wastes transport, and
 construction site activity;
 Surface water contamination

Impact Significance
Landfilling activities will generate dust around the project site. However, these emissions are not
expected to significantly affect community health and local asthma incidents. High noise levels are
also expected from the operation of machinery during construction period.
Construction sites are a health and safety nightmare – almost every conceivable hazard exists
within this constantly changing working environment. Unsatisfactory architectural and/or
organizational options or poor planning of the works at the project preparation stage have played a
role in more than half of the occupational accidents occurring on construction sites in the
Community. Community has risks to transmission of sexually transmission diseases due to
interaction with workers and the local community. Activities in construction activities pose low
impact on community health and safety.
Impact Community Health and Safety due to Construction Activities

Impact Scale Adjacent Communities and project workers
Permanent – Permanent – no
Mitigated mitigation
Impact Intensity/
severity
Potential for
Low Medium High
Medium- Medium -
low high

Medium- Medium-
Mitigation Measures
 Ensure proper medical facilities for the workers;

 Undertaking health awareness through training program among workers;
 Avoiding formation of stagnant water pools;
 Educating project personnel, and area residents on risks, prevention, and available treatment
for vector-borne diseases;
5.4.8 Occupational Health and Safety

Source of impact
Potential source of impacts are given below:
 Noise from construction activities

 Impure drinking water
 Accidental injury
 Unhygienic sanitation system
 Congestion in dormitory
Impact Significance
The effect of high noise levels on the operating person has to be considered as this may cause
permanent hear loss. It is known that continuous exposures to high noise levels above 85 dB(A)
affects the hearing acuity of the workers/operators and hence, should be avoided. Pure drinking
water along with proper sanitation system is essential to keep worker in good health. Accidental
injury may happen during construction work. Congestion in workers living place may influence
spread of contagious diseases among the workers. Thus, overall impact significance during
construction phase of the power plant will be Low.
Impact Impact on Occupational health and safety

Impact Scale Within the project location

Low Medium High
loss of resources
Medium -
Magnitude Insignificant Low Medium-low High Very High
high

Medium-
Very low Low Medium-Low High Very High
Impact Significance high
Significance of impact consider low
Mitigation Measures
The following mitigation measures should be taken to minimize impact on occupational health and
safety.
 The Contractor will prepare and implement a Health and Safety Plan prior to commencing
work. This plan will include method statements for working methods, construction
sequence and safety arrangements;
 Measures will be implemented to reduce the likelihood and consequence of the following
hazards:
o falling from height;
o falling into water;
o entanglement with machinery;

o tripping over permanent obstacles or temporary obstructions;
o slipping on greasy or icy walkways;
o falling objects;
o asphyxiation;
o explosion;
o contact with dangerous substances;
o electric shock;
o mistakes in operation;
o variable weather conditions;
o lifting excessive weights; and
o Traffic operations.
 A Permit to Enter system will be established to ensure that only authorized persons gain
entry to the site;
 Competent and adequately resources sub-contractors will be used where construction
activities are to be sub-contracted;
 All persons working on site will be provided information about risks on Site and
arrangements will be made for workers to discuss health and safety with the Contractor;
 All workers will be properly informed, consulted and trained on health and safety issues;
 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) shall be worn at all times on the Site. This shall include
appropriate safety shoes, safety eyewear, and hard hats. Non-slip or studded boots will be
worn to minimize the risk of slips;
 Before starting work all the appropriate safety equipment and the first-aid kit will be
assembled and checked as being in working order. Breathing apparatus will be tested at
regular intervals in the manner specified by the makers;
 All lifting equipment and cranes will be tested and inspected regularly. All hoist ways will
be guarded;
 Safety hoops or cages will be provided for ladders with a height in excess of two metres;
 Where sound levels cannot be reduced at the source, suitable hearing protection will be
provided when noise levels indicate an Leq of more than 90 dB(A).
 The Contractor shall provide appropriate safety barriers with hazard warning signs attached
around all exposed openings and excavations when the work is in progress.
5.4.9 Impacts on Socio-economy
A. Impact on Employment
An extensive number of un-skilled and semi-skilled contractual labour will work during the
construction phase in the project. Also a large number of female workers will get opportunity to

work in the construction phase. Most of the labors will be hired from local community and
neighbouring district based on availability. The construction phase activities will facilitate
intermixing of local workforce (mostly unskilled) with the migrant workforce (mostly skilled). So,
there is a knowledge sharing among the workers. The workers will be more skilled and get more
wages in future. There is a net positive impact in the society due to employment opportunity in the
construction phase of the proposed power plant.
Impact Impact on Employment
Impact Type Direct Indirect Induced
Impact Nature Neutral Negative Positive
Extent and location Local Regional International
Impact Duration Permanent Long-term Short-term Temporary
Impact magnitude Insignificant Low Medium-low Medium-high High Very High
Impact Significance Positive
B. Impact on Local Business
Local enterprises, particularly those involved in the production and sale of construction materials,
material suppliers are potential benefactors of the civil works involved in the project. Local market,
business man and shop owners will also be benefited from the construction activity as a
considerable number of man power will engage this project. The significance of the benefit to local
enterprises is shown in the following table.
Impact Impact on local business

Medium- Medium-
Impact magnitude Insignificant Low High Very High
low high
5.4.10 Impact society due to Labor Influx

The total labor requirement has been estimated approximately 300, it is expected that 30-40% would
be sourced from other parts of Bangladesh. The migrating labor population will primarily consist of
more skilled labor workforce while unskilled workforce would be mostly procured locally through
local contractors. The labor influx will be for short term and they would return back to their home
provinces at the end of construction period. Some construction labor will stay inside the plant area
and maximum number will stay at rented building with proper sanitation facility and security
which is walkway distance from the plant site. Though the location of the labor camp will
significantly reduce the interaction of the migrant labor force with local community, improper
management of labor and human relations, competition for sharing resources and facilities with the
local laborers, disregard for local customs and traditions may cause conflict situations. The influx of

labor also raises other challenges such as health related issues (including sexually transmitted and
communicable diseases), unhygienic conditions in constructed labor camps, strain on local food
produce available in the local markets etc. However, considering the fact that proper
accommodation facilities are provided as part of the project design and also the fact that the total
migrant labor will account for only 30 to 40% of the total workforce of 300 and the severity of the
impacts raised above is expected to be Low.
Impact Impact due to labor influx

Impact Scale Surrounding community will be impacted due to the labor influx
Trans
boundary
Medium Permanent Permanent –
Term – Mitigated no mitigation
Potential for irreplaceable Low Medium High

loss of resources
Medium- Medium - Very
Magnitude Insignificant Low High
low high High
Medium-
Mitigation Measures
The following mitigation measures are proposed to avoid impact due to labor influx:
 Preventing stress on local infrastructure by providing labor related infrastructure such as

camps, sanitation facility, drinking water facility, etc. in accordance with local regulations as
well as IFC handbook for labor accommodation;
 Ensure proper administrative channel to manage labor related statutory compliance, such as
payment of wages, provident fund, insurance etc. as well as labor issues arising during the
construction phase activities;
 Manage illegal labor practices such as child labor, bounded labor or forced labor through
internal vigilance mechanisms and surveillance; and
 Awareness shall be generated amongst migrant laborers in maintaining congenial relations
with local laborers as well as community.
 Engage as many locally available unskilled, semi-skilled and skilled human resource as
practically possible to avoid large scale in migration of labour force;
 Provision of infrastructure and amenities for migrant labour in construction camp to avoid
dependence on limited local resources;

 Adequate sanitation facility at labour camps to maintain hygiene and minimize spread of
diseases;
 Creating awareness about local tradition and culture among outside migrant and
encouraging respect for same;
 Providing awareness training regarding sexually transmitted diseases among the migrant
population;
 Proper disposal of wastes generated from the camp and construction activity to maintain
general hygiene in the area;
5.5 Impact in Operational Phase

Impact intensity on soil, air, water, climate, noise, traffic, ecosystem, health and socio-economy can
be decreased or increased in certain extent based on plant operational activities. Detail impact
analysis can be explored in the following sub-sections.
5.5.1 Impact on soil Quality

Sources of Impact
Soil can be contaminated during operation phase from the following sources:
 Waste from office and kitchen

 Dewatered sludge from the WTP and STP
 Chemical waste generated
 Air filters from the turbines
 Oil spillage from vehicles and chemicals used in this power plant operation
 Waste/used oil from the power house and workshop,
 Oil leakage from storage fuel transmission line
 Oil/dust contaminated cloths and rags from the lube oil system and spill kit waste
The unplanned storage and disposal of wastes may have a direct impact on land and water
resources. The solid and non-hazardous wastes generated from the various areas during operations
will be collected and segregated at the point of generation and stored in proper designated areas
and disposed of through waste disposal contractors or authorized recyclers. These hazardous
wastes, if haphazardly stored, may be incompatible in nature and can result in ignition, generation
of toxic fumes etc. In addition, improper handling, storage and disposal can cause spillage or
leachate generation, which in turn can contaminate the land and ground water.
It is planned that hazardous wastes generated from the proposed Project will be collected and
stored in designated roofed-areas and/or barrels with concrete flooring and secondary containment
and disposed of/ sold through contractors or treated prior to discharge.

Given the controls in place, i.e. segregation measures, collection and disposal by licensed waste
collectors, dedicated storage areas with secondary containment, the impacts during operation as a
result of solid and hazardous waste generation is assessed as Low.
Impact Impact on soil quality during operation phase
Trans
boundary
Term no mitigation

Low Medium High
loss of resources

Impact Significance
Mitigation Measures
In addition to the proper collection, storage and disposal options the following steps will be taken
further to manage hazardous wastes:
 Wastes will be stored in a manner that will prevent contact between incompatible wastes i.e.
post compatibility checks,
 Proper labeling of hazardous wastes;
 Special care will be taken in the storage areas to prevent any spillage of hazardous wastes
and restrict access (except for trained staff) to such areas;
 Periodic audits will be carried out for such areas and containers; also on the segregation and
collection systems and the findings will be documented and appropriate action taken
against irregularities;
 A spill response plan and emergency plan will be prepared to address accidental spillages or
release of hazardous wastes; and
 A proper manifest record will be maintained of waste travelling/ removed from the site.
With proper waste management the impact will be very low.

5.5.2 Impact on Water Resource
Sources of Impact
The potential sources of impact on surface and ground water resources during the operational
phase are:
 The discharge of effluent and sewage from the operational plant that may have an impact on
the quality of surface water;
 Spillage from HFO containing cargos
 Spillage of Chemicals
 The abstraction of ground water for plant operation and drinking purposes for the
employees of the power plant.
A. Impact due to Groundwater Abstraction
The power plant will utilize River water for the power plant operation. Only drinking water will be
abstracted from ground. This requirement of groundwater is insignificant to have any kind of
impact on the groundwater table. The overall significance is therefore assessed as very low.
Impact Impact due to ground water abstraction
Frequency limited to start-up phase
Medium Permanent – no
Term mitigation
Impact Intensity/
severity
Potential for
resources
Probability of
Impact

Impact Significance
Significance of impact is considered as very Low
B. Impact on ground and surface water
Impact Significance
No effluent will be discharged from the power plant. Spillage of oil and lubricant during plant
operation has very small impact on surface and ground water in and around the power plant. The
significance of impact is calculated as very low.

Impact Impact on ground and surface quality due to contamination

Frequency Limited to operational phase
Low Medium High
loss of resources
Medium-
low

Medium-
Mitigation Measures
Some mitigation measure needs to be implemented to keep the impact at minimum level
 Leak proof oil transfer mechanism from oil tanker to oil storage tank
 Sanitary effluent should deposit in septic tank
 Liquid wastes such as waste oil, etc. will be collected and stored for recycling in cemented
areas; and
 All drainage/tanks, etc. will be positioned on concrete hard standing to prevent any seepage
into ground.
 Storm water drainage and waste water of similar nature from different
units will be treated in accordance to GOB Environment Conservation Rule
(1997) Schedule 10 (Standards for Waste from Industrial Units or Project Waste)
and the applicable World Bank Group environmental requirements and
World Bank/IFC guidelines
5.5.3 Impact on Air Quality

Source of Impact
 During operation stage main source of air pollution is engine exhaust gas. The rate of
emission is 110, 089 kg/hr (dry basis) per stack.
 Emission from oil carrier fuel vessels
Types of air pollutants
 SOx, NOx, particulate matters, CO, CO2

Prediction of impacts
To know the intensity of impact is essential to predict air quality at receptor location during
operation of the proposed power plant. Modeling exercise has been performed to estimate ground
level concentration of SOx and NOx around the project site. USEPA approved dispersion modeling
software AERMOD has been used to view the dispersion of the pollutants from the proposed power
plant. AERMET, AERMAP and AERMOD. AERMET is a meteorological pre-processor and uses
hourly surface observations, cloud cover, and upper air parameters from twice-daily vertical
sampling of the atmosphere to create two output files consisting of surface and vertical profile data,
respectively. The terrain pre-processor AERMAP uses Digital Elevation Model (DEM) maps as well
as user generated receptor grids. AERMAP’s output file consists of the x, y locations of each
receptors, mean sea level (MSL) elevation and hill profile parameters.
Model Options: The following regulatory default options were run in AERMOD in this assessment:
 Stack-tip downwash;
 Elevated terrain effects;
 Use of calms processing routine;
 Use of missing data processing routine; and
 No exponential decay
According to base line survey there are few scattered house holds within 200 meter from the power
plant center. Chandpur city belongs to the study area of 5 km redius from the power plant site. The
Project site and its surroundings have been considered as rural area, and therefore, the rural
dispersion coefficient was used in the Model.
Meteorological Data: The input meteorological data for the AERMOD was generated using the
MM5 model, which was downscaled to fine grid data suitable for modelling. The data used in the
study was site specific and was collected over a one year period (2016). In all there were 8760 hours
of meteorological data used in the model. This quantity of data allows an adequate assessment of
hourly, 8-hourly, daily and annual average pollutant concentrations around the Project site.
Terrain Data: Terrain data for the AERMAP model were taken from the 90 m SRTM database, while
land cover data was sourced from satellite imagery of the Project site and its surroundings.
Receptors locations are shown in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2: Receptor Location with Respect to the Project
Sl. Location Station Geographic Elevation Distance Direction from
Code Location* (m) from center plant center
(m)
1. Inside project side AQ1 24°46'3.98"N 5 130 N
89°20'49.58"E
2. In Front of BPDB AQ2 24°46'12.89"N 11 710 W
150 MW Combined 89°20'51.11"E
Cycle Power Plant
3. Besides Chandpur- AQ3 24°46'9.96"N 8 1000 NE
Faridganj Road 89°20'41.09"E
4. Besides Chandpur AQ4 24°45'51.18"N 12 914 NW

Stadium 89°20'43.31"E
*UTM Zone 46Q

Modeling results
Average Annual NOx concentration at ground level receptors are presented in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3: Predicted NOx concentration in the receptor point
Baseline NOx level Predicted NOx level at Bangladesh Standard 1
Receptor (24 hour average) receptor point (Annual Average)
(µg/m3) (Annual Average) (µg/m3)
AQ1 17.72 15.56
AQ2 31.99 27.51
100
AQ3 17.03 27.57
AQ4 15.01 23.81
1 The Bangladesh National Ambient Air Quality Standards have been taken from the Environmental Conservation Rules, 1997 which was
amended on 19July 2005 vide S.R.O. No. 220-Law/2005.
From the model prediction it is observed that ground level NOx at some receptors point will be
increased in comparison to existing 24 hr average level. However, the NOx level at the receptor
point will be within permissible limit set by DoE. 24 hour Max and annual average SO2
concentration at ground level receptors are presented in Table 5-4.
Table 5-4: Predicted SO2 concentration in the receptor point
Predicted SO2 level Bangladesh Standard 1 (µg/m3)
Baseline SO2 level
Receptor ( 24 hr average) Averaging period Averaging period
(µg/m3) 24 hour Annual 24 hour Annual
AQ1 6.15 203.83 16.66
AQ2 7.08 212.58 30.14
365 80
AQ3 6.50 222.17 30.59
AQ4 7.02 281.47 26.17
1 The Bangladesh National Ambient Air Quality Standards have been taken from the Environmental Conservation Rules, 1997 which was
amended on 19July 2005 vide S.R.O. No. 220-Law/2005.
Present SO2 status at the receptors will be drastically increased due to the operation of the power
plant. However, the predicted SO2 level value is below Bangladesh Air Quality standard for SO 2
which is set as 80 for a µg/m3 for annual average and 365 µg/m3 for daily average. AERMOD
model has been run for 1 hour, 24 hour and annual average time for the power plant NOx and SO 2
emission. The generated contour maps from the model output are given in Annex-K.
Predicted maximum NOx and SO2 concentration in various distances from the power plant due to
operation of the power plant is given in Table 5-5.
Table 5-5: Maximum NOx and SO2 concentration in various distances from the power plant
Feature Name of the Averaging Distance from the Power plant stack ( meter)
component time 200 400 600 800 1000
Ground level NOx (µg/m3) Annual 20 36 61 53 48
concentration
SO2 24 hour 200 256 341 360 327
(µg/m3)
(µg/m3) Annual 17 39 58 40 32
Source: AERMOD model dispersion modeling analysis

Impact Significance
Air quality in four receptors location is within the acceptable level as per guideline values of DoE.
The proposed power plant will have sufficient stack height to disperse air pollutants avoiding
surrounding buildings, so that there is no chance to build up excess pollutants near the project site.
The impact significance on the ambient air quality due to power plant operation is low.
Impact Ambient Ai Quality due to operation of the power plant
Impact Scale Maximum impact zone would be confined to 3km from Project Site
Frequency Throughout the project lifecycle
Trans
boundary
Medium Permanent – Permanent –
Term Mitigated no mitigation

Low Medium High
loss of resources
Mediu Mediu
m-low m - high
Medium- Medium-
Mitigation Measures
The following mitigation measures should be taken to control air quality around the project site
 Fuel should have low sulfur content
 Ensure excess oxygen to ensure complete combustion in the engine
 Green belt development around the project site
 Air quality monitoring
 Maintain equipment and engine regularly
 Sufficient stack height to disperse air pollutant above the local area
5.5.4 Impact on climate due to Green House Gas Emissions

The Kyoto Protocol – United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change nominates the
following GHGs:
 Carbon dioxide (CO2);

 Methane (CH4);
 Nitrous Oxide (N2O);
 Hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs); and
 Perfluorocarbons (PFCs).

Inventories of GHG emissions can be calculated using published emission factors. Different gases
have different greenhouse warming effects (referred to as warming potentials) and emission factors
take into account the global warming potentials of the gases created during combustion. Typically,
greenhouse gas emissions are reported in units of carbon dioxide equivalent (CO2e). Gases are
converted to CO2e by multiplying by the gas global warming potential (GWP). The GWP of gases
are as follows3:
 GWP for CO2 = 1

 GWP for CH4 = 21
 GWP for N2O = 310
When the global warming potentials are applied to the estimated emissions then the resulting
estimate is referred in terms of CO2-equivalent (CO2e) emissions.
Operation of HFO fired power plant

The combustion of fuel oil produces GHG emissions. The amount of GHGs emitted by a HFO fired
power plant is a measure of its contribution to global warming and can be estimated based on fuel
consumption. In order to estimate GHG emissions, the IFC recommended Carbon Emission
Estimation Tool (CEET model-Version February 2014) 4 has been used. Results from CEET model is
given in
Table 5-6 below.
Table 5-6: Estimated GHG Emissions from the Plant

SL Particular Value Unit
A Per Hour Fuel Consumption (HFO) 33.12 Ton/hour
B Operating Days 350 days
C Daily Operating Hours 24 Hours/day
D Annual Fuel Consumption (= A x B x C) 2,78,208 Ton/year
E Annual GHG Emission 8,72,744 tCO2e/year
F* GHG emission rates
CO2 3.127 tCO2/ton fuel
CH4 0.000121 tCH4/ton fuel
N2O 0.000024 tN2O/ton fuel
*Based on GHG emission factors provided in CEET.
Based on the HFO requirement for the proposed project, it is anticipated that the annual GHG
emission from the plant will be 8, 72,744 (tCO2e/year). It is evident from
Table 5-6 that the estimated GHG emissions from the power plant while using HFO as primary fuel
will exceed the threshold of both ADB SPS (100,000 tons CO 2e per year) and IFC PS3 (25,000 tons
CO2e per year) that define them as significant GHG emission sources. Therefore, the Project is
required to report annual GHG emissions. Considering this fact, the GHG emission impact will be
medium low.
3 Source: Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) (1995), Second Assessment Report
4 http://www.ifc.org/wps/wcm/connect/Topics_Ext_Content/IFC_External_Corporate_Site/CB_Home/Measuring+Reporting/

Impact Impact on climate due to greenhouse gas emissions
Impact Scale impact zone will be regional/national
Frequency Limited to operation phase

Trans
boundary
Term no mitigation
Impact Intensity/
severity
Potential for
Low Medium High

Impact Significance
Significance of impact is considered as medium low
Mitigation Measures
The following mitigation measures will minimise GHG emissions to ALARP levels:
 Continuous monitoring and recording of CO2 emission from the stacks through CEMS.
 Ensure that all equipment and machinery is maintained in accordance with manufacturer’s
specifications; and
 Improved efficiency of auxiliary drives.
5.5.5 Impact on Ambient Noise

Source of Impact
Major sources of noise during operation of the proposed power plant are:
 Engine noise and vibration

 Exhaust gas outlet noise emission
 Noise from Co-generator
 Pumps, cooling fans
Noise Level Guidelines
Ministry of Environment, Bangladesh has set standard for noise level for different area of use. Noise
standard as per Bangladesh Noise Control Act 2006 is presented in Table 5-7.

Table 5-7: Noise standard for Bangladesh
Decibel dB(A) Leq
Sl no Category of area/zone
Day Time Night Time
1 Silent zone 50 40
2 Residential Area 55 45
3 Mixed zone 60 50
4 Commercial Area 70 60
5 Industrial Area 75 70
1Daytime is defined as the period 6.00am-9.00 pm and night-time is defined as the period 9.00pm-6.00am.
International Finance Corporation (IFC) has also set EHS guidelines for ambient noise level. EHS
noise guidelines of IFC are given Table 5-8 below.
Table 5-8: IFC noise level guidelines

Receptor One Hour LAeq (dBA)
Daytime 07:00 - 22:00 Nighttime 22:00 - 07:00
Residential; institutional;
55 45
educational
Industrial; commercial 70 70
Prediction of Impacts
Methodology:
The environmental noise prediction model Sound PLAN 7.4 was used for modeling noise emissions
from the power plant operation. The major noise sources are Engines, Charge air Intake, Exhaust
gas outlet, CO generator turbine, cooling radiator fan. Noise generated from these sources is given
in Table 5-9 below.
Table 5-9: Noise generated from major sources at DECPCL power plant
Source Noise Level dB(A) Noise Attenuation using Net noise intensity
insulation and silencers dB(A)
Engine 110 30 80
Charge air Intake 120 40 80
Exhaust gas outlet 123 25 90
CO generator turbine 95 35 60
Day time Night time
Radiator fans 70 65
Noise escape from the engine hall is 80 dB(A), from co-generator turbine noise release 60 dB(A).
Noise generated in charge air intake is 80 dB(A) and exhaust gas out let is 90 dB(A). We have
assumed radiator fan speed is decreased by 20% during night time and noise generation from fan

decreased by 5 dB(A).Operation of equipment with 100% usage scenario was modeled to cover the
operation phase of the Project. As a conservative approach to the assessment, atmospheric
absorption during sound transmission was not included in the assessment. In addition, to represent
a worst-case scenario for the assessment, all equipment was assumed to be operating
simultaneously. In order to assess the impact on noise reflection/ barrier due to the structures,
buildings within the power plant complex and boundary wall have been taken into consideration.
Noise contour map
Based on the noise propagation from the power plant noise contour map has been prepared using
the modeling tool. Day and night time noise contour map for the power plant is shown in Figure 5-1
and Figure 5-2 respectively. Predicted noise level in the receptors point during operation of the
power plant is presented in Table 5-10.
Table 5-10: Predicted Noise Levels at Receptors during operation of DECPCL power plant
Baseline Predicted Total Sound
Sound Sound Pressure Applicable
Distance World Bank
Pressure Pressure Level Standard,
Category of from Standard3
Levels at Levels at (Baseline + dB(A) 2 as per
Receptor Area/ plant (dB(A))
Receptors, Receptors, Predicted), Land use
Receptor center
Leq (dBA)1 Leq (dBA) Leq (dBA)
point
Leqd Leqn Leqd Leqn Leqd Leqn Leqd Leqn Leqd Leqn
NL1 Industrial 132 54.7 43.8 61.5 61.2 62.33 61.28 75 70 70 70
NL2 Residential 299 54.8 42.1 51.8 51.7 56.57 52.15 55 45 55 45
NL3 Silent 679 53.8 42.9 43.3 43.2 54.21 46.36 50 40 -- --
NL4 Residential 369 51.4 41.8 47.3 47.2 52.81 49.21 70 60 55 45
NL5 Industrial 727 53.6 44.6 41.8 41.6 53.86 46.36 75 70 70 70
NL6 Silent 391 53.3 43.7 48.2 47.8 54.47 51.12 50 40 -- --
NL7 Mixed 452 53.5 44.2 46.6 46.3 54.32 50.12 60 50 -- --
NL8 Commercial 1163 65.3 58.6 37 36.8 65.29 58.63 70 60 -- --

1) Ambient noise levels as monitored during the baseline survey
2) Environmental Conservation Rules, 1997 (Schedule 4) amended September 7, 2006
3) IFC/World Bank, General EHS Guidelines

Figure 5-1: Noise contour map for DECPCL power plant operation during day time (Leq day)

Figure 5-2: Noise contour map for DECPCL power plant operation during night time (Leq Night)

Impact Significance
Predicted noise level at the receptors during operation phase is most of the case within limiting
value set by DoE. Few places may experience 2-3 dB (A) excess noise than the present noise level
during operation of the power plant. The calculated impact significance is Low.
Impact Impact on ambient noise level due to operation

Frequency Limited to operational phase
Low Medium High
loss of resources

Very low Low Medium- Medium-high High Very High
Mitigation Measures:
Noise level in the proposed power plant can be controlled to a tolerable limit by implementing
following mitigation measures:
 Install noise attenuation provisions such as air intake silencers and acoustic insulation
around noisy equipment
 Comply with the noise emission criteria as per the Schedule 4 of ECR 1997; Noise Pollution
(Control) Rules, 2006
 Monitor ambient noise levels in and around the Project site as per the
Environment Monitoring Program formulated for the project which will comply with
National Regulatory requirements.
 Selection of equipment with lower sound power levels (< 85 dB);
 Buildings will be designed with improved acoustic performance and sound insulation will
be provided;
 Installation of acoustic barriers without gaps and with a continuous
minimum surface density in order to minimize the transmission of sound through the
barriers.
 Installation of vibration isolation for mechanical equipment
 Green belt development
 Avoid the unnecessary use of alarms, horns and sirens
With proper mitigation measures impact will be very low

5.5.6 Impact on Ecosystem
A. Impact on Terrestrial Ecosystem
Source of Impact
 Emission from operational plant
 Illumination, noise and vibration at site

Impact significance
Emission from the operational plant, illumination, noise and vibration from the power plant site
may cause disturbance to the local fauna. The nature of the impact is negative and direct. The
impact can happen during the entire life cycle of the project and can be assigned as long term. The
impact will be mainly on the immediate project area thus of extent would be local. Thus the impact
magnitude on terrestrial flora and fauna is small. Impact calculated as low.
Impact Impact on terrestrial ecosystem during operation of the plant

Frequency Limited to operation Phase
Extent and location Project Site Local Regional National Trans
boundary
Impact Duration Short Term Medium Long-term Permanent – Mitigated Permanent –
Term no mitigation
Potential for irreplaceable Low Medium High

loss of resources

Impact Significance Very low Low Medium-Low Medium-high High Very High
Mitigation Measures
The mitigation measures are as follows
 Preparation of Green Belt Management Plan and its strict implementation

within the project site and immediate surrounding areas;
B. Impact on Aquatic Ecosystem
Source of Impact
 Contamination from oily water discharge

 Movement of HFO vessels

Impact significance
The impact extent is local as the as the impacts are likely to happen near the project footprint. The
impact duration in long term, impact scale will be medium as the impact will be reversible and
likely to have minor change over baseline in due course of time. Impact magnitude thus assessed is
low. Based on the table below the impact on aquatic habitat is assed as low.
Impact Impact on aquatic ecosystem due to operation of the powe plant
Frequency Limited to operation Phase

Low Medium High
loss of resources

Impact Significance
5.5.7 Impacts on Community Health and Safety

Source of Impacts
During the operation phase of the project the main sources of impacts on community health and
safety are:
 Noise from the power plant

 Vehicular movement
 Gaseous emission from the power plant
 Accidental release of HFO / Diesel from oil tanker or storage tank
Impact Significance
As proper mitigation measures are taken to minimize the hazard from the power plant, the
community people will not be in vulnerable condition during operation of the power plant. The
impact significance will be low during operation of the power plant.

Impact Community Health and Safety due to Construction Activities
Impact Scale Adjacent Communities and project workers
Trans
boundary
Permanent –
Impact Duration Short Term Medium Term Long-term Permanent – Mitigated
no mitigation
Low Medium High
loss of resources
Magnitude Insignificant Low Medium-low Medium - High Very High
high

Impact Significance
Mitigation Measures
 Monitoring emission from the power plant
 Green belt development
 Regular inspection of the oil tanker and storage tank
 Proper maintenance of the power plant equipment
Implementing proper mitigation measures the impact will be very low
5.5.8 Impact on Occupational health and safety

The operation and maintenance of the power plant will have risks of industrial accidents and
fatalities for workers. Both direct employees and Contractors would be exposed to such risks. The
impact significance will be low.
Impact Impact on occupational health and safety

Low Medium High
loss of resources

Impact Significance

Mitigation Measures
In order to minimize the risk of industrial accidents and fatalities to workers during operations, the
following mitigation measures are proposed:
 On job training for the workers shall be carried out;

 Work permit system shall be followed;
 PPE shall be provided and use of PPEs shall be enforced;
 SOPs need to be developed for operation and maintenance of the Plant;
With the implementation of mitigation measure impact will be very low.
5.5.9 Impact of Traffic

A. Impact on Road Traffic
There is very low impact on the road traffic during construction period of the power plant. The
Chandpur-Faridganj main road is about 500 meter away from the project site and there is no
suitable link road between the project site and the main road. The proponent has no other option
except use River Dakatia to carry construction materials and equipment in the project site. There is
no impact on existing road traffic in the study area during construction period.
B. Impact on River Traffic
During the Operation phase of the Project HFO fuel will be transported to the site via River Dakatia.
Daily 1-2 lightarage vessel will unload oil in the DECPCL storage tank. Dakatia river traffic is not
busy in the study area. So, 1 or 2 new vessel has very low impact on the Dakatia River traffic.
However, this ship may increase river traffic in the Meghna River. The overall impact on river
traffic due to the operation of the power plant will be very low.
Impact Increase River traffic in Dakatia River

Impact Scale Dakatia River
Medium Long- Permanent – Permanent – no
Impact Duration Short Term
Term term Mitigated mitigation
Low Medium High
loss of resources
Medium -
Magnitude Insignificant Low Medium-low High Very High
high
Medium- Medium-

Mitigation Measures
The following steps should be taken to minimize impact due to increasing river traffic.
 Proper signalling light on the vessel at night time to avoid collision
 Barge and vessels should be anchored close to the bank so that they will not impede normal
boat movement
 Vessel movement should not hamper fish cultivation activities in Dakatia River.
 A 24 hours river traffic management plan
5.5.10 Impacts on Socio-Economy
A. Impact on Employment
The power plant will create job facilities for the local people. It will be a positive impact on the
society.
Impact Impact on Employment
Impact magnitude Insignificant Low Medium-low Medium-high High Very High
B. Impact on Local Business

There is bloom in the local business due to the operation of the power plant. Many new shops will
be set up around the power plant. Local people also supply much necessary maintenance
equipment in the power plant.
Impact Impact on local business

Medium-
Impact magnitude Insignificant Low Medium-high High Very High
low

5.6 Environmental Impact due to power transmission line
Transmission line construction is mandatory by the proponent to evacuate power through 132 kV
Chandpur-Chowmuhoni double circuit line. The hook point is within the power plant boundary.
The proponent needs to make LILO system to transmit power to the grid line. As there is no need to
construct transmission line outside the power plant area the impact for transmission line is
negligible.
Impact Significance
With reference to the proposed power plant base line environmental data transmission line will
impose negligible impact on physical and social during construction and operation phase.
Impact Impact on Environment due to construction and operation of High Voltage Transmission Line
Impact Scale Within plant boundery
Frequency Entire life of the power plant including construction phase
Medium Long- Permanent – no
Impact Duration Short Term Permanent – Mitigated
Term term mitigation
Low Medium High
loss of resources
Insignifica
Magnitude Low Medium-low Medium - high High Very High
nt
Impact Significance Very low Low Medium-Low Medium-high High Very High
Mitigation Measures
Following mitigation measures should be taken to minimize impact on environment due to
construction and operation of the power transmission line to evacuate electricity to national grid
line.
 The contractor will judiciously limit vegetation clearing in the line corridor to avoid
excessive and unnecessary loss of trees outside the line corridor.
 The contractor will take due care to avoid excessive sediment migration into surface
watercourses.
 No waste will be dumped in watercourses.
 Project vehicles will have a restricted speed limit of 40 kph through settlements and trading
centers to minimize road dust.
 Line construction workers will be provided appropriate safety gear for protection against
excessive noise and dust emissions.
 All waste generated at a given construction location will be collected in appropriate
containers and disposed as per standard procedure
 Transmission lines must meet the requirements of the international standard

5.7 Impact due to Approach Road
The Chandpur-Faridganj Road is about 500 meters away from the power plant site. The proponent
needs to construct an approach road to connect with main road network.The approach road and
surrounding features is shown in Figure 5-3.
Plant boudery with apprach road Low land in and around the approach road
Figure 5-3: Approach road and surrounding features
About 100 meter approach road will be constructed to connect the power plant main entrance with
nearby local road which is connected with main road. The source of impact due to construction of
the approach road will be:
 Impede water flow ;

 Vegetation clearance;
 Dust generation during land filling
 Noise and emission from land filling vehicles
Impact significance
There is no settlement in the approach road area. This connecting road will temporarily block water
flow in the surrounding low land. There is no tree on the proposed approach road. During land
filling small amount of dust may generate. The scale of the impact will be within 50 meters from the
plant site. Duration of the impact will be short term. The impact intensity will be low. The impact
significance due to the approach road of the power plant will be very low.

Impact Impact on Environment due to approach road of the power plant
Impact Scale within 50 meters from power plant
Frequency Entire life of the power plant including construction phase
Permanent – Permanent – no
Mitigated mitigation
Impact Intensity/
severity
Potential for
resources
Probability of
Impact
Impact Significance
Mitigation Measures
The following steps should be taken to minimize impact on environment due to the approach road.
 Sufficient tree plantation to replenish loss of trees besides the highway

 Restricting heights from which materials are dropped as far as practicable, to minimize the
fugitive dust arising from unloading/loading;
 Effective water sprays should be used to control potential dust emission sources;
 Cover haul vehicles carrying dusty materials moving outside the construction site;
 Limit the idling time of vehicles not more than 2 minutes;
 Set up proper drainage system underneath the approach road
 Proper traffic management system to synchronize safe entry of vehicle from the highway to
approach road and vice versa.

6 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES
6.1 Introduction
This chapter discusses the alternative considerations that have been studied before finally
proposing the present project. The alternatives can be considered for the following major issues:
 Requirement of the proposed project to meet the power demand;
 Selection of the proposed site;
 Selection of the project configurations and technology.

The above issues are discussed below.
6.2 The No Build Scenario

From a purely physical environmental point of view, the ‘do-nothing’ is preferable to any project
implementation, since it would avoid creation of any of the adverse impacts associated with the
project. However, the potential socio-economic benefits to the nation would be foregone, energy
security and industrial growth would be hampered by going for this option.
It is concluded that the ‘No build’ alternative is unacceptable and the potential socio-economic
benefits of implementation of such project far outweigh the adverse impacts which are minor and
temporary can be controlled and minimized to an acceptable level.
6.3 Consideration of Alternatives

Due to land scarcity in the country, seeking an alternative site for establishing the power plant area
is quite difficult. Also, land acquisition is a lengthy and complex procedure under the existing Land
Acquisition Law of Bangladesh (LA Ordinance 1982). Not only that, the project conceptual
development over alternative sites is quite difficult because delay in overall land acquisition process
might create social conflicts and risks for the project.
To avoid or minimize the impacts resulting from the activities of the project, CPRL authority is
expected to adopt appropriate technological design, improvements or adjustments, policy including
good site operational practices and applicable EMP, etc. The overall strategy shall follow the
following sequence:
 Impact avoidance or minimization;
 Adequate Compensation where impacts are unavoidable;
 Enhancement Measures-Employment benefits enhancement measures proposed by the

consultants.

7 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
(ESMP)
7.1 Introduction
The Environment and Social Management Plan (ESMP) for the Project has been developed with an
aim to avoid, reduce, mitigate, or compensate for adverse environmental and social impacts/risks
and to propose enhancement measures. This includes:
 mitigation of potentially adverse impacts;
 monitoring of impacts and mitigation measures during different Project phases of

implementation and operation;
 integration of the ESMP with Project planning, design, construction and operation;
 institutional capacity building and training; and
 compliance to statutory requirements;

The ESMP for the project will also align with the IFC Performance standard and Equator Principle
Guideline.
7.2 Mitigation Measures

Key environmental and social impacts have been identified and reported in Chapter 5 along with
mitigation measures. A summary of mitigation measures identified for the construction1 and
operation phases of the Project in chapter 5. This also identifies lead responsibility for implementing
the mitigation measures and sources of funds for such implementation. Many of the mitigation
measures suggested during the construction phase of the Project are associated with good
construction and housekeeping practices and are also included within the “Specification Manual for
Construction Contractor” prepared by DECPCL for EPC contractor. Most of the mitigation measures
for the operation phase (such as those for air emissions and noise generation) of the Project are
already incorporated into the Project design specifications.
The construction phase of the Project is anticipated to last approximately 270 days. However, the
design life of the Project is 15 years and DECPCL will be responsible for ensuring that the
mitigation measures in the ESMP are implemented throughout the life span of the Project. A
summary of mitigation measures identified for the construction and operation phases of the project
is presented in Table 7-1 and Table 7-2.

Table 7-1: Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP) for Construction Phase of the Project
Responsibility
Project Stage/ Responsibility
Proposed Impacts for supervision Reporting Source of
SL Affected Project Activity Proposed Mitigation Measures for Mitigation
of mitigation Requirements mitigation cost
Aspect Implementation
implementation
A Environmental Issue Associated with site Preparation and Construction

Soil compaction
1.1 Soil Quality Site clearing and  Demarcation of routes for movement of EPC Contractor DECPCL/HSE Route plans and EPC Contractor
preparation, heavy vehicles especially top soil Cost
management
 Striping and placing soils when dry, and inventory
not when wet, and submitted to HSE
and Project
 Restricting the height of topsoil stockpiles Management team
to minimize compaction of DECPCL
Soil and sediment
1.2 Soil and Fueling and  Preparation of guidelines and procedures Appointed EPC DECPCL/HSE Plans submitted to EPC Contractor
sediment operation of contamination Contractor HSE division for Cost
for immediate clean-up actions following
Quality heavy machinery through spills and approval and
any spillages of oil, fuel or chemicals;
and transport leaks monthly reports to
vehicles,  Development of a site-specific Emergency DECPCL
Unloading and Response Plan for soil clean-up and
loading activities decontamination;
 Implementation of a training program

to familiarize staff with emergency
procedures and practices related to
contamination events;
 Storage areas for oil, fuel and chemicals to

be surrounded by bunds or other
containment devices to prevent any
spilled oil, fuel or chemicals from
contaminating soils, sediment, water or
groundwater;
 Fuel tanks and chemical storage areas to

be provided with locks to prevent
unauthorized access;

Responsibility
implementation
 Use of spill or drip trays to contain spills

and leaks, and use of spill control kits to
clean small spills and leaks;
1.3 Soil Quality Storage, handling Soil contamination  Design processes to prevent/minimize Appointed EPC On site Project Half yearly report EPC Contractor
and disposal of quantities of wastes generated and hazards Contractor Management by 3rd party Cost
construction associated with the waste generated; team and Organization to
waste designated HSE DECPCL
 Implement a construction materials team of DECPCL
inventory management system to minimize
over-supply of which lead the construction
materials, may the end of the disposal of
the surplus at construction period;
 Properly store construction materials to

minimize the potential for damage or
contamination of the materials;
 Segregate hazardous and non-hazardous

waste and provide appropriate containers
for the waste types generated (e.g. enclosed
bins for putrescible materials to avoid
attracting pests and vermin and to
minimize dour nuisance);
 Store wastes in closed containers away

from direct sunlight, wind and rain;
 Provide enough space to allow for

inspection between waste containers so as
to identify any leaks or spills;
 Ensure storage areas have impermeable

floor and containment, of capacity to
accommodate 110% of the volume of
the
Responsibility
implementation
largest waste container;
 Storage of concrete and bitumen waste in a

lay down area near the concrete batching
plant and reuse of these wastes under
floors or roads; and
 Dispose of waste by licensed contractors.
2.1 Water  Wastewater Wastewater  Vehicle servicing areas and wash bays Appointed EPC On site Project Quarterly report by EPC Contractor
Resources Discharge from contamination located within roofed and cemented Contractor Management 3rd party Cost
washing of areas. team and Organization to
equipment and designated HSE DECPCL
machinery  The drainage in these covered areas team of DECPCL
 Sanitary connected to oil/water separator and
facilities channelized properly to the land/inland
waters;
2.2 Surface Water  Leaks and spills Surface water
Quality of oil, contamination
 Oil leakage or spillage contained and
lubricants, fuel cleaned up immediately. Waste oil to be
 Improper collected and stored for recycling or
handling of disposal;
sewage or
chemical
 Oil and grease separator shall be used
for wastewater generated from cleaning
activities;
 Any surplus wastewater from the concrete

batching to be treated to comply with
discharge standards before it is discharged
to Dakatia River;
 Adequate sanitary facilities, i.e. toilets and

showers, provided for the construction
workforce;
 Workers trained in the use of designated

Responsibility
implementation
areas/bins for waste disposal and
encouraged to use toilets.
 Septic tanks provided to treat sanitary

wastewater; and all sewage and liquid
effluent treated to meet the standards
specified in Schedules 9 and 10 of the ECR,
1997 respectively and IFC EHS Guidelines
prior to discharge to Dakatia River
3.1 Air Quality  Site preparation Dust generation  Implementation of a regular and rigorous Appointed EPC On site Project Quarterly report by EPC Contractor
and Contractor Management 3rd party Cost
watering and sprinkling regime for dust
levelling; suppression during the dry season; team and Organization to
 Excavation of designated HSE DECPCL
soil to create  Maintain the maximum possible distance team of DECPCL
building and between stockpiles and receptors;
equipment
foundations;  Cover and/or water spray all stockpiles of
 Pile driving for dusty materials such as excavated spoils,
the equipment loose construction material piles to avoid
foundation; fugitive dust;
 Concrete works
 During construction, the access road will
 Transportation be regularly maintained to keep it clean,
related free from mud and slurry.
activities
 Material transport will be totally enclosed
with impervious sheeting and wheel
washing will be carried out at site.
 No waste will be burnt on or around the

Project site.
3.2 Air Quality  Operation of Exhaust Emissions  A speed limit of 20 km/hr will be enforced Appointed EPC On site Project Quarterly report by EPC Contractor
heavy on the construction site/access road; Contractor Management 3rd party Cost
machinery and team and Organization to
transport  Regularly maintain all diesel-powered designated HSE

Responsibility
implementation
vehicles equipment and reduce idling time to avoid team of DECPCL DECPCL
 Operation of emissions of NOx, PM 10 and SO2;
DG sets
 Where available use low Sulphur diesel
(LSD) in diesel powered equipment;
 Implement best practice procedures to

control vehicle / equipment air emissions
(such as turning off equipment when not in
use); and
 Vehicle / equipment exhausts observed to

be emitting significant black smoke from
their exhausts will be serviced/ replaced.
 Checking fitness certificate of vehicles
4.1 Noise  Heavy Increase in ambient  Normal working hours of the contractor Appointed EPC On site Project Monthly report by EPC Contractor
machinery noise levels Contractor Management 3rd party Cost
will be between 06:00 and 21:00 hours from
operations for Saturday to Thursday. If work needs to be team and Organization to
construction undertaken outside these hours, it should designated HSE DECPCL
works be limited to activities that do not lead to team of DECPCL
 Transportation exceedance of the noise criteria at nearby
related residential area;
activities
 Pilling activities  Only well-maintained equipment should
be operated on-site;
 Regular maintenance of equipment

including lubricating moving parts,
tightening loose parts and replacing
worn out components should be
conducted;
 Machines and construction plant items

(e.g. trucks) that may be in intermittent
use should be shut down or throttled
down
Responsibility
implementation
between work periods;
 Low noise equipment should be used as far

as practicable;
 The number of equipment operating

simultaneously should be reduced as far as
practicable;
 Equipment known to emit noise strongly

in one direction should be orientated so
that the noise is directed away from nearby
residential area as far as practicable;
 Noise enclosures should be erected around

stationary equipment;
6.1 Occupational General Health and safety  The Contractor will prepare and Appointed EPC On site Project Monthly report by EPC Contractor
Health and construction of construction implement a Health and Safety Plan Contractor Management 3rd party Cost
Safety activities workforce prior to commencing work. This plan team and Organization to
will include method statements for designated HSE DECPCL
working team of DECPCL
methods, plant utilization, construction
sequence and safety arrangements;
 Measures will be implemented to

reduce the likelihood and consequence
of the following hazards:
o falling from height;

o falling into water;
o entanglement with machine;
o tripping over permanent obstacles or
temporary obstructions;
o slipping on greasy walkways;
o falling objects;
o asphyxiation;
o explosion;
Responsibility
implementation
o contact with dangerous substances;
o electric shock;
o variable weather conditions;
o lifting excessive weights; and
o Traffic operations.
 A Permit to Enter system will be

established to ensure that only authorized
persons gain entry to the site;
 Competent and adequately resources sub-

contractors will be used where
construction activities are to be sub-
contracted;
 All persons working on site will be

provided information about risks on Site
and arrangements will be made for
workers to discuss health and safety
with the Contractor;
 The Contractor will prepare and

implement a Health and Safety Plan
prior to commencing work. This plan
will include method statements for
working methods, plant utilization,
construction sequence and safety
arrangements;
 All workers will be properly informed,

consulted and trained on health and safety
issues;
 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) shall

be worn at all times on the Site. This shall
include appropriate safety shoes, safety
eyewear, and hard hats. Non-slip or
studded boots will be worn to minimize
Responsibility
implementation
the risk of slips;
 Women in the region generally wear

“sarees”, which is not appropriate while
working in hazard prone construction
areas. If women will be working in the
hazard prone areas, then the contractor
needs to ensure proper outfit and PPEs.
 Before starting work all the appropriate

safety equipment and the first-aid kits will
be assembled and checked as being in
working order. Breathing apparatus will
be tested at regular intervals in the manner
specified by the manufacturer;
 All lifting equipment and cranes will be

tested and inspected regularly. All hoist
ways will be guarded;
 All scaffolding will be erected and

inspected in conformity with the Factories
Act and the appropriate records
maintained by the Contractor;
 Safety hoops or cages will be provided for

ladders with a height in excess of two
meters;
 When there is a risk of drowning lifebelts

shall be provided and it shall be ensured
that personnel wear adequate buoyancy
equipment or harness and safety lines, and
that rescue personnel are present when
work is proceeding;

Responsibility
implementation
 All breathing apparatus, safety harnesses,

life- lines, reviving apparatus and any
other equipment provided for use in, or in
connection with, entry into Confined
Spaces, and for use in emergencies, will be
properly maintained and thoroughly
examined at least once a month, and after
every occasion on which it has been used;
 Where sound levels cannot be reduced at

the source, suitable hearing protection will
be provided when noise levels indicate a
Leq of more than 85 dB (A). When hearing
protection is used, arrangements will be
made to ensure the wearers can be warned
of other hazards; and
 The Contractor shall provide appropriate

safety barriers with hazard warning signs
attached around all exposed openings and
excavations.
6.2 Occupational Changes Health of  Provision of clean drinking water in Appointed EPC On site Project Monthly report by EPC Contractor
Health and to/existing construction accordance with Schedule 3 (b) of ECR, Contractor Management 3rd party Cost
Safety environmental workforce 1997; team and Organization to
designated HSE DECPCL
team
6.3 Occupational Labor and  Working  The EPC contractor will comply with the Appointed EPC On site Project Monthly report by EPC Contractor
Health and working conditions IFC Performance Standard 2 for labor and Contractor Management 3rd party Cost
Safety conditions working conditions; team and Organization to
 Terms of designated HSE DECPCL
employment  No child and/or forced labor will be team of DECPCL
 Child/ forced employed by the EPC contractor and its
labor sub-contractors; and

Responsibility
implementation
 Working conditions and terms of

employment will be fully compliant to
the Bangladesh labor laws.
7.1 Terrestrial  Site preparation Clearance of  Construction schedule to be managed Project On site Project Visual Inspection Project
Ecosystem and related shrubs, herbs and management HSE by HSE developer cost
such that the foundation work is not done
activities weeds and appointed Management Management of and EPC
during monsoon season;
EPC Contractor Team of DECPCL Contractor Cost
 Strict instruction shall be given to the DECPCL
construction workers not to cut trees from
the nearby areas for their kitchen fuel and
timber use;
 Use of LPG/ Kerosene for cooking need

to be provided/ encouraged in order to
reduce the impacts on vegetation from the
vicinity of the Project site;
 Construction workers shall be given

conservation and awareness training
to promote sustainable resource use;
8.1 Aquatic  Leakages and Impact on habitat  Conservation training shall be given and a Project On site Project Visual Inspection Project
Ecosystem Discharges of aquatic and ban on hunting, capture of species by any Management HSE by HSE Developer Cost
of chemicals reverence fauna contractor/subcontractor/construction along with hired Management Management of and EPC
 Construction of due to accidental worker working on water pipeline, specialists and Team of DECPCL Contractor Cost
temporary jetty spillage including logistics contractor not Appointed EPC DECPCL
 Leakages and complying being immediately removed Contractor
Discharges from the project;
from River
Transportation  Proper maintenance for avoidance of any
leakage of fuels and other contaminants
from barges/trawlers to Dakatia River;
 Standard codes and practices to be
followed during unloading of fuels and

Responsibility
implementation
construction material;
 Provision of barriers/control walls at

construction material storage areas to
avoid contamination by surface runoff.
 Avoidance of any leakage of fuels and

other contamination from Barge/trawlers
to Dakatia River;
9.1 Transportation  Transportation Disturbance to  Avoiding peak hours for heavy vehicles Project company, On site Project Visual Inspection EPC Contractor
of construction existing movement where possible; Appointed EPC HSE by HSE Cost
material, and road users through Contractor Management Management of
personnel increase in road  During transportation of heavy equipment, Team of DECPCL
traffic the speed limit needs to be maintained by DECPCL
all heavy vehicles;
 Regular maintenance of vehicles to avoid

break downs leading to congestions;
 Training and awareness amongst driver’s

to encourage systematic parking, following
traffic rules, preventing unnecessary
stoppages and overtaking.
B Social Issues Associated with the Construction Phase

1.1 Community General Stress on existing  Reuse water where possible; Project company, On site Project Visual Inspection EPC Contractor
Health and construction water resources Appointed EPC Management by HSE Cost
Safety activities  Assess the potential effect of groundwater Contractor team and Management of
abstraction for plant operation and designated HSE DECPCL
drinking water using field testing and team of DECPCL
modelling techniques, and accounting for
seasonal variability and project changes in

Responsibility
implementation
demand in the Project area over the
construction period; and
1.2 Community  General  Health Impacts  Barriers will be provided to prevent Appointed EPC On site Project Visual Inspection EPC Contractor
Health and construction due to Changes Contractor along Management by HSE Cost
ingress of persons into the construction site
Safety activities in environmental with Project Team and Management of
and also to protect public exposure to
 Influx of conditions hazards associated with construction Management Designated HSE DECPCL
construction activities; team on site of
workers  Increased DECPCL
prevalence of  Screening, surveillance and treatment of
disease workers, through the provision of medical
facilities and, where required,
immunization programmes;
 Undertaking health awareness and

education initiatives among workers;
 Implementation of a vector control

programme in labor camps and
surrounding areas; and
 Avoiding formation of stagnant water

pools in and around the site;
 Prevention of larval and adult mosquito

propagation through sanitary
improvements and elimination of
breeding habitats close to human
settlements in the close vicinity of Project
site;
 Educating area residents and workers on

risks, prevention, and available treatment
for vector borne diseases.

Responsibility
implementation
Traffic safety
Community Heavy traffic  Emphasizing safety aspects among drivers, Appointed EPC On site Project Visual Inspection EPC Contractor
Health and movement particularly with regard to the speed limit Contractor Management by HSE Cost
Safety of 20 km/hr that will be enforced; Team and Management of
Designated HSE DECPCL
 Ensuring that only licensed drivers are team on site of
employed by the Project; DECPCL
 Avoiding peak hours for heavy vehicles

movement where possible;
 Regular maintenance of vehicles and use of

manufacturer approved parts to minimize
potentially serious accidents caused by
equipment malfunction or premature
failure;
 Collaboration with local communities and

responsible authorities to improve signage
( e.g. pedestrian crossings, speed limits
etc.), visibility and awareness of traffic
and pedestrian safety; and
 Coordination with emergency

responders to ensure that appropriate
first aid is provided in the event of
accidents.

Table 7-2: Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP) for Operational and Maintenance Phase of the Project
Project Responsibility
Responsibility
Stage/ Proposed Impacts for supervision Reporting Mitigation
SL Project Activity Proposed Mitigation Measures for Mitigation
Affected of mitigation requirements Cost Source
Implementation
Aspect implementation
A Environmental Issues Associated with the Operation Phase

1.1 Air quality Stack emissions  Impact on  The use of continuous emission monitoring Plant EHS Team Designated Relevant Records Plant O&M
ambient air (CEM) equipment for the measurement of air and operations Team maintained. Cost
quality emission levels in the exhaust stack. CEM will comprising of Monthly
be undertaken for NOx, SO2, CO and PM. representation internal reports to
 GHG from EHS and top
emissions  PM2.5 and VOCs will be monitored Operations of management and
periodically, to ensure that these emissions are DECPCL reports to regulatory
not occurring as a result of the incomplete authorities/lenders
burning of the HFO fuel. as
required.
 The stack shall be provided with safe access to Also, quarterly
sampling points for CEM. monitoring from the
3rd party
 The Project will adopt a relatively high
organization
energy-efficiency arid low pollution per
unit of power produced technology;
 Comply with the Emission guidelines for

Combustion engines in the IFC EHS
guidelines for Thermal Power Projects. Project
will demonstrate compliance to agreed air
emission criteria at 100% and 75% plant loads;
 Dry low NOx combustors will be provided in

the GTG to meet the guaranteed NOx
emission levels (25 ppmv);
 Fugitive emissions from lubricating oil tanks

will be fitted with coalescer; and
 Monitor ambient air quality in and around

the Project site as per the Environment
Monitoring Program formulated for the

Responsibility
Implementation
Project which will comply with National
Regulatory requirements.
 Ensure that all equipment and machinery is

maintained in accordance with manufacturer’s
specifications;
2.1 Water Water Extraction Operation team Designated Record maintained Plant O&M
 Lowering of  If the local community do not get water
Resources Groundwater Team and Cost
during the dry period DECPCL need to be
level comprising of Quarterlyreports to
install a deep tube well for the local people to
serve the water for community peoples; representation top management
from EHS and
 Ground
 Monitoring the underground water level in Operations of Also, quarterly
subsidence DECPCL monitoring from the
the surrounding wells;
3rd party
 Dig wells of appropriate deepness organization
as necessary
2.2 Water Storage and Plant EHS Team Designated Record maintained Plant O&M
 Impact on soil  Oily water runoff collected in the Plant Storm
Resources handling of fuel, oil and ground and operations Team and monthly Cost
water drains especially from the Power House
and chemicals water comprising of internal reports to
area, Transformer area, oil handling & storage
 Contaminated representation top management
area and oil filled motors and pump bases will
storm water from EHS and
be collected in different sump and taken to a
Operations of Also, quarterly
runoff common oily waste water sump;
DECPCL monitoring from the
carrying
contaminants  The oily wastewater and storm runoff 3rd party
collected from specific areas mentioned organization
to nearby low
lying areas above will be treated using an oil water
and Dakatia separator;
River and
 Separated oil will be disposed of as part of

oily wastes and handled as a hazardous
waste stream. The treated de-niled water will
be transferred to cooling water mixing
chamber and used as part of cooling water
stream.
 Acids and other hazardous materials will be

Responsibility
Implementation
stored in a dedicated room as per their MSDS
specifications with adequate ventilation;
 All chemicals will be stored in primary

containers that have in-built secondary
containment of capacity that is at least 110%
of primary containment;
2.3 Water Discharge of plant Plant EHS Designated Record maintained Plant O&M
Resources wastewater
 Impact on  The wastewater will be treated prior to discharge to
Team and Team and monthly Cost
Dakatia river meet GOB ECR 1997 Schedule 10 (Standards for operations comprising of internal reports to
water quality Waste from Industrial Units or Project Waste) and representation top management
IFC EHS Guidelines; In order to monitor ETP from EHS and
performance, continuous evaluation and monitoring Operations of
of discharge parameters will be done at the outlet
DECPCL
points of ETP; and
 Quality of treated effluent discharged into Dakatia
River will be monitored periodically as per the
Project Environment Monitoring Program and
accordingly appropriate corrective actions will be
implemented, if any non-compliance is observed.
3.1 Noise Plant operations Plant EHS Designated Record maintained Plant O&M
 Increased noise  Selection of equipment with lower sound power
Team and Team and monthly Cost
level levels (< 85 dB);
operations comprising of internal reports to
 Installation of mufflers on engine exhausts and representation top management
compressor components; from EHS and Also, Monthly
Operations of monitoring from the
 Installation of acoustic enclosures for equipment DECPCL 3rd party
(e.g. turbine, compressor) casing radiating noise; organization
 Buildings will be designed with improved

acoustic performance and sound insulation will
be provided;
 Installation of acoustic barriers without gaps and

with a continuous minimum surface density in
order to minimize the transmission of sound
through the barriers;
 Barriers will be located as close to the source, as

far as practicable, to be effective;
 Installation of vibration isolation for mechanical

equipment; and
 A noise analysis of all major plant components will

be carried out during commissioning of the plant
to ensure compliance with the specification
and guaranteed performance as well as ambient
noise levels at the receptors located in the
surroundings.
4.1 Road traffic Fuel transportation Plant EHS DECPCL traffic Record maintained
network using fuel lorry
  Avoid peak our fuel transportation
Team and management and Visual
 Maintain proper schedule so that more than 5 fuel operations team Inspection reports to
carrier stands beside the power plant road top management of
DECPCL
 Proper signaling facilities in the fuel carrier to
avoid any accident
 Traffic system should be installed in front of the

power plant to avoid interruption of other
vehicles
to move
5.1 Terrestrial Plant Operation  Plant EHS Designated Record maintained Plant O&M
Habitat
Incremental  Noise levels must be attenuated to the extent
Team and Team and Visual Cost
noise possible by proper lubrication of machineries
operations comprising of Inspection reports to
and equipment and installation of noise
representation top management of
barriers/acoustic enclosures at appropriate
from EHS and DECPCL
locations;
Operations of
 Habitat improvement in form of dense DECPCL
plantation with native species along the plant
boundary.
 Minimizing the secondary sources of noise

generation such as vehicle noise and other operation
and maintenance.
6.1 Solid Waste  HFO  Impact on soil  Generated sludge from HFO treatment will be Plant EHS Designated Record maintained Plant O&M
Management treatment and water Team and Team and Visual Cost
stored in a separate storage
operation environment operations comprising of Inspection reports to
 Waste from  The sludge should be removed from the storage representation top management of
latrine  by selling to DoE approved vendors from EHS and DECPCL
 Waste from Operations of
kitchen and  Septic tank capacity should be sufficient to DECPCL
workshops etc. store solid waste from latrine.
 Store the dried and dewatered sludge from

ETP/WTP at a secluded sludge storage area that
has rain and wind protection and disposed off
through an appropriately qualified contractor for
land filling as the WTP and ETP sludge is inert in
nature;
 The food and office waste will be collected and

stored in waste paper boxes and bins. Collect and
store office waste in segregated bins before selling
to local vendors who run recycle services. Collect
food and canteen waste in segregated bins and
disposed of on a daily basis through local vendors
for off-site composting and retrieving valuable
organic resources from the waste;
 Install colour coded waste bins for collecting dry

recyclable wastes) and wet food wastes
(compostable) and train the entire workforce to
use the coloured waste bins appropriately
throughout the Project;
 Prohibit open burning of solid waste both on-site

and off-site (by the local vendor chosen for
waste disposal) as a method of disposal; and
 Implement a zero-waste philosophy by recycling

and or composting the entire non-hazardous solid
waste stream through the Project life cycle as far as
practicable.
7.1 Hazardous Storage and Plant EHS Designated Record maintained Plant O&M
Materials disposal of
 Impact on soil  Proper labelling of hazardous waste;
and water
and hazardous waste
environment  Take special care in the storage areas to prevent operations comprising of Inspection reports to
Hazardous any spillage of hazardous waste and restrict representation top management of
waste  Regulatory
access (except for trained staff) to such areas; from EHS and DECPCL
Management compliance and Operations of
performance  Carry out periodic audits for such areas and DECPCL
standards containers; also on the segregation and collection
 Resource systems and the findings will be documented and
wastage if appropriate action taken against irregularities;
conservation
efforts are not  Prepare a specific response plan and emergency
implemented plan to address accidental spillages or release of
hazardous wastes;
 Maintain proper manifest records of

waste travelling out from the site; and

 Waste management system will be monitored
periodically for their effectiveness by the EHS Team.
Community Plant EHS Designated Record maintained Plant O&M
8.1
Health and
 Plant operations  Increased  Comply with the Community health and safety
vehicular traffic guidelines preened in Section 3.0 of the Gendered
Safety operations comprising of Inspection reports to
in the region EHS Guidelines published by WC;
Management representation top management of
 Exposure to
 Implement occupational H&S management from EHS and DECPCL
site accidents Operations of
System certified to OHSAS 1800:1 and
and incidents DECPCL
periodically reviewed and audited by
 Project security independent 3rd party agencies / experts
to mitigate the onsite accidents and
incidents;
 Formulate and implement an offsite Emergency
Management Plan in consulation and
collaboration with local government authorities
streamlining with emergency situations;
B Social Issues Associated with the operation Phase

9.1 Community Community Health Plant Designated Record maintained Plant O&M
Developmen and safety and Risk
 Conflict with  Developing a Disaster Management Plan (DMP)
Management Team and Visual Cost
t Program of industrial community to charter proper protocol to be followed in the comprising of Inspection reports to
event of a disaster in order to limit the impact on
Accidents, Fire  Management
the local community;
representation top management of
related Accidents &labor from EHS and DECPCL
from oil leakage relation  Disclose potential disasters and potential risks Operations of
from the plant to the local community as well as DECPCL
the plan of action on emergency protocol in the
event of these accidents.
 Disclose and generate awareness on the DMP as
well the measures and protocols prescribed by
the same;
 Train employees and plant personnel on health
and safety as well as handling and managing
disasters and emergency events;
 Maintain harmonious relation with community
and create a feedback system;
 Maintain sound labor and management relation
to avoid conflict and disruption in operation.

7.3 River Bank Protection Plan
The proponent has conducted Bathymetric Survey of Dakatia River in order to control river erosion
and protect the power plant from the flood water. The river is U shaped around the power plant.
From the survey it is revealed that plant side river depth is less than the opposite side river depth.
During peak season there is a tendency to erode in outer side of the U shape river. The depth at
various points of Dakatia River around the power plant site is shown in Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-1: Dakatia river showing depth in various at points
The proponent will take the following measures to control river erosion around the power plant
 River embankment protection works around the power plant

 Increasing land height to avoid flood water
 To protect river erosion in the opposite side of the river the proponent will communicate the
concern authority to do river embankment protection works.
 River dredging to increase water reserve capacity of the river as well as to ensure safe
passage for water vessels.
7.4 Environmental Monitoring

The environmental monitoring programme has been planned with the following objectives: To
evaluate the effectiveness of the proposed mitigation measures and the protection of the ambient
environment as per prescribed/ applicable standards for the Project;
 To identify the need for improvements in the management plans;

 To verify compliance with statutory and community obligations; and
 To allow comparison against baseline conditions and assess the changes in environmental
quality in the Project AOI.

7.4.1 Performance Indicators and Monitoring Schedule
Physical, biological and social environmental management components of particular significance
have been identified as performance indicators. A comprehensive monitoring plan for each
performance indicator has been prepared for all phases of the Project and is presented in Table 7-3.
This includes parameters to be measured, methods to be used, sampling locations, frequency of
measurements, detection limits, cost and responsibilities for implementation and supervision.
7.4.2 Reporting Mechanism for Environmental and Social Monitoring Program

A robust reporting system will provide the Project with the necessary feedback mechanisms to
ensure quality and timely implementation of the works. The reporting system will ensure regular
flow of information from the Project site to the Project headquarters and, as necessary, to regulatory
authorities and funding agencies. The reporting system will provide a mechanism to ensure that the
measures proposed in the Project’s ESMP are implemented.
Before the civil works start, the EHS Division of DECPCL will finalize the format for reporting on
the status and progress of environmental monitoring. The format will be designed to meet all the
compliance conditions associated with the environmental clearance from the Department of
Environment and the Government of Bangladesh. The contractor will be required to submit the
duly filled up reporting form on a monthly basis to the Project Developer (i.e., DECPCL). A further
report, detailing the results of pollution monitoring for air, noise, soil, and water will be submitted
quarterly as envisaged in the monitoring plan. A health and safety incident/accident report will be
prepared and submitted in the event of an incident or accident. Independent verification of the
effectiveness of the mitigation measures by the EPC contractor during the construction phase can be
done by DECPCL EHS team with a periodic third party audit.
During the operation phase of the Project, the Executive, EHS Personnel will monitor the
effectiveness of the EMP implementation, monitoring the implementation of social components of
the ESMP. He/ she will also responsible for implementation of corporate social responsibility (CSR)
activities to be conducted by DECPCL. Both Operations Manager and HR Manager will further
report to the Station Manager, who will be overall in-charge of the Plant operations and
management.
The quarterly reports of the management measures will form an integral part of the Quarterly
Progress Reports that can be submitted to the lenders. Additional compliance reports to the
Regional Office and Head Office of the DOE required as a part of environmental clearance process
shall also be prepared and submitted based on the necessary monitoring and reporting formats.

Table 7-3: Environmental and social Monitoring Plan (Construction and Operation Phase)
Project Stage/ Potential Parameters to be Location Measurements Frequency Responsibility Cost
Affected Impact/ Monitored
Component Mitigation
Site Preparation and Construction Phase

General Inspection of General Project activity Visual inspection Daily EHS Team of EPC Contractor
mitigation compliance with areas of all active work EPC Cost
compliance mitigation areas Contractor (1xHSE Manager,
measures 1xDeputy HSE
presented in the Manager &
ESMP and as 1xHSE Executive)
specified in EPC
Contractor Manual
Ambient Air Dust SPM and PM10, Identified ASRs 24-hour Quarterly 3rd Party EPC Contractor
Quality generation PM2.5 within 500 m from Environmental Cost (400,000
the construction site Consultant BDT/annum)
(4 locations)
Vehicle PM2.5, NO2, SO2 , Identified ASRs 24 hourly Monthly 3rd Party EPC Contractor
exhaust CO within 100 m from monitoring of PM2.5 Environmental Cost (200,000
the activity and SO2 and 1- Consultant BDT/annum)
(2 locations) hourly monitoring
of NO2 and CO
Noise Increase in Noise levels in Leq, Identified NSRs 24-hour Monthly 3rd Party EPC Contractor
ambient noise Leq day, Leq night within 500m from Environmental Cost (200,000
levels and hourly Leq the activity area/s Consultant BDT/annum)
(6 locations)
Soil Contamination pH, salinity, NH4 +, Construction site or Standard analytical In the event of 3rd Party EPC Contractor
of soil total P, heavy lay down area or methods any leakage or Environmental Cost (150,000
metals, oil & grease spill area spillage of Consultant BDT/monitoring)
hazardous
substances, oil,

or toxic
chemicals and
Half Yearly
Monitoring
report
Water Contamination Turbidity, pH, DO, Dakatia River Standard analytical Quarterly 3rd Party EPC Contractor
of surface Total dissolved (upstream and methods Environmental Cost (300,000
water solids, oil & grease, downstream) Consultant BDT/annum)
total coliform,
heavy metals
Ground water Hardness, Ground water Standard analytical Quaterly 3rd Party EPC Contractor
quality Chloride, Fluride, source in the project methods Environmental Cost (600,000
Iron ,Manganese, area Consultant BDT/annum)
Magnesium,
Arsenic, Chlorine,
Fecal Coliform,
Total Coliform,
Heavy Metal
Occupational Accidents or Near-misses, Project activity As defined in As defined in EHS Team of EPC Contractor
Health and incidents due incidents, areas and construction phase H&S plan EPC Cost
safety to construction occupational construction camp health & safety Contractor (1xHSE Manager,
activities diseases, area plan to be prepared 1xDeputy HSE
workers health dangerous by EPC contractor Manager &
occurrences 1xHSE Executive)
Community Community Accident, incidents Access Road Incidents, accidents Based on EHS and / or EPC Contractor
Health and disturbance and complaints connecting site and community occurrence Community Cost
Safety and potential complaints Liaison Officer (1xHSE Manager,
safety hazard of EPC 1xDeputy HSE
due to road

traffic Contractor Manager , 1xHSE

Executive &
1xalision officer)
Public Complaints from Neighboring As per the Continuous Project Grievance
concerns community communities grievance redress Company Management
around the project mechanism Budget of
activity areas DECPCL
Terrestrial Impact on Tree cutting Project site Identification and One time prior Project EPC Contractor
Ecology species of Enumeration by to start the company with Cost
conservational ecologist work help of experts
importance
Impact on Habitat and Near temporary Visual inspection Continuous Project EPC Contractor
habitat of disturbance to jetty, transportation company Cost (200,000
avifauna avifauna route BDT)
Aquatic Impact on Habitats and Near temporary Identification and Prior to start Project EPC Contractor
ecology habitat of disturbance to jetty and river Enumeration by the work and company with Cost (300,000
aquatic and aquatic fauna transportation route ecologist continuous help of experts BDT)
riverine fauna
due to spillage
Impact on Habitat and Near temporary Deck monitoring Continuous Project EPC Contractor
mammals due disturbance aquatic jetty and river company Cost
to trawlers fauna transportation route
and barges
Environmental Training need 1 – day training for At project site As per national and Before Contractor EPC Contractor
and Social those people of IFC/ WB standard contractor start through 3rd Cost
Issue Contractor who guideline party (300,000 BDT)
involved in engagement

environmental and
social issues
Operation Phase
General Inspection of General Project activity Visual inspection Daily EHS Team of Included in
mitigation compliance with areas of all active work DECPCL operation and
compliance mitigation areas maintenance
measures (O&M) cost
presented in the
ESMP and
operational manual
Air pollution Stack Emission NOx, SO2, CO, Main stack CEM Continuous DECPCL Installation
Concentration PM2.5 included in EPC
Cost
Monitoring and
Maintenance in
O&M Cost
Emission NOx, SO2, CO and Main stack Standard Methods Annual 3rd party O&M Cost
Concentration PM2.5 Environmental (150,000
Consultant BDT/annum)
Ambient Air PM10, PM2.5, NOx, 4 Locations where Standard Methods Quarterly 3rd party O&M Cost
Quality SO2, CO the samples were Environmental (500,000
collected during Consultant BDT/annum)
baseline monitoring
Noise Noise Sound pressure 1 m from the noise Noise monitor Monthly EHS Team of O&M Cost
generation level generation DECPCL or 3rd

from plant equipment’s (for all party

Equipment noise sources Environmental
greater than 70 dB Consultant
(A) noise level)
Ambient Ambient Noise At project boundary Noise monitoring 24- hour 3rd party O&M Cost
Noise level and at nearest noise with data logger observations Environmental (100,000
sensitive receptors with hourly Consultant BDT/annum)
in all direction from noise levels,
the plant monthly once
at each
location
Water Ground water Drinking water Bore well water Standard Methods Quarterly 3rd party O&M Cost
quality parameters Environmental (100,000
as per schedule 3 of Consultant BDT/annum)
ECR 1997
Ground water In and around the Modeling When 3rd party O&M Cost
depletion rate project site techniques complain raise Consultant
from the
neighboring
community
about the non-
availabity of
ground water
Waste Water Temperature, pH, Outlet of discharge Standard Methods Quarterly 3rd party O&M Cost
Chlorine, BOD5, channel Environmental (100,000
COD, oil & grease, Consultant BDT/annum)
heavy metals, FC,
TC

Surface water Temperature, Upstream and Standard Methods Quarterly 3rd party O&M Cost
quality Conductivity, pH, downstream of Environmental (100,000
DO, TDS Dakatia River Consultant BDT/annum)
Aquatic Impact on Fish count, Upstream and Abundance of Once post one Plant O&M Cost
ecology fishes and phytoplankton’s, downstream of aquatic flora and year of management (200,000
riverine flora zooplankton’s Dakatia River fauna commissioning BDT/annum)
and fauna number of the plant by
experts
Community Community Accidents, Access Road Accidents, Based on Visual O&M Cost
Health and disturbance incidents and incidents and occurrence Inspection
safety and potential complains complains report by EHS
safety hazard Team of
due to road DECPCL or
traffic community
liaison officer
Public Complains from Neighboring As per grievance Continuous Visual O&M Cost
Concern community communities redress mechanism Inspection
report by EHS
Team of
DECPCL or
community
liaison officer
CSR Activities Community Activities/ Vulnerable group No of beneficiaries Periodic and Admin/ HR CSR Budget
Development programs and no around the project and outcome of the need based Manager
of beneficiaries activities area activities

7.5 Institutional Setting and Implementation Arrangements
The ESMP (mitigation plan) will be included in the construction contract and the contractor will be
responsible for implementation of the measures associated with design and construction. The
Project Developer’s staff, specifically the EHS Officer and Site Engineer, will monitor the
implementation of these mitigation measures by the contractors at the site. These two officers will
be responsible for the field level monitoring of the Project.
The roles and responsibilities of the Project Developer (DECPCL) and EPC Contractor for
implementation and monitoring have been outlined in Table 7-4. The flow diagram depicting the
institutional arrangement for implementation of the ESMP is presented in Figure 7-1
Table 7-4: Roles and Responsibilities of Project Developer and EPC Contractor
Project Developer (DECPCL) EPC Contractor

Obtaining statutory clearances required Obtaining permits required during the
during pre-construction stage of the Project construction stage
Overall project co-ordination and Joint verification with Project Developer
management through EPC and supported and Third Party Environmental
by the third party environmental Consultant for review of ESMP
consultant/s implementation
Interaction and reporting to the respective Interaction with Project Developer and
department of GOB appointed supervision consultant, if any
Interaction and reporting to lenders Filling of reporting formats as per the
reporting schedule and submission to
Project Developer
Effective implementation of ESMP and Environmental monitoring through Third
monitoring of ESMP implementation Party Environmental Laboratory
Carryout verification/ supervision Preparation of various plans for effective
exercises during the construction phase of implementation of ESMP as detailed out
the Project for implementation of ESMP in the “Specification Manual” by the
Project Developer
Keeping records of all permits obtained by Identification of site for labor camp,
EPC Contractor batch mix plant, laydown areas
Overall supervision of ESMP Management of labor camp and to
implementation provide drinking water, sanitation facility
Approval of plans prepared by EPC
Contractor
Addressing grievances of local community
and information dissemination
Environmental monitoring through
laboratory
While the contractor or a particular party is responsible for physical implementation of the
mitigating measures, the whole implementation process requires supervision, checking,
documentation and verification so that problems are identified and properly addressed before they
get out of hand.

In order to ensure proper execution of the ESMP, implementation reviews will be conducted by the
project engineer such as the weekly construction meetings, construction log book, monthly and
other construction reports etc.
Records of these minutes of the weekly meeting, monthly reports and special reports on
implementation of the mitigating measures will also be maintained and available for review by the
Project management. It is suggested to identify documents and records that require templates and
accordingly suitable templates shall be developed, which shall include but not limited to policies,
procedures and work instructions, meeting minutes, monitoring results, training attendance
records, emergency contract lists, action plans etc. Further, all these templates shall be
communicated to all potential users. All these records will be archived at the Project office and will
be maintained by the EHS officer. All documents and records shall be archived with a unique
identifier so that they can be distinguished from any other material and can be easily retrieved.
DECPCL will document the process for creating, allocating and approving unique identifiers and
will communicate this to relevant staff.
The contractor shall identify EHS Manager and EHS Officer for implementation ESMP for the
project for which the contract has been awarded. The Contractor shall ensure that the ESMP (for the
project) is implemented, the performance of which will be evaluated by DECPCL time to time. The
Contractor shall also be responsible for provisioning adequate arrangements and resources for
implementing the corrective action developed as part of the internal and external audit reports
developed time to time. Implementation shall be time and responsibility bound in the contractor
project organogram. The Environment and social management organogram of DECPCL is shown in
Figure 7-2 below.
Management
Administrative DepartmentTechnical Department
Environmental Manager
Safety Manager
Enviromental Executive (2)
Figure 7-2: Organization Chart for Environmental and Social Management

7.6 Training
7.6.1 Construction Phase
Prior to commencement of major civil works at site, a suitably qualified in house/ external expert
will be appointed by the EPC contractor in consultation with DECPCL to develop and deliver a
training program on implementation of the EMP, environmental monitoring and reporting in line
with the applicable reference framework for the Project. The training will include the following
topics:
 Environment, Health and Safety Policy of the EPC contractor;

 Environment and fundamentals of environmental pollution in relation to the Project;
 EHS management plans prepared by the EPC Contractor;
 Do’s and Don’ts for the construction workers;
 Safety procedures and guidelines;
 Internal reporting and response system;
 Hazardous chemicals and waste handling;
In addition, specific training will be provided to the team involved in environmental monitoring
and reporting, which will include:
 Applicable environmental guidelines and standards;

 Sampling site selection guidelines in line with environmental monitoring plan;
 Sample collection, storage, transportation and analysis procedures;
 Solid and hazardous waste management;
 Quality assurance and quality control;
 Environmental monitoring report preparation
The training will help in capacity building and implementation of the EMP during the construction
phase of the Project. It will also help in ensuring internal and external monitoring and verification
of the environmental performance of the Project. The reporting and verification during the
construction phase will be semi-annual and the reports will be submitted to the DOE and the
Lenders.
7.6.2 Operation Phase

Prior to the commencement of the Plant operation, a suitably qualified in-house/ external
environmental expert will be engaged by DECPCL to develop and deliver a training program on
operation phase environmental monitoring and reporting. The topics will be mostly same as that
during the construction phase. However, it will also include following modules, which are specific
to the operation phase:
 Continuous emission monitoring;

 Wastewater and thermal discharge monitoring;
 Aquatic ecology monitoring;

 Hazardous chemicals and waste management;
 Occupational health and safety programs;
The training will help in capacity building and implementation of the EMP during the operation
phase of the Project. It will also help in ensuring internal and external monitoring and verification
of the environmental performance of the Project. The reporting and verification during the
operation phase will be annual and the reports will be submitted to the DOE and the Lenders.
7.7 Plans for Construction and Operation Phase of the Project

7.7.1 Construction Phase
Prior to the beginning of major land works, the EPC contractor in cooperation with Project
Developer will develop the following plans:
Health and Safety Plan
The EPC Contractor will prepare and implement a Health and Safety Plan prior to commencing
work. This plan will include method statements for work activities, plant utilization, construction
sequence and safety arrangements. Measures will be implemented to reduce the likelihood and
consequence of the following hazards:
 falling from height;

 falling into water;
 entanglement with machinery;
 tripping over permanent obstacles or temporary obstructions;
 slipping on greasy or oily walkways;
 falling objects;
 asphyxiation;
 explosion;
 contact with dangerous substances;
 electric shock;
 variable weather conditions;
 lifting excessive weights; and
 traffic operations.
Construction Environmental Management Plan
The EPC Contractor will prepare and implement a Construction Environmental Management Plan
prior to commencing work to manage the construction related environmental aspects as waste
management, sanitation aspects, water conservation etc.
Traffic Management Plan
The EPC Contractor will prepare and implement traffic Management Plan prior to commencing
work to manage the construction traffic. This will be required towards prevention of local traffic
disruptions, avoid peak hours rush and prevent accidents. Considering the laydown area on the

other side of highway and heavy traffic movement on the main highway (Chandpur-Chowmohoni
Highway), specific traffic management planning will be carried out by the EPC contractor and this
will include traffic stewards near the highway for smooth traffic movement.
Emergency Response Plan
The EPC contractor must develop a site specific emergency response plan during the construction
stage.
7.7.2 Operation Phase

During the operation phase of the Project, the Project Developer will develop the following plan/
management systems for effective operation of the Plant:
HSE and Social Management System
The Project Developer will develop and implement an HSE and Social Management System
(HSE&SMS) to international guidelines for the entire Plant premises and its impact zones (project
area of influence as defined under IFC PS) within two (2) years of commissioning the Plant.
Waste Management Plan
For effective segregation, handling, storage and disposal of solid and hazardous wastes generated
from the Plant operations, a waste management plan will be developed by the Project Developer.
Spill Response and Emergency Plan
The Project Developer will prepare a spill response and emergency plan to address accidental
spillages or release of hazardous wastes.
Emergency Response and Disaster Management Plan
Based on the outcome of the consequence analysis, an emergency response and disaster
management plan will be developed by the Project Developer. This will define protocols to be
followed in the event of emergencies or disasters in order to limit the impact on the employees and
the local community. The plan will disclose potential disasters and potential risks from the plant to
the local community as well as the plan of action on emergency protocol in the event of any such
eventuality. This will also include awareness programs for the Plant personnel, local community
and local administration. Details ERP has been depicted Chapter 8.
7.8 Budget
The EPC Contractor and the DECPCL will allocate separate budget for environmental and social
management plan implementation, training, environmental monitoring, analysis and reporting,
verification monitoring and capacity building. It should be noted that cost for many in-built
mitigation measures, such as, acoustic enclosures for noise control, water and wastewater
treatment, CEM etc, are already included in the EPC contract cost estimate and/or operating cost
estimates. In addition to that separate budget will be allocated for CSR activities, which will be
conducted by the Project Developer for community development. The budget estimate for the 3rd
party monitoring and verification has been included in Table 7-3.

8 HAZARDS AND RISK ASSESSMENT
8.1 Introduction
This chapter deals with various types of hazard analysis and finding a risk assessment in the
proposed power plant. The safe working operation of the plant needs to identify the hazards, assess
the associated risks and bring the risks to tolerable level on a continuous basis. There are several
unsafe conditions and practices in various process and equipment of the HFO power plant lead to a
number of accidents and which can causes loss and injury to human lives, damages the property,
interrupt production etc. A risk assessment is an important step in protecting the plant from such
conditions. It helps us to focus on the risks that really have the potential to cause harm. The hazard
resolution process is to assess the identified hazards in terms of the severity or consequence of the
hazard and the probability of occurrence of each type of hazard. Risk classification by severity and
probability can be performed by using a risk assessment matrix. Hazard can happen because of the
nature of chemicals handled and also the nature of process involved. So for risk analysis first step is
to identify the hazardous chemicals which are to be studied for risk analysis. It involves the
identification and assessment of risks at the project site and in the neighboring population who
could get exposed to, as a result of hazards present. This requires a thorough knowledge of failure
probability, credible accident scenario, vulnerability of population etc.
In this EIA report, detailed assessment has been carried out to identify and mitigate the potential
hazard associated with construction and operation of the power plant.
8.2 RA Study Objective
The overall objective of this RA with respect to the proposed project involves identification and
evaluation of major risks, prioritizing risks identified based on their hazard consequences and using
the outcome to guide and strengthen both onsite and offsite ERP. Hence in order to ensure effective
management of any emergency situations that may arise from failure of various fuel storages. The
following specific objectives need to be achieved.
 Identify potential risk scenarios that may arise from storage of volatile fuels in the plant
 Review existing information and historical databases to arrive at possible likelihood of such
risk scenarios.
 Predict the consequences of such potential risks scenarios and if consequences are observed
to be high, establish the same through application of quantitative simulation
 Recommend feasible preventive and risk mitigation measures as well as provide inputs for
strengthening of the project Emergency Response Plan(ERP)
8.3 Risk assessment process

The risk assessment process is primarily based on likelihood of occurrence of the risks identified
and their possible hazard consequences particularly being evaluated through hypothetical accident
scenarios. With respect to the proposed project, major risks viz. leaks and rupture of storage tanks
and pipelines been assessed and evaluated through a risk matrix generated to combine the risk

severity and likelihood factor. The overall approach of risk assessment is summarized below in
Figure 8-1.
Figure 8-1 Risk Assessment Methodology
8.4 Potential Hazard and Risk during different stages

Major potential hazard has been identified for the proposed HFO Power plant. The potential
hazards and risk during pre-construction, construction and operation of the proposed power plant
are given in Table 8-1 and Table 8-2.

Table 8-1: Potential hazard and risk during pre-construction and construction phase
Location of hazard Project Activities Potential Hazard Root Causes Consequences
Pre-construction
 Machinery and  Bringing in machines,  Trips and fails  Fatigue or prior sickness  Health injury
equipment equipment and  Cuts and bruises  Mechanical failure  Disability
vehicles for site  Lack of safety training  Life loss
clearance activities  Not abiding to general health and safety and traffic rules
Construction and Erection
 Construction site  Construction of  Accidents (burns), electric  Fatigue or prior sickness  Physical injury
building, steel shocks etc)  Electric failure  Disability
structures and its  Injuries from falls and slips  Equipment failure  Life loss
foundation, cutting,  Cuts and bruises  Lack of safety protocols (e.g. not putting up warning
welding, painting signs or enclosing the area to prevent entry of outside
works, drilling work people)
etc  Not maintain a designated place for backfilling storage
 Not maintaining enough lighting during the night (for
those working overtime)
 Work at heights  Accidents  Fatigue or prior sickness  Health injury

 Injuries from falls and  Lack of safety protocols (e.g. not putting up warning  Disability
slips (e.g. broken bones, signs or enclosing the area to prevent entry of outside  Life loss
fractures, traumas, etc.) people)
 Fatalities  Not maintain a designated place for backfilling storage
Not maintaining enough lighting during the night
 Vehicles movement  Noise generation  Running engine, hydraulic horns, sirens etc.  Injuries
 Accident  Mechanical failure  Health problems
 Emission from vehicles  Old engine or engine parts/lack of maintenance ( e.g. respiratory,
 Spread of dust and hearing and/or cardiac
minute particles due to problems)
vehicle movement  Fatalities
 Disabilities
 Chemical storage  Accidental release of  Lack of safety protocols  Health injuries (burns,
area chemicals  Carelessness( e.g. smoking near chemical storage area) anxiety, depression
 Handling of  Acute/chronic toxicity  Not proper bounding of chemical storage area etc.)

hazardous chemical from exposures to  Improper chemical storage (e.g. faulty/leaky  Disabilities
chemicals containers, improper containers, improper sealing of  Fatalities
 Fire/explosion containers etc.)  Loss of properties
 Occupational Hazard  Cuts, bruises and burns  Lack of safety awareness  Health injuries (burns,
 Falls, slips and tips  Carelessness in maintaining safety protocols anxiety, depression
 Health injuries  Use of faulty machineries and equipment etc.)
 Sickness and illness  Improper hygiene  Disabilities
 Prior sickness or illness  Fatalities
 Heavy workload
Table 8-2 : Potential hazard and risk during operation phase

 Machinery and  Plant operation  Mechanical hazard  Mechanical failure  Health injury
equipment  Fire hazard/explosion  Lack of sound buffers  Fatalities
 Electrical hazard  Property damage
 Noise generation  Environmental
pollution
 Boilers and pressure  Operate pressure  Fire  Failure of water pumps  Incomplete combustion
parts valve, switch and  Release of high pressure  Electric failure  Equipment damage
 Compressed air control system steam  Equipment failure  Health injury
system and pipeline  Flows live high  Explosion  Mechanical failure of safety valves  Loss of life
 Live steam line pressure steam from  Steam pipe creak  Environmental
boiler to distillation  Accidental leakage, lack of heat sink for combustion pollution
unit process and non-functional safety and bypass valve.  Disability
 Life loss
 Chemical Storage  Use for water  Toxic accidental releases  Chemical spillage  Health injury
treatment in different due to mal function of  Chemical fires ( chronic or acute
phases of equipment.  Mishandling and operational error toxicity)
demineralized water,  Carelessness of the  Disabilities
cooling water and operator.  Loss of life
potable water  Environmental
pollution
 Tank farm  Storing fuel oil and  Explosion  Lack of safety awareness  Health injuries
raw material  Pool fire  Carelessness in maintaining safety protocols  Disabilities
 Toxic vapor cloud  Instrumental mal function  Fatalities
 Shock wave  Improper maintenance  Environmental

pollution
 Effluent treatment  Waste water  Toxic chemical release  Spillage/accidental release  Impact on health
plant treatment  Improper management  Loss of life
 Environmental
pollution
 Occupational hazard  Plant operation  Cuts, bruises and burns  Lack of safety awareness  Health injuries
 Falls, slips and tips  Carelessness in maintaining safety protocols  Disabilities
 Health injuries  Use of faulty machineries and equipment  Fatalities
 Sickness and illness  Improper hygiene  Sickness
 Prior sickness or illness  Anxiety and
 Heavy workload depression

8.5 Flammable Chemicals
Major flammable chemical tanks present in DECPCL plant site are presented in Table 8-3.
Table 8-3: List of fuel tank in the power plant

Tank No of Tank Diameter Height (m) Capacity
(mili-meter) (M3)
HFO Storage Tank 4 26000 13.5 7000 m3
HFO Day Tank 1 9000 8.7 500 m3

HFO Buffer Tank 2 7750 5.8 250 m3
LFO (HSD) Day Tank 1 6600 6.4 200 m3
8.6 Frequency Analysis

The frequency analysis of the hazards identified with respect to the proposed project was
undertaken to estimate the likelihood of their occurrences during the project life cycle. Hazard
frequencies in relation to the proposed project were estimate based on the analysis of historical
accident frequency data and professional judgment. Based on the range of probabilities arrived at
for different potential hazards that may be encountered with respect to the storage of diesel, HFO,
the following frequency categories and criteria have been identified(Table 8-4)
Table 8-4: Frequency Categories and Criteria

Likelihood Criteria Ranking(cases/year) Frequency
Ranking Class
Likely to occur often in the life of the project, with Frequent
5 a probability greater than 10-1
Will occur several times in the life of project, with a Probable
4 probability of occurrence less than 10-1 but greater
than 10-2
Likely to occur sometime in the life of a project Occasional/Rare
3 with a probability of occurrence less than 10-2 but
greater than 10-3
Unlikely but possible to occur in the life of a Remote
2 project, with a probability of occurrence less than
10-3 but greater than 10-6
So unlikely it can be assumed that occurrence may Improbable
1 not be experienced, with a probability of
occurrence less than 10-6
Source: Guidelines for Developing Quantitative Safety Risk Criteria – Centre for Chemical Process and Safety
8.6.1 Frequency Analysis- Diesel and HFO Storage

The most credible scenario of a diesel and HFO tank will be pool fire. In order to determine the
probability of a pool fire occurring, the failure rate needs to be modified by the probability of the
material finding an ignition source. The probability of a pool fire occurring in the event of a release

is therefore equal to the product of the failure rate and the probability of ignition. Diesel Tank
failure frequency is given in Table 8-5.
Table 8-5: Diesel Tank Failure Frequency

Sl. No Types of Release Failure Rate Frequency
1 Catastrophic tank failure 5.0 x 10 -6 Remote
2 Small bund fire 9.0 x 10 -6 Remote
3 Large bund fire 6.0 x 10 -6 Remote
Source: OGP Risk Assessment Data Directory Report No 434 – 3, March 2010, Section-2 – Summery
and Recommendation Data
8.7 Consequence Analysis-Tankages

The facilities at the Fuel Dyke area terminal mainly comprise of HFO and Diesel storage tanks. The
hazards posed by them are mainly in the form of fire. There is a possibility of pool fire taking place
in the event of large spill of hydrocarbons, mainly major failure scenarios were evaluated to assess
the effect on people and property inside the plant area as well as outside.
The effect of fire on people and property outside will chiefly manifest itself in the form of thermal
radiation. A criterion was selected for deciding the maximum level of thermal radiation to which
the outside population can be subjected. Thermal radiation levels from fire scenarios of each tank
are worked out at various distances and their effects are evaluated against the set criteria.
The main hazards associated with the storage and handling of fuels are pool fires resulting from the
ignition of released material as well as explosions. Hazardous chemicals also can be realized
following tank overfilling and leaks/failures in the storage tank and ancillary equipment such as
transfer pumps, metering equipment, etc. Fuel oil is a combustible liquid, which will burn if the
temperature of the liquid exceeds the flash point and the vapor generated at the liquid surface is
ignited. The resultant incident is a pool fire that radiates heat to the surroundingarea resulting in po
tential equipment damage and or injury/fatality. Fuel oil is also a contaminant to the biophysical
environment and its release can damage sensitive environmental areas surrounding the storage area
in the event a leak occurs and escapes to the environment. Fuel will also float on water and be
carried a significant distance from a leak point by a water course.
Damage due to Fire
The flammable liquid in a pool will burn with large turbulent diffusion flame. This releases
heat based on the heat of combustion and the burning rate of the liquid. A part of heat is
radiated while the rest is convected away by rising hot air and combustion products. The
radiations can heat nearby storage or process units to above their ignition temperatures and
thus result in spread of fire.
The radiation can also cause severe burns or fatalities to workers or firefighters located within a
certain distance. Hence, it will be important to know beforehand the damage potential of flammable
liquid pool likely to be crated due to leakage or catastrophic failure of storage or process vessel.
This will help decide the location of other storage/process vessels, decide the protective clothing
the workers/firefighters need, the duration of time for which they can be in the zone, the fire

extinguishing measures needed and the protection methods needed for nearby storage vessels.
Effect of thermal radiation on equipment and people is tabulated in Table 8-6.
Table 8-6: Effect of thermal radiation on equipment and people

Incident Type of damage caused
SL. No Radiation
Damage to Equipment Damage to People
(kW/m2)
100% lethality in 1 min. 1%
1 37.5 Damage to process equipment
lethality in 10 sec.
Minimum energy required to
2 50% Lethality in 1 min.
25.0 ignite wood at indefinitely long
exposure without a flame Significant injury in 10 sec.
Maximum thermal radiation
3 intensity allowed on thermally

19.0 unprotected adjoining ----
equipment
4 Minimum energy to ignite with 1% lethality in 1 min.

12.5 a flame; melts plastic tubing First degree burn in 10 sec
Causes pain if duration is longer
5 4.5 ---- than 20 sec, but blistering is un-
likely
6 Causes no discomfort on long

1.6 ----- exposures
Source: Techniques for Assessing Industrial Hazards, World Bank Technical Paper 55
8.7.1 Risk Modeling Scenarios

We have used ALOHA risk modeling software. ALOHA (Areal Locations of Hazardous
Atmospheres) is a modeling program that estimates threat zones associated with hazardous
chemical releases, including toxic gas clouds, fires, and explosions. A threat zone is an area where a
hazard (such as toxicity) has exceeded a user-specified Level of Concern (LOC). ALOHA is part of
the CAMEO® software suite of products for emergency responders and planners.
Accidental release of fuel from Diesel and HFO tank can create a pool fire in presence of an ignition
source. Following an accidental release, fuel will form a confined pool within the dyke area. If the
vapor above the pool ignites, the liquid will burn as a pool fire. The pool fire will result in thermal
radiation. It could also damage the storage tanks located within the common dyke area. The pool
fire simulation scenarios for the major tanks of the power plant are given in the following sub-
section.
8.7.2 Diesel Storage Tank

Oil stored in Diesel storage tank at ambient temperature and atmospheric pressure. For diesel
storage tank only pool fire scenario from tank leakage has been considered.

Pool Fire:
ATMOSPHERIC DATA: (MANUAL INPUT OF DATA)

Wind: 7.6 meters/second from SW at 10 meters
Ground Roughness: open country Cloud Cover: 7 tenths
Air Temperature: 30° C Stability Class: D
No Inversion Height Relative Humidity: 75%
SOURCE STRENGTH:
Leak from hole in vertical cylindrical tank
Flammable chemical is burning as it escapes from tank
Tank Diameter: 6.6 meters Tank Length: 6.4 meters
Tank Volume: 229 cubic meters
Tank contains liquid Internal Temperature: 30° C
Chemical Mass in Tank: 160 tons Tank is 87% full
Circular Opening Diameter: 10 centimeters
Opening is 5 meters from tank bottom
Max Flame Length: 15 meters
Burn Duration: ALOHA limited the duration to 1 hour
Max Burn Rate: 348 kilograms/min
Total Amount Burned: 20,434 kilograms
Note: The chemical escaped as a liquid and formed a burning puddle.
The puddle spread to a diameter of 10.0 meters.
THREAT ZONE:
Threat Modeled: Thermal radiation from pool fire
Red : 28 meters --- (10.0 kW/(sq m) = potentially lethal within 60 sec)
Orange: 35 meters --- (5.0 kW/(sq m) = 2nd degree burns within 60 sec)
Yellow: 48 meters --- (2.0 kW/(sq m) = pain within 60 sec)
The pool fire thermal radiation threat zone of the power plant diesel tank is presented in Figure 8-2.

Figure 8-2: Pool Fire Thermal Radiation Threat Zone for Diesel Tank Leakage

8.7.3 HFO Storage Tank
Fuel stores in the HFO storage tank at 400 C and atmospheric pressure. The possible consequence
results of tank leakage may cause pool fire in presence of any ignition source. The model scenario
for pool firing of the HFO storage tank is given below.
Pool Fire

SOURCE STRENGTH:
Tank Diameter: 26 meters Tank Length: 13.6 meters
Tank Volume: 7,168 cubic meters
Chemical Mass in Tank: 5,588 tons Tank is 99% full
Max Burn Rate: 1,390 kilograms/min
THREAT ZONE:
The pool fire thermal radiation threat zone of the power plant HFO storage tank is shown in Figure
8-3.

Figure 8-3: Pool Fire Thermal Radiation Threat Zone for HFO Storage Tank Leakage

8.7.4 HFO Buffer Tank
Fuel stores in the HFO Buffer tank at 700 C and atmospheric pressure. There are 2 buffer tank in the
power plant. The possible consequence results of tank leakage may cause pool fire in presence of
any ignition source. The model scenario for pool firing of the HFO buffer tank is given below.
Pool Fire

SOURCE STRENGTH:
Tank Diameter: 7.75 meters Tank Length: 5.8 meters
Max Flame Length: 15 meters Burn Duration: 55 minutes
THREAT ZONE:
The pool fire thermal radiation threat zone of the HFO Buffer tank is shown in Figure 8-4.

Figure 8-4: Pool Fire Thermal Radiation Threat Zone for HFO Buffer Tank Leakage

8.7.5 HFO Service (Day) Tank
Fuel stores in the HFO day tank at 90 0 C and atmospheric pressure. There is 1 day tank in the power
plant. The possible consequence results of tank leakage may cause pool fire in presence of any
ignition source. The model scenario for pool firing of the HFO buffer tank is given below.
Pool Fire:
SOURCE STRENGTH:
Tank Diameter: 9 meters Tank Length: 8.7 meters
THREAT ZONE:
The pool fire thermal radiation threat zone of the HFO Service tank is shown in Figure 8-5.

Figure 8-5: Pool Fire Thermal Radiation Threat Zone for HFO Day Tank Leakage

8.8 Emergency Response and Disaster Management Plan
8.8.1 Introduction
Industrial accidents results in great personal and financial loss. Managing these accidental
risks in today’s environment is the concern of every industry including petroleum refineries,
because either real or perceived incidents can quickly jeopardize the financial viability of a
business. Many facilities involve various manufacturing processes that have the potential for
accidents which may be catastrophic to the plant, work force, environment, or public.
An Emergency Response Plan (ERP) is a written document which is required for an organization
according to occupational health safety standards and must be displayed at every job site with a
certain number of employees (usually five to ten). It is a detail step-by-step procedure to follow in
emergencies situation such as fire or a major accident. An emergency response plan also includes
information such as whom to notify, who should do what, and location of emergency stock. The
Emergency Response Plan includes any measures that should be in place at all facilities to combat
an accident resulting from fire, explosion or due to any natural calamities (e.g. Earthquake,
cyclones, fire).
8.8.2 What is Emergency

A major emergency can be defined as an accident/incident that has potential to cause
serious injuries or loss of life. It may cause extensive damage to property, serious disruption
both in production and working of factory and may adversely affect the environment. The
following factors may cause major emergency:
 Plant failure;
 Human error;
 Vehicle crash;
 Sabotage;
 Earthquake;
 Lightning; and
 Fire.
8.8.3 Potential causes of an Power plant Accident

 The potential causes of an industrial accident are as like as follows:
 Fire and explosion: explosives, flammable material;
 Snapping of cables, ropes, chains, slings;
 Handling heavy objects;
 Electricity (electrocution);
 Falls from height inside industrial units or on the ground;
 Slipping on wet surfaces;
 Sharp objects;

 Oxygen deficiency in confined spaces;
 Lack of PPE, housekeeping practices and safety signs;
 Hackles, hooks, chains;
 Cranes, winches, hoisting and hauling equipment’s.
8.8.4 Objectives of Emergency Planning

When an emergency occurs the main concern is to preserve life and safeguard property and
the environment. Therefore an Emergency Contingency Plan, catering for both minor and
major emergencies needs to be designed with the following objectives:
 Rescuing people;
 Treating the injured;
 Safeguarding others;
 Minimizing damage to property and environment;
 Controlling the incident, removing the hazard, preventing escalation;
 Maintaining the welfare of personnel involved in controlling the occurrence;
 Identifying casualties;
 Informing and assisting relatives;
 Informing the news media;
 Informing/collaborating with the authorities and emergency services;
 Preserving records.
8.8.5 Emergency Management Plan
8.8.5.1 Elements of an Emergency Plan

The main elements of an emergency plan are as like as follows:
 Leadership and Administration;

 Role and Responsibilities of Key Personnel;
 Emergency action;
 Emergency Light and Power;
 Source of energy control;
 Protective and rescue equipment;
 Communication;
 Medical care/First Aid;
 Public relation;
 Protection of vital records;
 Training; and

 Periodical revision of plan.
8.8.5.2 Emergency Action Plan at project site

The action plan should consist of the following:
 Emergency Control Centre/Room; and

 Key Personnel.
It is very important to establish an emergency control center at the plant site for managing
any kind of emergency situation. This center will be the main center from where the
operations to handle the emergency will be directed and coordinated. After establishing the
control center/room, the following facilities to be made available in the emergency control
center/room:
 Internal and external communication system;

 Computer and other essential records;
 Daily attendance of workers employed in the plant/factory;
 Records of the storage of hazardous material and manufacturing;
 Pollution records;
 Walky-talky;
 Plan of the plant showing:
- Storage area of hazardous materials;
- Storage of safety equipment’s;

- Firefighting system and additional source of water;
- Site entrance, roadway and emergency exist;
- Assembly points;
- Truck parking area; and
- Surrounding location.
 Note Book, Pad and Pencil; and

 List of Key Personnel with addresses, telephone number etc.
8.8.5.3 Assembly Points

A safe place far away from the plant should be pre-determined as assembly point where in
case of emergency personnel evacuated from the affected areas are to be assembled. The
plant workers, contract workers and visitors should assemble in assembly point in case of
emergency and the time office clerk should take their attendance so as to assess the missing
persons during emergency.

8.8.5.4 The Key Personnel for Emergency in the plant
The following key personnel will be played vital role during the emergency situation in the
plant. Their roles and responsibilities for the emergency management are also given below:
a. Works Main Controller;
b. Works Incident Controller;
c. Other Key Officers
- Communication Officer;
- Security and Fire Officer;
- Telephone Operators;
- Medical Officer;
- Administrative Officer.
a. Works Main Controller
The General Manager of the plant should act as main controller. His duties are to:
- Assess the magnitude of the situation and decide whether the evacuation of staff
from the plant is needed;
- Exercise and direct operational control over areas other than those affected;
- Maintain a continuous review of possible development and assess in consultation
with work incident controller and other key personnel;
- Liaison with Police, Fire Service, Medical Services, Factory Inspectorate and other
Government Agencies;
- Direct and control rehabilitation of affected area after emergency; and
- Ensure that evidence is preserved for enquiries to be conducted by statutory
authorities.
The Works Main Controller will declare the emergency and he will instruct gate office to
operate the emergency siren after assessing the gravity of the situation.
b. Work Incident Controller
He is the next responsible officer after the works main controller. Generally the plant
manager is designated as work incident controller. In case of emergency he will rush to the
place of occurrence and take overall charge and report to the works main controller by
personnel communication system like cell phones or walky-talky and inform about the
magnitude of emergency. His duties are to:
- Assess the situation and considering the magnitude of emergency he will take
decision and inform Communication Officer to communicate the news of emergency
to different agencies;
- Give direction to stop all operations within the affected area;
- Take the charge of Main Controller till the Main Controller arrives;
- Order for shutdown and evacuation of workers and staffs from affected area;
- Inform all Key Personnel and all outside agency for help;

- Inform security and fire officers and Fire Services;
- Ensure that all non-essential workers/staff are evacuated to assembly point and
areas searched for casualties;
- Report all significant development to Communication Officer; and
- Advise to preserve evidence of emergency into the cause of emergency.
c. Other Key Personnel and their duties
1. Communication Officer
On hearing the emergency siren/alarm:
- He will proceed to the control center and communicate to work incident controller;
- He will collect information from the emergency affected area and send correct
message to work main controller for declaration of emergency;
- He will maintain a log book of incident;
- He will contact all essential departments;
- He will take stock of the meteorological condition from local meteorological
department;
- He will communicate all information as directed by works main controller.
2. Security and Fire Office
The Security or Fire officer will be responsible for the firefighting. On hearing the emergency
alarm/siren:
- He will reach the incident area with fire and security staff;
- He will inform through telephone or walky-talky to the communication officer;
- He will inform to the work incident controller about the situation and requirement of
outside help like Fire Service and other mutual aid members;
- At the site, the entire fire squad member will respond to the advice and information
given by the works incident controller; and
- The security will control the visitors and the vehicle entry.
3. Telephone Operator
In case of fire is discovered but no emergency siren is operated, he shall ensure the
information about the location of the fire/emergency incident from the persons
discovered/notices the above and communicate to different Key Personnel immediately
with clear message.
4. Medical Officer
Medical Officer with his team will report to the works incident controller on hearing the
fire/emergency siren immediately. The ambulance wills be parked nearest to the site of
incident. Name of injured and other casualties carried to the Hospital will be recorded and
handed over to Works Incident Controller. The ambulance will carry the injured to the
nearest hospital for treatment.

5. Personnel/Administrative Officer
He should work as a liaison officer liaising with works main controller and other essential
departments such as Police, Press and Statutory authorities. His responsibilities shall
include:
- To ensure that casualties receive adequate attention to arrange additional help if
required and inform relatives;
- To control traffic movement into the factory and ensure that alternative transport is
available when needed;
- When emergency is prolonged, arrange for the relief of personnel and organize
refreshment and catering facilities;
- Arrange for finance for the expenditure to handle the emergency.
8.9 Emergency Procedure

Safety Operating Procedure of Emergency Response Plan means executing step by step operation of
any Emergency situation which can occur inside the plant.
Based on these events, the required actions are determined. For Example:
1. Declare emergency
2. Siren/Sound and alert
3. Evacuate danger zone
4. Close main shutoffs
5. Call for external aid
6. Initiate rescue operation
7. Attend to casualties
8. Fight against the hazard.
The final consideration is a list and the location of resources needed:
1. Medical supplies
2. Auxiliary communication equipment
3. Power generator
4. Chemical and radiation detection equipment
5. Emergency protective clothing
6. Mobile equipment
7. Firefighting equipment
8. Ambulance
9. Rescue equipment
10. Trained personnel

Any person noticing the emergency shall report to their Department Head / Shift Executive / Shift
Supervisor either in person or through the intercom. The department Head / Shift Executive / Shift
Supervisor on receipt of the emergency shall visit the site to assess the situation. If the situation is an
emergency then he calls for an emergency.
8.10 Emergency facilities

The following facilities should be provided in the plant to tackle any emergency at any time:
 Fire protection and firefighting facilities (a pool/tank capacity is about 6000 m3 will
be preserved at the project site for emergency use during fire accident);
 Emergency lighting and standby power;
 Emergency equipment and rescue equipment:
- Breathing apparatus with compressed air cylinder.
- Fire proximity suit.

- Resuscitator.
- Water gel Blanket.
- Low temperature suit.

- First aid kit.
- Stretchers.
- Torches.
- Ladders
 Safety Equipment:
- Respirators.
- Gum boots.
- Safety helmets.
- Asbestos Rubber hand gloves.
- Goggles and face shield.
- Toxic gas measuring instruments.
- Explosive meter.
- Oxygen measuring instruments.
- Wind direction indicator.
8.10.1 Alarm System

Alarm system varies and will depend on the size of the works area - simple fire bell, hand
operated siren -break open type, fire alarm etc. Automatic alarm may be needed for highly
hazardous nature of plant.

8.10.2 Communication System
Communication is a key component to control an emergency. The following communication
system may be provided in the plant:
 Walky-Talky;
 Telephone (internal and external);
 Cell Phone;
 Intercom;
 Runners (verbal or written messages).
8.10.3 Siren for Emergency

Siren for emergency should be different from the normal siren. The emergency siren should
be audible to a distance of 5 KM radius. The emergency siren should be used only in case of
emergency.
8.10.4 Escape Route

The escape route from the plant should be clearly marked. The escape route will be the
shortest route to reach out of the plant area to open area, which leads to assembly point. This
route should be indicated on the layout plan attached to the Emergency Plan.
8.10.5 Evacuation
All non-essential staff should be evacuated from the emergency site. As soon as the
emergency siren rings the workers have to shut down the plant and move to the assembly
point. The plant shut down procedure in case of emergency should be prepared and kept
ready and responsible persons should be nominated for the purpose.
8.10.6 Counting of Personnel

All personnel working in the plant should be counted. Time office persons should collect the
details of personnel arriving at the assembly point. These should be checked with the
attendances of regular workers, contract workers present in the site on the day of
emergency. The accident control should be informed and arrangement should be made for
searching missing persons in the emergency affected area. The employees’ address, contact number
of next to kin should be maintained in the time office so that during emergency
relatives of those affected due to emergency may be informed accordingly. Information in
respect of emergency should be given to the media and other agency.
8.10.7 All Clear Signal

After control of emergency the work incident controller will communicate to the works main
controller about the cessation of emergency. The main controller can declare all clear by
instructing the time office to sound “All Clear Sirens”.

8.10.8 Mutual Aid System
Mutual aid scheme should be introduced so that in case of emergency necessary help from
mutual aid partner may be extended. Essential elements of this scheme are:
 Mutual aid must be a written document signed by the Chief Executive of the
industries concerned;
 Specify key personnel who are authorized to give requisition of materials from other
industries;
 Specify the available quantity of material/equipment that can be spared;
 Mode of requisition during emergency;
 Mode of payment/replacement of material given during an emergency;
 May be updated from time to time based on experience gained.
Mock drills on emergency planning should be conducted once in 6 months and sequence of events
should be recorded for improvement of the exercise.Exercises on Onsite Emergency
Planning should be monitored by Factory Inspectorate and the high officials of the organization and
the plan is reviewed every year.
8.11 Activities Due to Emergency

Attendee of incident place shall inform Control Room & Emergency Response Team in case of
emergency.
 Stop work immediately and vacate the workplace.

 Shut down the electrical connection.
 All employees will go to the designated Fire Assembly Point located & mark in the specific
area of DECPCL.
 Any Emergency Response Team member or designated person shall notify the fire
department and fire service and important person by phone.
 Once fire department has been notified and it is safe to do so, trained Fire Fighting team
may attempt to extinguish small fires. All fires need to be reported to the senior authority.
 When the incident place has been evacuated a head count shall be done by the designated
person accounting for all employees on place including those who may be trying to
extinguish the fire.
 A List of personnel on place, updated and current will be kept in the Personnel office.
 The Emergency Response Team is responsible to ensure the requirement of fire department
and gives all pertinent information.
 Facility should provide first aid attendants as well as medical equipment suitable for the
people if any injury took place during incident and quickly react to give maximum medical
facility.

8.11.1 Record Keeping
Record is a combination of information and helps employers and workers to understand industrial
hazards its causes and implementation of proper task. Recordkeeping of any incident shows require
steps need to be taken and weakness of previous incident. For proper recordkeeping need to
maintain some regular procedure as-
 Emergency Response Plan

 Emergency training records
 Previous incident record
 Module and materials used for training
 Emergency preparedness drill/rehearsal
 Evaluation feedback from training and emergency drills;
 Records and information about previous incidents
8.11.2 Responsibility
ERP Coordinators: Any person of Emergency Response Team can act as a responsible person
during working day. They are responsible to handle any types of emergency situation individually
and follow up the all preventive procedure followed by respective team. They communicate to all
local administrative personal or offices during emergency occur.
Shift Executive: Shift Executive isacting as a site controller’s role during night shift operation and
will be continuing the role till any above mention person comes to the factory. Security supervisor is
to assess all types of emergency work with the shift executive.
Security supervisor: Security supervisors acting as a site controller role during Holiday or weekly
off day and he will be continuing the role till any above mention persons comes to the factory.
First Aid Team: The member of the first aid team is totally responsible to handle any type of
personal injury / accident and communicate the same to crisis management team and follow up
their guidance and procedure as illustrated bellow.
8.12 Emergency Response for Natural Hazards

Flood
 Evacuate the people from flooded area and send them to a safe area.
 Switch of the power supply from effected area.
 Remove all types of obstructions from the drainage system.
 Coordinate with the Emergency Response Team and take action as per their guideline.
 In cases of any accident in human life please call first aid team and get medical attention as
soon as possible.
 Call local fire brigade through communication system in case of worst or out of control
situation.
 In case of over flood polythine and sand bag to protect adverse effect.

Cyclone
 Switch off the Power Supply of Sub-station.

 Close all the in & out doors where possible wind enters.
 Open windows, exhaust at the top of the walls if present and allow the wind go from top
which enters into the plant shades.
 Instruct all the associates including workmen not to allow them to go outside till the wind &
cyclone effect reduces to the normal level
 After the cyclone, inform to Emergency Response Team to investigate the property loss in
the plant for further action.
Earthquake
 Isolate electrical supply where ever it is possible.

 Do not use elevators.
 All electric connection of the DECPCL should be cut off on that time. And the important
thing is that, everybody will go in a safe place from near of the building.
 Ensure fire and siren alarm system in all floors. During earthquake all the employees will
come down in safe place in a row through stair after hearing the alarm.
 Have to follow the instruction regarding earthquake
 Have to evacuate as per evacuation plan
 We should have Rescue Team to help the injured employees or who get down. And they
will also take the injured employees in a safe place.
 Isolate all pipelines of steam, compressed air, fuel and CO2 when they are not in use.
 Check availability of security personnel and have a chat with them in view of likely
immediate action to be taken.
 Empty such tanks which are installed in vertical and relatively unstable conditions.
 Take a review of material storage and ensure that maximum of such material is removed
from places from where it can fall down. Uniform Material distribution at a lowest height
from floor is the safest way of storage.
 Ensure caps on all compressed gas cylinders,
 Immediate ready to use all Emergency equipment like stretchers, breathing equipment,
PPEs, Dewatering, portable welding gas cutting equipment, emergency lights, Battery
operated public address equipment, Ropes, lifting tackles, trolleys, emergency medical
equipment, etc.
 Emergency transport vehicle shall be parked in open so that it is free from any falling object.
 Identify critical and weak areas of the building and organize to support them adequately to
prevent collapse.
 Check storage of Hazardous Chemicals to comply with normal storage safety requirements.
 Keep Fire Hydrant accessible, Keep newest and good conditioned fire hoses and Fire
extinguishers readily available.
 Remove unwanted combustible material.

 Review that room heater, electric hot plates and other sources of ignition that are normally
used in winter situations are operated, handled and stored safely.
 Ensure that flammable liquids i.e. Petrol, Diesel and other petroleum products are stored
under secondary containment with due precautions.
 Over and above ensure that personnel are alert and do not panic.
 Ensure the average 6 feet height of raw materials and finish good.
8.13 Emergency Response Plan for Other Hazards
8.13.1 Fire
 Evacuate the people from Fire occurred surrounding area and send through safe exit
direction.
 Remove unwanted combustible material.
 Keep cool and do not panic.
 Inform to substation and electrician to get the affected area isolated from power supply.
 Keep Fire Hydrant accessible.
 Keep newest and good conditioned fire hoses and Fire Extinguishers readily available.
 Ensure one operator is always present at Hydrant system area when using the fire Hydrant
system.
 If the fire is very small, use the correct Fire Extinguisher for extinguishing the fire.
 Try to isolate the fire by removing the surrounding inflammable material from within reach
of fire.
 In case of big fire use local Hydrant system for extinguishing the fire.
 If the fire is beyond the control inform the security or higher authority to call local fire
Brigade and Inform Senior manager (Factory Incharge) or Emergency Response Team.
 On arrival of the fire brigade pave way for them reach the exact site of fire.
 In case of any accident in human life please call first aid team and get medical attention as
quickly as possible.
8.13.2 Fatal Accidents

 During emergency operation if there is any injured person, carry out victim /causality to the
security room and Conference Room also OHS Room beside the support of company
recommended nursing home.
 Call First Aid Team and carry out the first aid with the help of first aid item.
 Inform to Emergency Response Team.
 If the accident is severe then call emergency vehicle and immediately rush the injured
person to local hospital or company recommended nursing home. Phone numbers are
available in bellow.
 Fill in the accident report form with the help of witness and deposit the same to the
Emergency Response Team.

8.13.3 Utilities Failure
Examples of utility failure that may occur are electrical outage, plumbing failure/flooding, HFO
pipe line leak, steam line break, ventilation problems and/or elevator failure. In the event of a
failure, immediately notify Emergency Response Team.
 For emergencies and potential danger or after hours call to Control room 333.
 In a situation where a building needs to be evacuated, please proceed to the building specific
evacuation area.
 Turn off equipment, machines and computers.
 Assist disabled persons as needed.
 Do not use elevators.
 Stay at the designated evacuation area until the fire department or designated representative
has given the “all clear” to re-enter the building.
8.14 Emergency Plan should contain
DECPCL power plant authority will prepare immediately an emergency plan before the starting of
commercial production. In this emergency plan following matters will be consider:
 Site plan and Topographic plan;

 Plan showing the firefighting facilities;
 Plan showing hazardous material storage area;
 Material safety data sheets for hazardous chemicals;
 Facilities available in main control center;
 List of emergency equipment’s;
 List of safety equipment’s;
 List of important telephone numbers and addresses;
- Nearest hospitals and ambulance service center;
- Nearest fire station;
- Govt. Officials;
- Transport.
 Names and address and contact telephone number of Key Personnel.
The emergency plan shall be documented in a printed form in sufficient copies to give all
concerned for knowledge, study and easy follow up. The emergency plan shall be rehearsed
and practiced at regular intervals to test efficiency of personnel, equipment coordinated efforts
and to increase confidence and experience to operate such plan. The plan so prepared should be
updated annually and uploaded in the factory website for easy reference.

9 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
Occupational health and safety (OHS) programs are a legal requirement and every workplace must have
an OHS program to help prevent accidents and injuries. An effective program will also help deal with
any incidents that do occur.
The occupational health and safety service in Bangladesh is still in the developmental stage. Here the
occupational health & safety refers mainly to needs of workers of industries or some manufacturing
processes but does not completely cover all occupations of the country. The main laws related to
occupational health & safety in this country is the Factory Act 1965 and the Factory Rule of 1979. There
are a number of other laws and regulations that are also have some provisions related to occupational
health and safety. These laws have provisions on occupational hygiene, occupational diseases, industrial
accidents, protection of women and young persons in dangerous occupations and also cover conditions
of work, working hours, welfare facilities, holidays, leave etc. But most of the laws are lacking in
standard values and not specific rather general in nature.
9.1 Health and safety aspects

 Types of accommodation
 Standards for workers’ accommodation
 General living facilities
 Drainage
 Heating, air conditioning, ventilation and light
 Water
 Waste water and solid waste
 Room/dormitories facilities
 Sanitary and toilet facilities
 Shower/bathroom and other sanitary facilities
 Canteen- cooking and laundry facilities
 Standards for nutrition and food safety
9.2 Personnel Safety

Personnel safety includes protecting clothes, helmets, googles or other garments and equipment to
protect the wearer’s body from injury or infection. All these safety measures will be provided to the
employee. Safe and good occupational health status of the employees and workers is important for not
only the persons working in the plant, but also the better plant operation and maintenance. Protective
clothing the accessories should be provided to the workers, who would be subjected to the exposure to
hazardous substances and situation.
9.3 Medical Surveillance
Regular medical check-up is to be done to ensure the soundness of health of the employee and workers.
Pollution control measures are to be duly adopted as necessary, including noise and emission control, so
that there would be any negative occupational health impact. Insurance for all employees should be
taken out. A senior medical officer with sufficient background and experience in occupational health
problems should coordinate this issue and would be responsible for drawing up and implementing a
detailed and regular program for ensuring health safety for all the workers in the industrial unit.

9.4 Fire Safety
The proponent also will construct an underground water reservoir for firefighting. They will also store
enough fire extinguishers to the project area to control emergency situation. A training session need to
be organized to train the employee on how to use the fire extinguisher. They should also maintain a
regular communication with the local fire service station.

10 GRIEVANCE REDRESS MECHANISM (GRM)
10.1 Introduction
The implementation of an infrastructural project is a complex time and labor intensive process
involving multitude of lifecycle phases and processes. Over the duration of the project, it
encounters numerous instances of conflicts, allegation and dissatisfaction within the working and as
associated human capital and their interactions. Some of these issues could be related to
compensation payment, improper estimation of affected assets, failure to fulfil commitments, poor
management of construction activities, accidents due to inappropriate planning of vehicle
movement, and cultural conflicts between migrant workers and local communities etc. amongst
others. Most of the conflicts and allegations may not appear to be of serious nature but if not
managed appropriately from the beginning may snowball into a bigger issue. In order to manage
these risks, an internal mechanism is required to be in place where the aggrieved party/s can lodge
their complaints and get it amicably settled prior to approaching the formal mode of solution
available to them i.e. access to legal system through courts. In order to provide a formal forum to
the aggrieved parties to deal with issues arising out of project, it is proposed that a joint grievance
redress mechanism be instituted for both environmental and social related issues.
The proposed Grievance Redress Mechanism (GRM) will be developed for the Project in order to
settle as many disputes as possible through consultations, negotiation and mutual settlement. Such
a mechanism is important as it is expected that most cases, if not all, would be resolved amicably;
and the process, as a whole, will promote dispute settlement through mediation to reduce litigation.
However, the options of legal recourse will not be restricted in any way by the project proponent.
10.2 Objectives of Grievance Redress Mechanism

The basic objective of the GRM shall be to provide an accessible mechanism to the affected people,
community or any stakeholder(s) having stake in the project to raise their issues and grievances as
well as concerns. The Grievance non- judicial will seek to resolve non-judicial disputes arising out
of various matters related to the implementation of the ESMP, as well as other aspects of the project,
as may deemed fit to be raised before the GRC.
The fundamental objective of GRM is to resolve any social (including labor, contractor, community
amongst others) and environmental related grievances locally in consultation with the aggrieved
party to facilitate smooth implementation of project related work activities. The other important
objective is to democratize the development process at the local level and to establish accountability
towards the stakeholders.
10.3 Composition of GRC

Keeping into context that the project is mostly void of any significant impact, it is suggested to have
only one single level of grievance redress mechanism or agency for the project. This agency shall be
called as the Grievance Redress Cell (GRC).
The GRC will be driven internally by DECPCL and shall have the following representation to
ensure fair and timely solution to the grievances:

 Site personnel serving as the EHS/Community relations officer shall also serve as the
Grievance Officer. The DECPCL EHS Officer can take this role and responsibility;
 Senior Representative on behalf of DECPCL and part of the site level project management
team. In most cases, this individual shall be of an authority Site Manager is not available,
this role may be deputed to his immediate deputy or any individual with that level of
authority;
 Any other concerned person with decision making authority in relevance to the grievance or
aggrieved party. For example Senior contractor personnel as a part of the GRC in case of a
contractor labor dispute or issue;
A grieved party shall register their grievances with the GRC. The GRC shall be empowered to take a
decision which is to be considered final and binding on Lance. However, the decision of the GRC is
not binding on the aggrieved person and he or she may take the grievance to the administrative
setup in case any grievance channel is available at that level or take a legal course, in case not
satisfied with the outcome of GRC decision.
10.4 Functional Premises of GRC for Grievance Redress

The GRC meetings will be held in Lance project office at site and the same will be widely publicized
in project area for the knowledge of general public. The key responsibilities of GRC are as follows:
 Review, consider and resolve grievances related to social and environmental aspects
received by the Lance Field Office having the GRC; Entertain grievances of indirectly
affected persons and/or persons affected during project implementation;
 Resolve grievances within a period of two weeks at the GRC level and communication of the
resolution to the aggrieved party;
 The GRC shall not engage in any review of the legal standing of an “awardee” nor shall deal
with any matters pending in the court of law;
 Arrive at decisions through consensus, failing which resolution will be based on majority
vote. Any decision made by the GRC must be within the purview of Environmental
Management Plan, Corporate EHS and Social Policies or any such documents of relevance of
that matter;
 In case the grievance relates to environmental monitoring results or engineering matters, the
GRC will validate the information available to it, as provided by Lance Project management
team/ environmental monitoring team. However, GRC will not be in a position to question
the validity of the data provided to it. The GRC team shall meet at least twice a month for
review of grievances registered and the resolution vetted out to the concerned parties. The
frequency of meeting may increase or decrease depending on the number grievances
received.
 If needed, may undertake field visits to verify and review the issues, dispute or other
relevant matters.
10.5 Disclosure of the Grievance Redress Mechanism
Some of the important points regarding disclosure of the grievance e redress mechanism are:

 The grievance redress process shall be disclosed and the procedures mentioned therein shall
be properly disseminated to the identified stakeholders.
 DECPCL shall integrate it as a part of the training programmed especially those con ducted
for self-employees and those of the contractors. For the rest of the stakeholders including the
community, it can be displayed at important places such as town centers, at site gates and on
the website.
 The disclosure and the display shall clearly mention the name and designation of the
grievance redress officials, office location and their respective contact numbers.
 GRM procedures and operational rules will be publicized widely through community
meetings and pamphlets in the local language (Bangle) so that people are aware of their
rights and obligations, and procedure of grievance redress.
10.6 Grievance Reporting Procedure under GRM

An aggrieved person, a group of persons or a community will be able to file grievances without any
fear and intimidation. The grievances can be submitted in either in writing or may be submitted
orally/ telephonically to the GRC; the whole purpose is to make the GRM easily accessible to the
affected population. Once the complaint is received, acknowledgement of the same will be made to
the complainant, and tentative date of hearing may be communicated to him/her in advance. The
complainant may be represented by him/her or appointed agent for hearing of grievance. The
decision made by GRC will be communicated to the concerned person/group/community in
writing. If dissatisfied, with the decision of the GRC, the person/ group/ community may either
register the grievance at the administrative level in case there are necessary channels for the same or
take a legal course.
10.7 Grievance Redress Process of GRC

The grievance redress procedure will include the stepwise procedure, to deal with any grievance
that comes for redress before the GRC. A schematic representation of the grievance redresses
procedure to be followed by DECPCL is presented in Figure 10-1.

Figure 10-1: Grievance Redress Process for the Project
Grievances primarily related to any serious event such as accidents involving g the community,
labor related major disputes such as non-payment of wages or work related injuries or fatalities,
major intrusion of project on any community resource, and other issues for which the aggrieved
party in his or her free will wants to register a grievance or complaint.
The process followed will follow the following steps:
 On receipt of complaint the GRC shall give an acknowledgement to the complainant with
date, time and venue of hearing of his/her grievance.
 The GRC shall prepare a brief note on the grievance for discussion on scheduled date. On
the given date, the GRC shall hear the complainant and give its decision. A written copy of
decision shall be provided to the complainant. If the complainant is satisfied with the
decision, an acknowledgement of same shall be obtained from him on the decision copy and
the case shall be closed.
 If the complainant is not satisfied with the outcome of GRC’s decision, he or she can opt for
any grievance redress forum available at the administrative level or undertake the course of
law available to him/her. However, every effort shall be made to resolve the case amicably

without resorting to legal course of action. While the process continues, a proper
documentation of the records shall be maintained by DECPCL, pertaining to each of the
grievance in a proper grievance register or record.
10.8 Monitoring and Evaluation
Like the other project components, GRM shall be monitored to ensure that the stakeholders are
having no or limited issues with the project and in case there are concerns, they are being
adequately addressed as per the mandate. In order to keep track on the effectiveness of GRM, it is
the responsibility of DECPCLEnvironment and Social team to compile and maintain database on
grievances for periodic review. The mechanism shall be based on two components, internal
monitoring and reporting and external monitoring and reporting which shall run simultaneously.
Mostly this shall be aligned with simultaneous process monitoring rather than doing it separately
all the time.
10.9 Budgeting
The DECPCL administration shall ensure adequate budgeting and resource allocation for
implementing the grievance redress mechanism.

11 PUBLIC CONSULTATION
11.1 Introduction
This chapter presents all the stakeholders identified and consulted and elaborates on the main
issues and concerns rose by these stakeholders during the scoping exercise and the detailed ESIA
study. Stakeholders were identified during the scoping stage and throughout the ESIA study. Views
from the general public, local leaders, surrounding institutions, communities and development
partners who are interested in and/or would be potentially affected by the proposed project were
consulted through interviews and public meetings. The stakeholder consultations were held to
ensure that interested and affected parties were informed of the project. The consultations allowed
stakeholders to present their views concerning the proposed project. Recording stakeholders' views
and preferences was essential to inform the identification of impacts and drawing effective
mitigation measures that are presented in this report.
11.2 Objective of the consultation and public participation
The overall objective of the consultation process was to disseminate project information and to
incorporate the views of stakeholders in the design of the environmental and social mitigation
measures, management plan and monitoring plan. The specific objectives of the consultation
process were to:
1. Improve project design and thereby, minimize conflicts and delays in implementation;
2. Increase long term project sustainability and ownership;
3. Reduce problems of institutional coordination; and
4. Consult stakeholders to gather the information needed to complete the assessment.
11.3 Public involvement and disclosure
Public participation is a process through which different stakeholders influence and share their
views regarding development initiatives and the decisions and resources that affect them.
Comprehensive planning is required to ensure that local government, institutions, NGOs, project
staff and affected men and women interact regularly and purposefully during all stages of the
project. Engagement with stakeholders and the public in general was mainly through consultations
and meetings. These were held throughout the entire ESIA study period in the core impact area and
project area of influence.
11.4 Approach and Methodology for Consultation
The approach undertaken for information disclosure and consultation involved the following key
processes.
 Mapping and identification of key stakeholders such as primary (direct project influence)
and secondary (indirect project influence) stakeholders;
 Undertaking expert consultations, interviews and focus group discussions (FGD) with the
respective stakeholders;
 Undertaking structured on field consultations, interviews and FGD with the respective
stakeholders;
 Assessing the influence and impact of the project on these stakeholder groups;

 Summarizing of key findings and observations from the consultations; and
 Preparing a future stakeholder engagement strategy consultation plan for a more detailed
assessments at a microscopic level taking into account the various project lifecycle phases
and their implications on the stakeholder.
11.5 Stakeholder Assessment

A stakeholder is defined as “a person, group, or organization that has direct or indirect stake in a
project/organization because it can affect or be affected by the project or its proponent’s actions,
objectives and policies”. Stakeholders vary in terms of degree of interest, influence and control they
have over the project or the proponent. In the present study, all the stakeholders have been
primarily categorized into two types that have been identified as:
 Primary Stakeholders: include people, groups, institutions that either have a direct influence
on the project or are directly impacted (positively or adversely) by the project and its
activities; and
 Secondary stakeholders: are those that have a bearing on the project and its activities by the
virtue of their being closely linked or associated with the primary stakeholders and due to
the influence they have on the primary stakeholder groups.
 Apart from categorization, the stakeholders have also been classified in accordance with the
level of influence they have over the project as well as their priority to the project proponent
in terms of importance.
The influence and priority have both been primarily rates as:
- High Influence/Priority (Manage Closely): People who have high power and interest are
grouped in this category. They always must be managed closely. This implies a high degree
of influence of the stakeholder on the project in terms of participation and decision making
or high priority for project proponent to engage that stakeholder.
- Medium Influence/Priority (Keep Satisfied/ keep informed): People who have high power
but low interest as well as who have high interest but low power should be kept satisfied or
informed. This implies a moderate level of influence and participation of the stakeholder in
the project as well as a priority level for project proponent to engage the stakeholder who
are neither highly critical nor are insignificant in terms of influence.
- Low Influence/Priority (Monitor with minimum effort): This implies a low degree of
influence or interest of the stakeholder on the project in terms of participation and decision
making or low priority for project proponent to engage that stakeholder.

Figure 11-1: Power/Interest Grid for Stakeholder Prioritization
How they are likely to feel about and react to the project, how best to engage them in the project
and how best to communicate with them, are measured by getting answers of following questions:
 What financial or emotional interest do they have in the outcome of your work? Is it positive
or negative?
 What motivates those most of all?
 What information do they want from the project?
 How do they want to receive information? What is the best way of communicating?
 What is their current opinion? Is it based on good information?
 Who influences their opinions generally?
 If they are not likely to be positive, what will win them around to support the project?
 What should be done to manage stakeholders’ opposition?
 Who else might be influenced by stakeholders’ opinions?
Stakeholders were talked directly and asked their opinions in building a successful relationship
with them.

Table 11-1: Stakeholder Mapping for the Project
Overall
Category
Stakeholders of Brief profile influence on Basis of Influence Rating
stakeholder the project
Project Management
Desh Energy Primary  Desh Energy is the primary Highest - Are the primary project proponents;
Chandpur Power project proponent own a - Primary financial beneficiaries;
Company Limited controlling stake of 100% in - Responsible for all the project related risks and impact
the project liabilities;
- Responsible for establishment and operation of this
project.
Community
Local Community Primary  Primarily includes adjacent Medium - Improvement in infrastructure in the area;
community to the project - Project will bring development to the area;
site - Increase in employment opportunities and preference
in job;
- Approach road may be developed in future;
- Business or economic condition will be improved.
Vulnerable Groups
Primary  The marginal groups within Low - Employment opportunity during pre-construction and
(poor, old aged, and
the project area primarily construction phase;
destitute)
comprises of landless - Prioritization for getting further assistance if any;
households as a result of - Job prospect for their children;
land loss, households below - Secondary business opportunities;
poverty threshold, women
- Low interest with low influence.
headed households, old

Overall
Category of
Stakeholders Brief profile influence on the project Basis of Influence Rating
stakeholder
aged & destitute.

Local workers and Primary  Laborers and workers Medium - Responsible for undertaking mostly un-skill and
laborers recruited from the area of semiskilled based work during pre-construction and
influence mostly during the construction phase of the project
pre-construction and - Engagement level primary in civil construction part of
construction phase of the the work.
project.
Fisherman Primary  Fisherman in the area is Medium - Medium scale for self-consumption and business
primarily engaging in box purpose.
culture fishing.
Regulatory/Administrative Authorities & Agencies
Department of Primary  The Department of High - Government Regulatory agency to provide
Environment (DoE), Environment (DoE) is the Environmental Clearance (EC) to the project based on
Bangladesh primary government evaluation and approval of Environmental Impact
regulatory authority for Assessment (ESIA) study;
Environmental protection in - Responsible for monitoring project’s Environmental
Bangladesh. compliance throughout the project lifecycle;
- High influence and high interest.
Department of Secondary  Local governmental agency Low - No major influence on project related activities;
Social Welfare responsible for - However participation level and influence may
implementation of increase in case community welfare activities proposed
governmental social welfare by the project proponent are implemented in
schemes and activities. coordination with this agency.

Overall
Category of
Stakeholders Brief profile influence on the project Basis of Influence Rating
stakeholder
Other Regulatory & Primary High - Agencies required for obtaining permits and licenses
Permitting for establishment and operation of the project;
-
Authorities - Primary involvement during pre-construction and
operation phases.
Political Administration
Thana Political Secondary  Elected representative of Medium - Key linkage between the community and the project
Administration people at Thana level for a proponent;
fixed tenure. - Low interest with high influence.
Ward leaders & Primary  Elected representative at Medium - Issuance of no objection certificate as the
local representatives ward level for a fixed tenure. representative of the local level representative;
- Plays important role in providing public opinion and
sentiment on the project;
- Empowered to provide consent and authorization for
establishment of project on behalf of the community.
Other Institutional Stakeholders Groups
Printed and Secondary - Medium - Public watchdog on the project related activities;
Electronic Media - No major influence on the project.

11.6 Information Disclosure and Consultation
Numbers of consultation exercises were conducted during field visit and baseline data collection for
ESIA study report preparation. The stakeholder’s were consulted include local people, community
in the vicinity of project area, local elected representatives and other external stakeholders such as
government officials. The details of consultations held with issues raised or discussed and
suggestions provided by the respective stakeholders are presented in the following sub-sections.
Photographs of the stakeholder meeting are shown in Figure 11-2.
A combination of mixed methods of information disclosure and consultation process was adopted
at this stage of ESIA preparation. The method selected for consultation was basically designed
keeping in mind the profile of the stakeholders, type of information desired and level of
engagement required. In each consultation session the consultant introduced themselves,
introduced the project and the purpose of engagement with the respective stakeholder. The primary
methods followed in the consultation process are:
 Individual level consultation/discussion;

 Key Informant Interview (KII);
 Focus Group Discussion (FGD); and
 Public Consultation.
A. Views of Md. Hassan, Assistant Teacher, Gunrajdi Government Primary School
Md. Hassan has been working at Gunrajdi Government Primary School as Assistant Teacher. The
school was established in 1938 and reestablished in 1999. There are approx. 500 students currently
enrolled in the government primary school. The school is located at just opposite of the project
adjacent river. His suggestion was to establishment of air pollution and noise generation unit as far
as possible from the school. Project authority should have in mind that a lot of students come to the
school by crossing the river. The school authority has no objection but the project authority must be
responsible for providing associated facilities for school going students.
B. Views of Mr. Abdul Matin, Upazila Engineer, Local Government Engineering Department
(LGED), Chandpur Sadar Upazila, Chandpur.
Mr. Matin told that the demand of electricity is increasing day by day. So i think HFO based power
plant helps to improve the performance of the power sector in Bangladesh. LGED is responsible for
the construction and maintenance of rural road network in Bangladesh. So if there anything to do
LGED should take the step.
C. Views of Mr. Showkat Kabir Choudhury. Senior Upazila Fisheries Officer, Chandpur Sadar
Upazila, Chandpur.
Mr. Kabir stated that Impact due to the power plant activities to the surface water bodies is
considerable. But should aware of the fact that not to pollute adjacent any cannel as much as
possible. Some box culture fishing is located in project surrounding area.
D. Views of Mr Md Abdur Sattar, Sub Assistant Engineer, Dept. of Public Health Engineering,
Chandpur Sadar Upazila, Chandpur.
Mr. Sattar stated that in the proposed power plant a large amount of water will be used from the
ground water source or surface water source. Due to the rapid lowering of static water level and the

proposed power plant, irrigation problems may be upraised in this area. So project proponent
should keep in their mind about this ground water issue.
E. Views of Mrs Atia Parveen, Upazila Agriculture Officer, Chandpur Sadar Upazila, Chandpur.
Mr. Parveen stated that Project area was agricultural land. So there is some impact on agriculture.
Project proponent must develop well drainage system beside agricultural land otherwise in rainy
season land will be under water. Solid waste should manage properly. He also said that Waste
water treatment must be essential.
F. Views of Mr. Kazi Sumon, Senior Chemist, DoE, Chandpur.
Mr. Sumon mentioned that Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd. is required to follow the
procedure applicable for RED category industry for Environment Clearance. He also stated that the
proponent should oblige by terms and condition of environment Clearance during construction and
operation stage. He also suggested that the proponent should have emergency management plan
for fire, explosion and other hazards. He also added, without treatment no effluent or waste water
is allowed to discharge into the adjacent River from the power plant.
Consultation with Mr. Md. Hassan, Assistant Consultation with Mr. Kazi Sumon,
Teacher, Gunrajdi Government Primary School Senior Chemist, DoE, Chandpur.
Consultation with Mr. Siddiqur Rahman Dhali, Consultation with Mr. Md Abu Ryhan, Executive
Panel Mayor, Chandpur Municipality, Chandpur. Engineer, Bangladesh Water Development Board
(BWDB), Chanfpur O&M Division, Chandpur.

Consultation with Mr. Md Kamruzzaman, Assistant Director and
Assistant Port & traffic officer, BIWTA, Chandpur
Figure 11-2: Photographs taken during consultation with Stakeholders
11.7 Public Consultation Meeting

The public consultation meeting was held on 08 October, 2017 at North Gunrajdi. The proceedings
commenced at 05:04 PM. The meeting was attended by a total of 51 people, which represent the,
local people and senior citizen. Public consultation meeting minutes has been given in Table 11-2.
Photographs and attendance sheet of the public consultation meeting is shown in Annex D, E in
volume-2 of the report.
Table 11-2: Brief overview of the Public Consultation Meeting
SL. Name Occupation Comment/Question
1. Mr. Nurul Rajmistri - I request to keep the sound and other environmental hazard
Islam in limit. We expect disturb free environment which will be
Sheikh appreciable from us.
- I don’t know either you used sound free new technology or not
but project proponent should.
- To help the affected people by giving jobs in the power plant.
- To provide continuous help to the Mosque. Madrasah,
graveyard and other social institutions.
2. Mr. Rubel Business - Power plant for the development of the country is good
Hossain decision but it should be installed in outside of the locality so
Sheikh that the rural people can protect them from environmental
pollution.
- Need to minimize the sound pollution and even in operation
time.
- Company can fulfill our loss by giving job opportunity in the
plant.
3. Mr. Roisul Teacher - Firefighting system and health and safety is a major concerning
Islam issue for power plant project;
- Proper lighting facilities around the boundary can ensure the
safety and security for the local community as well as the

SL. Name Occupation Comment/Question
project authority;
- Drainage system must be there.
4.
Abdul Business - To pay the Land price to the actual land owner;
Samad - Be careful when the heavy vehicle move in the road so that the
Bhuiyan road structure may not damage. The road is very important for
us to move;
- The land owner who have lost their total land please provide
them by giving a job based on their skill or provide them some
fund or training on small enterprise
- Company should keep the environment for living friendly.
5.
Mr Md Business - Concern about their farming agricultural products due to the
Joynul would be impact of power plant;
Islam
- Concern about the ground water level;
- They want work opportunity in the plant site;
- Meaningful community development in the affected areas was
demanded;
6.
Mrs. Home
Halima - Demand for a river embankment
maker
7.
Sunnu Business
Mijhi - Land purchase system should have been more transparent
11.8 Focus Group Discussion

Discussion was held with the local people at Char-Gunrajdi, Chandpur Sadar. Date, location and
the number of participants of each discussion is listed in Table 11-3. The local people attended the
focus group discussion meeting include Businessmen, Driver and Fisherman etc. The summary of
Focus Group Discussion (FGD) is shown in Table 11-3.Photographs and attendance sheet of FGDs
are shown in Annex F, G.
Table 11-3: Details of Focus Group Discussion
SL# Date Location Participants Category of participants
1. Tohoshildar Bari, Char-

09-10-2017 Gunrajdi, Chandpur Sadar 11 Local Community
2. Patwari Bari, Char-Gunrajdi,

10-10-2017 Chandpur Sadar 11 Land Owner
Table 11-4: Summary of Focus Group Meeting

Participant’s Opinion, comments and Suggestions
Response to Questions/Action Point
Issues Discussed
General perception about the Most of the participants are in favor of the Acceptance of the project
proposed project and the project and have been made aware of the
awareness about the proposed proposed project through the various
project surveys that have taken place

Participant’s Opinion, comments and Suggestions
Response to Questions/Action Point
Issues Discussed
Support of local people for the Almost everybody said that they will The consultants informed
proposed project? support the project and advised the that during the study, the
consultants to take precautions in the design and layout of all
environmental mitigation to avoid the infrastructures have been
various impacts anticipated during the considered the anticipated
pre-construction, construction and adverse impacts
operation stages of the project and to
ensure protection of the natural water
bodies of the areas
Does the proposed project People of the project area site were aware Impact of the project upon
create any problem with of this problem specially the water ambient air, noise quality,
ambient air, noise quality and pollution. They think they will suffer for water quality is assessed in
water quality? oil contamination in water during heavy the ESIA study
rainfall for HFO based power plant.
Any critical issue or concern Respondents requested that Noise mitigation, water
by the local people regarding environmental hotspots (like school, pollution and gas emission
the project? Or Any criteria temples, mosques etc.) should be avoided are considered in the EMP
you would like to see as much as possible. Moreover, noise
considered during project mitigation, water pollution and gas
design, construction and emission must be considered
operation stage?
Is the proposed project going All the participants raised their voice for Some concerns over safety,
to provide better traffic reconstructing the existing road for better supporting design measures
system? traffic system such as increased number of
sign board, road mark, bump
etc.
Protected areas (national The proposed project construction area
parks protected forest, has no any protected or ecological critical
-
historical or archaeological area.
sites), if any
Employment Status: Employment is expected in the project Job chance and employment
Percentage of area will be enhanced and
employment/unemployment/ promoted once the pre-
underemployment construction and
construction has been started
If this project is improved, The respondents welcome the project. Residents understand that
there may be large groups of Many observed that the measures are construction impacts can be
workers living temporarily in temporary and besides there will be more expected and do not have an
the area and construction chances for local communities to be issue with these, provided
operations that generate noise employed during construction, providing safety measures are taken
and other pollutants. Are skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled labor.
there any other issues?

12 CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATION
12.1 Conclusion
The following conclusions are drawn from this EIA study;
 Proposed 200 MW HFO fired power plant project of Desh Enegry Chandpur Power
Company Limited located at Gunrajdi, Chandpur Sadar, Chandpur will produce electricity
to supply national grid line.
 The project proponent has obtained the clearance for the proposed power plant from the
local authority and DoE
 This EIA report has been prepared for DECPCL in accordance with but not limited to the
environmental guideline published by the DoE. The report is one of the requirements of DoE
to issue environmental clearance of the proposed power plant.
 Multiple data collection technique has been used in conducting the EIA study which
included document review, observation, and interview with key informants, focus group
discussions and interaction with the DOE personnel. The EIA is prepared through
identifying the potential impacts, assessing them and recommending possible mitigating
and enhancing measure for adverse and positive impacts respectively.
 No major adverse environmental impact is to be associated during operation phase of the
proposed plant. However, appropriate mitigating measures would be undertaken that
would reduce the low to medium impacts to an acceptable level as prescribed in the
Environmental Quality Standards of Bangladesh. All these mitigating measures have been
discussed in details in Chapter 5 of this report. The management aspect of environmental
and social parameters associated with these impacts has also been discussed in Chapter 7 of
the EIA report.
 The proposed power generation facility is given highest priority by the present Government
of Bangladesh to provide affordable and reliable electricity for all citizens by 2021.
 Power energy is an indicator of development of any country. This project will contribute to
development of entire Bangladesh.
 This project is also provide employment for many persons and thus help reduce
unemployment problem of Bangladesh
 Overall, the project has few negative impacts on the environment. However, its positive
impacts on socio economy can replenish that impact.
12.2 Recommendation
Based on the available information and environmental survey conducted in the project area, it is
found that the proposed industry will not adversely affect the environment of the project area and
its surroundings as long as certain mitigation measures are taken. Mitigation measures have been
formulated and will be adopted during implementation and operation to ensure that the residual
environmental impact of the project is within acceptable levels. The negative environmental impacts

identified can be overcome by undertaking various mitigation measures as suggested in this
Environmental impact assessment (EIA) report.
The Environmental impact assessment (EIA) has not identified any comprehensive, broad diverse
or irreversible adverse environmental impacts caused by the project.
It is therefore, concluded that (i) the project will have few low to moderate adverse environmental
impacts , (ii) these adverse impacts will be small, (iii) they can be easily mitigated (iv) the project
has a net positive socio-economic impact.
We would therefore recommend to issue an environmental clearance certificate (ECC) of the

proposed power plant project based on the proponent’s commitment to conserve environment by
taking necessary measures during construction and operation period.


Eia Decpcl Vol-1 Final

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Eia Decpcl Vol-1 Final

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Environmental Impact Assessment

VOLUME I: MAIN REPORT

EQMS CONSULTING LIMITED

Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Limited (DECPCL)

Environmental Impact Assessment(EIA) for the 200 MW HFO-

Reviewed & Approved by:

Kazi Farhed Iqubal

EIA Report Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd.

EIA Report Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd.

EIA Report Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd.

4.4 Physical Environment......................................................................................................................79

EIA Report Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd.

5 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT AND MITIGATION MEASURES

EIA Report Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd.

EIA Report Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd.

8.8.5 Emergency Management Plan..............................................................................................237

EIA Report Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd.

10.8 Monitoring and Evaluation...........................................................................................................255

EIA Report Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd.

EIA Report Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd.

EIA Report Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd.

EIA Report Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd.

EIA Report Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd.

EIA Report Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd.

BFDC : Bangladesh Forest Department Corporation

BFRI : Bangladesh Forest Research Institute

BOD : Biological Oxygen Demand

BPC : Bangladesh Petroleum Corporation

CMS : Continuous Monitoring System

CNG : Compressed Natural Gas

COD : Chemical Oxygen Demand

DECPCL : Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd.

DOE : Department of Environment

DEPC : Department of Environmental Pollution Control

DFIs : Development Finance Institutions

DPHE : Directorate of Public Health Engineering

ECA : Environmental Conservation Act

ECC : Environmental Clearance Certificate

ECR : Environmental Conservation Rules

EHS : Environmental Health and safety

EIA : Environmental Impact Assessment

EIF : Electrical Interconnection Facility

EMP : Environment Management Plan

EPC : Energy Performance Certificate

EIA Report Desh Energy Chandpur Power Company Ltd.

ESIA : Environmental Social Impact Assessment

ESMP : Environmental and social management plan

FGD : Focus Group Discussion

GOB : Government of Bangladesh

GRC Grievance Redress Cell

GRM Grievance Redress Mechanism

HFO : Heavy Fuel Oil

HSE : Health safety and emergency

HVOHL High Voltage Overhead Transmission Line

IEE : Initial Environmental Examination

IUCN : International Union for Conservation of Nature

LHV : Lower Heating Value

MoEF : Ministry of Environment and Forest

NAAQS : National Ambient Air Quality Standards

NEMAP : National Environmental Management Action Plan

NEPA : National Fire Protection Association

NLDC : National Load Dispatch Centre

NOx : Oxide of Nitrogen

PGCB : Power Grid Company of Bangladesh